DOC-20241207-WA0026. - converted (1) - converted (3)

3.
44 Theory and Exercise Book
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
Section A - Distance, Displacement, Velocity 7. A particle, after starting from rest , experiences,
and Acceleration, Equation of constant acceleration for 20 seconds. If it covers a
Motion distance of S1, in first 10 seconds and distance S2 in
next 10 sec, then
1. A particle covers half of the circle of radius r. Then (A) S2 = S1/2 (B) S2 = S1
the displacement and distance of the particle are (C) S2 = 2S1 (D) S2 = 3S1
respectively -
(A) 2r, 0 (B) 2r, r
8. A body sliding on a smooth inclined plane requires
r 4sec to reach the bottom after starting from rest at
(C) , 2r (D) r, r
2 the top. How much time does it take to cover one
fourth the distance starting from the top
2. A hall has the dimensions 10m × 10m × 10 m. A fly (A) 1sec (B) 2 sec
starting at one corner ends up at a diagonally opposite (C) 0.4sec (D) 1.6 sec
corner. The magnitude of its displacement is nearly
(A) 5 3 m (B) 10 3 m 9. The initial velocity of a particle is 10 m/sec and its
retardation is 2 m/sec2. The distance covered in the
(C) 20 3 m (D) 30 3 m fifth second of the motion will be
(A) 1m (B) 19m
3. A car travels from A to B at a speed of 20 km h–1 (C) 50m (D) 75m
and returns at a speed of 30 km h–1. The average
speed of the car for the whole journey is 10. A body starts from rest, the ratio of distances
(A) 5 km h–1 (B) 24 km h–1 travelled by the body during 3rd and 4th seconds is :
–1
(C) 25 km h (D) 50 km h–1
(A) 7/5 (B) 5/7
(C) 7/3 (D) 3/7
4. A car travels a distance of 2000 m. If the first half
distance is covered at 40 km/hour and the second
half at velocity v and if the average velocity is 48
km/hour, then the value of v is - Section B - Motion under Gravity
(A) 56 km/hour (B) 60 km/hour
11. A body is dropped from a height h under acceleration
(C) 50 km/hour (D) 48 km/hour
due to gravity g. If t1 and t2 are time intervals for its
fall for first half and the second half distance, the
5. A car runs at constant speed on a circular track of radius
relation between them is
100 m taking 62.8 s on each lap. What is the average
speed and average velocity on each complete lap ? (A) t1 = t2 (B) t1 = 2t2
(A) velocity 10 m/s speed 10 m/s (C) t1 = 2.414 t2 (D) t1 = 4t2
(B) velocity zero, speed 10 m/s
(C) velocity zero, speed zero 12. Two bodies of different masses ma and mb are
(D) velocity 10 m/s, speed zero dropped from two different heights, viz a and b.
The ratio of times taken by the two to drop through
6. A body starts from rest and is uniformly accelerated these distances is
for 30 s. The distance travelled in the first 10s is x1,
ma b
next 10 s is x2 and the last 10 s is x3. Then x1 : x2 : (A) a : b (B) m : a
x3 is the same as b
(A) 1 : 2 : 4 (B) 1 : 2 : 5 (C) (D) a2 : b2

a: b
(C) 1 : 3 : 5 (D) 1 : 3 : 9
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4
Page 1
Kinematics 3.45
13. A body is thrown upward and reaches its maximum 19. A ball of mass m is thrown upward with a velocity
height. At that position- v. If air exerts an average resisting force F, the
(A) its velocity is zero and its acceleration is also zero velocity with which the ball returns back to the
(B) its velocity is zero but its acceleration is thrower is :
maximum
mg F
(C) its acceleration is minimum (A) v (B) v
mg  F mg  F
(D) its velocity is zero and its acceleration is the
acceleration due to gravity
mg  F
(C) v (D) None of these
mg  F
14. A ball is thrown upwards from the foot of a tower.
The ball crosses the top of the tower twice after an
interval of 4 second and the ball reaches ground 20. A bullet is fired vertically upwards with an initial
after 8seconds then the height of tower in meters is. velocity of 50 ms–1. If g = 10 ms–2, what is the ratio
(A) 20 m (B) 30 m of the distances travelled by the bullet during the
(C) 60 m (D) 50 m first and the last second of its upward motion ?
(A) 9 : 1 (B) 9 : 2
15. A ball is thrown upward from the edge of a cliff (C) 3 : 1 (D) 9 : 4
with an initial velocity of 6 m/s How fast is it moving
1/2 s later? (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 2 (B) 3 Section C - Graphs
(C) 4 (D) 1
21. The displacement-time graph of a moving particle is
16. A particle is thrown upward from ground. It shown below. The instantaneous velocity of the
experiences a constant resistive force which can produce particle is negative at the point
x
retardation of 6 m/sec2. What will be the ratio of time (A) C
D
of descent to time of ascent (g = 10 m/sec2) (B) D
E F
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) E
C
(C) 4 (D) 1 (D) F t
17. A particle is thrown upwards from ground. It 22. The variation of velocity of a particle moving along
experiences a consistant air resistance force which straight line is shown in the figure. The distance
can produce retardation 2 m/s2. The ratio of time of travelled by the particle in 4 s is
ascent to the time of descent is : [g = 10 m/s2] (A) 25m v(m/s)
2 (B) 30m
(A) 1 : 1 (B) (C) 55m
20
3 10
(D) 60m
t(s)
2 3 1 2 3 4
(C) (D)
3 2 23. The displacement time graphs of two particles A
and B are straight lines making angles of respectively
18. A ball is thrown vertically upward from a height of 30º and 60º with the time axis. If the velocity of A is
40 m and hits the ground with a speed that is three vA
times its initial speed. What is the time taken (in vA and that of B is vB then the value of v is
B
sec) for the fall?
(A) 2 sec (B) 3 sec (A) 1/2 (B) 1/ 3
(C) 4 sec (D) 8 sec (C) (D) 1/3
3
Page 2
3.46 Theory and Exercise Book
24. The v-t graph of a linear motion is shown in adjoining 27. If position time graph of a particle is sine curve as
figure. The distance from origin after 8 seconds is - shown, what will be its velocity-time graph
v v
(A) (B)
(A) 18 meters (B) 16 meters t t
(C) 8 meters (D) 6 meters
v
v
25. The adjoining curve represents the velocity-time
graph of a particle, its acceleration values along OA, (C) (D)
t
AB and BC in metre/sec2 are respectively- t
1
28. The diagram shows variation of with respect to
v
time (where v is in m/s).
1s 
 
v m
45º
t(s)
3
what is the instantaneous acceleration of body at
(A) 1, 0, -0.5 (B) 1, 0, 0.5  m

t = 3 sec.  in 2  .
(C) 1, 1, 0.5 (D) 1, 0.5, 0  s 
1
(A) 2 (B)
26. In the following velocity-time graph of a body, the 3
distance and displacement travelled by the body in (C) 1 (D) None of these
5 second in meters will be -
29. The particle moves with rectilinear motion given
the acceleration-displacement (a-S) curve is shown
in figure, determine the velocity after the particle
has traveled 30 m.
If the initial 2
a(m/s )
velocity is
10 m/s. 10
(A) 10m/s
(A) 75,115 (B) 105, 75 (B) 40m/s.
(C) 45, 75 (D) 95, 55 (C) 20m/s. S(m)
15 30
(D) 60m/s.
Page 3
Kinematics 3.47
30. Figure shows the graph of the x-co-ordinate of a 33. Velocity-time graph of a particle moving in a straight
particle going along the x-axis as function of time. line is shown in figure. In the time interval from
Find the instantaneous speed of particle at t = 12.5 s t = 0 to t = 14 s, find:
(in m/s)
v(m/s)
x
20
10
A 10 12 14
8m 0 t(s)
2 4 6
4m –10
O 4s 8s 12s 16s B (a) average velocity and
 50   25 
(A)   m/s (B)   m/s
(A) 2m/s (B) 8m/s.  7   7 
(C) 4m/s. (D) 6m/s.
 20   15 
(C)   m/s (D)   m/s
 7  7
31. Figure shows the graph of velocity versus time for a
particle going along x axis. Initially at t = 0, particle is (b) average speed of the particle
at x = 3m. Find (A) 20 m/s (B) 40 m/s
position of v(m/s) (C) 10 m/s (D) 30 m/s
particle at 10
t = 2s. (in m) 34. A body initially at rest moving along x-axis in such
(A) 9m 2 a way so that its acceleraation Vs displacement
(B) 3m plot is as shown in figure. What will be the maximum
(C) 12m
O 8 t velocity of particle in m/sec.
(A) 1 a
(D) 6m
(B) 2 1m/s2
32. Displacement-time graph of a particle moving in a (C) 3

straight line is as shown in figure. (D) 5
0.5 1m S
s c
a b d Section D - Variable Acceleration
o t
35. At an instant t , the co-ordinates of a particle are
x = at2, y = bt2 and z = 0 , then its velocity at the
instant t will be
(a) Find the sign of velocity in regions oa, ab, bc and cd
(A) negative , positive, positive, negative (A) t a 2  b2 (B) 2t a 2  b 2
(B) positive , positive, positive, negative (D) 2t2
(C) a 2  b2 a 2  b2
(C) positive , negative, positive, positive
(D) positive , positive, negative, negative
36. The displacement of a body is given by 2s = gt2
(b) Find the sign of acceleration in the above region
where g is a constant. The velocity of the body at
(A) zero, postive, negative, negative any time t is
(B) positive , zero, negative, positive (A) gt (B) gt/2
(C) positive , zero, positive, negative (C) gt2/2 (D) gt3/3
(D) positive , zero, negative, negative
Page 4
37. A particle is moving so that its displacement s is 43. A particle moving in a straight line has velocity
given as s = t3- 6t2 + 3t + 4 meter. Its velocity at the displacement equation as v  5 1  x . Here v is in
instant when its acceleration is zero will be - m/sec and x in metre. Select the correct alternative:-
(A) 3 m/s (B) -12 m/s (A) Particle is initially at rest.
(C) 42 m/s (D) -9 m/s (B) Initial velocity of the particle is 5 m/sec and the
particle has a constant acceleration of 12.5 m/sec2.
38. A particle starting from rest undergoes acceleration (C) Particle moves with uniform velocity.
given by a = | t – 2| m/s2 where t is time in sec. (D) None of these.
Velocity of particle after 4 sec is -
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s 44. The velocity of a body depends on time according
to the equation v = 20 + 0.1 t 2. The body is
(C) 8 m/s (D) 4 m/s
undergoing :
(A) uniform acceleration
39. The acceleration a in ms–2 of a particle is given by a (B) uniform retardation
= 3t2 + 2t + 2, where t is the time. If the particle (C) non–uniform acceleration
starts out with a velocity u = 2 ms–1 at t = 0, then (D) zero acceleration
find the velocity at the end of 2s.
(A) 16 m/s (B) 36 m/s 45. Starting from rest a particle moves in a straight line
(C) 18 m/s (D) 9 m/s with acceleration
 
1/ 2
a  25  t 2 m/s2 for 0  t  5s
40. The acceleration of a particle is given by
a = t3 – 3t2 + 5, where a is in ms–2 and t in sec. At t 3
a m / s 2 for t > 5s
= 1s, the displacement and velocity are 8.30 m and 8
6.25 ms–1, respectively. Calculate the displacement The velocity of particle at t = 7s is :
and velocity at t = 2 sec. (A) 11 m/s (B) 22 m/s
(A) 15.6 m, 4 m/s (B) 5.3 m, 4 m/s (C) 33 m/s (D) 44 m/s
(C) 15.6 m, 8 m/s (D) 15.3 m, 8 m/s
46. A particle moves along positive branch of the curve
Y = X2/2 with X governed by X = t2/2, where X
41. A particle starts moving along x-axis from t = 0, its
and Y are measured in metres and time t is seconds.
position varying with time as x = 2t3 – 3t2 + 1.
At t = 2s, the velocity of the particle is :
(a) At which time instants is its velocity zero ?
(A) 2iˆ  4ˆj (B) 4iˆ  2ˆj
(A) t = 0, 2s (B) t = 0, 3s
(C) t = 0, 4s (D) t = 0, 1s (C) 4iˆ  2ˆj (D) 2iˆ  4ˆj
(b) What is the velocity when it pass through origin ?
(A) v = 0 (B) v = 1 47. The motion of a body falling from rest in a viscous
(C) v = 5 (D) v = 3 dv
medium is described by  A  Bv , where A and
dt
42. A particle moves in the x-y plane with the velocity B are constants.
 The velocity at time t is given by :
v  aiˆ  bt ˆj . At the instant t  a 3 / b the
magnitude of total acceleration is : (A)
A
B

1  e  Bt  
(B) A 1  e
B t 2

(A) b (B) a
(C) ABe–t (D) AB2 (1 – t)
(C) b/a (D) a 2  b2
Page 5
Kinematics 3.49
48. A street car moves rectilinearly from station A to 52. A body is thrown with a velocity of 9.8 m/s making
the next stop B with an acceleration varying an angle of 30º with the horizontal. It will hit the
according to the law f = a – bx, where a and b are ground after a time-
positie constants and x is its distance from station (A) 3 s (B) 2 s
A. The distance AB is then equal to : (C) 1.5 s (D) 1 s
2a a
(A) (B) 53. A projectile thrown with a speed v at an angle  has
b b
a range R on the surface of the earth. For same v
(C)
a
(D) 2a – b and , its range on the surface of moon will be-
2b (A) R/6 (B) 6R
(C) R/36 (D) 36 R
49. The speed of a body moving on a straight track
varies according to v = 2t + 13 for 0  t  5s, 54. In a projectile motion the velocity -
v = 3t + 8 for 5 < t  7 s and v = 4t + 1 for (A) is always perpendicular to the acceleration
t < 7 s. The distances are measured in metre. The
(B) is never perpendicular to the acceleration
distance in metres moved by the particle at the end
(C) is perpendicular to the acceleration for one instant only
of 10 second is :
(D) is perpendicular to the acceleration for two instant
(A) 127 (B) 247
(C) 186 (D) 313
55. Two projectile A and B are projected with angle of
projection 15º for the projectile A and 45º for the
50. A particle moving along x–axis has acceleration 'f' at
projectile B. If RA and RB be the horizontal range
time t, given by
for the two projectiles, then -
 t (A) RA < RB (B) RA = RB
f  f0 1  
 T (C) RA > RB
where f0 and T are constants. The particle at t = 0 (D) The information is insufficient to decide the
has zero velocity. In the time interval between t = 0 relation of RA with RB
and the instant when f = 0, the particle's velocity
(vx) is : 56. A ball is thrown upwards. It returns to ground
describing a parabolic path. Which of the following
1 remains constant ?
(A) f0 T 2 (B) f0T2
2 (A) speed of the ball
1 (B) kinetic energy of the ball
(C) f 0T (D) f0T (C) vertical component of velocity
2
(D) horizontal component of velocity.
Section E - Ground-to Ground projectile 57. The angle of projection of a body is 15º . The other
Motion, Equation of Trajectory, angle for which the range is the same as the first
Projectile from tower, Projectile one is equal to-
Motion in Inclined plane (A) 30º (B) 45º
51. The horizontal and vertical distances travelled by a (C) 60º (D) 75º
particle in time t are given by x = 6t and
y = 8t – 5t2. If g = 10 m/sec2, then the initial velocity 58. A ball is thrown at an angle of 45º with the horizontal
of the particle is- with kinetic energy E. The kinetic energy at the
(A) 8 m/sec (B) 10 m/sec highest point during the flight is-
(C) 5 m/sec (D) zero (A) Zero (B) E/2
(C) E (D) (2)1/2E
Page 6
59. The maximum range of a projectile is 22 m. When 65. A ball is hit by a batsman at an angle of 37º as
it is thrown at an angle of 15º with the horizontal, its shown in figure. The man standing at P should run
range will beat what minimum velocity so that he catches the
(A) 22 m (B) 6 m ball before it strikes the ground. Assume that height
(C) 15 m (D) 11 m of man is negligible in comparison to maximum height
of projectile.
(A) 3 ms–1
5x 2 (B) 5 ms–1
60. The equation of projectile is y = 16x – . The
4 (C) 9 ms–1
horizontal range is- (D) 12 ms–1
(A) 16 m (B) 8 m
(C) 3.2 m (D) 12.8 m 66. Trajectories of two projectiles are shown in the
figure. Let T1 and T2 be the time periods and u1 and
61. If four balls A, B, C, D are projected with same u2 be their speeds of projection.
speed at angles of 15º, 30º, 45º and 60º with the Then -
(A) T2 > T1 Y
horizontal respectively, the two balls which will fall
at the same place will be- (B) T1 > T2
(A) A and B (B) A and D (C) u1 > u2
1 2
(C) B and D (D) A and C (D) u1 < u2
X
62. The velocity at the maximum height of a projectile 67. A hollow vertical cylinder of radius r and height h
is half of its initial velocity u. Its range on the has a smooth internal surface. A small particle is
horizontal plane is placed in contact with the inner side of the upper
rim, at point A, and given a horizontal speed u,
2u 2 3 u2 tangential to the rim. It leaves the lower rim at
(A) (B) point B, vertically below A. If n is an integer then-
3g 2g
u
u2 u2 (A) 2h / g = n
(C) (D) 2 r A u
3g 2g
h
(B) =n
2 r h
63. A marble A is dropped vertically, another identical
B
marble B is projected horizontally from the same 2 r
(C) =n
point at the same instant h r
(A) A will reach the ground earlier than B
u
(B) B will reach the ground earlier than A (D) 2gh = n
(C) both Aand B will reach the ground at the same instant
(D) none of the above
68. Time taken by the projectile to reach A to B is t.
64. An aeroplane is flying at a height of 1960 m in Then the distance AB is equal to –
horizontal direction with a velocity of 360 km/hr. ut
When it is vertically above the point. A on the ground, (A)
3
it drops a bomb. The bomb strikes a point B on the u
ground, then the time taken by the bomb to reach
3ut B
the ground is- (B)
2
60°
(A) 20 2 sec (B) 20 sec 30°
(C) 3 ut A
(C) 10 2 sec (D) 10 sec (D) 2 ut
Page 7
Kinematics 3.51
69. Rank the launch angles for the five paths in the 73. An object A is moving with 10 m/s and B is moving with
figure below with respect to time of flight, from the 5 m/s in the same direction of positive x-axis. A is 100 m
shortest time of flight to the longest– behind B as shown. Find time taken by A to Meet B
(A) 18 sec.
10m/s 5m/s
(B) 16 sec.
y(m ) A B
(C) 20 sec.
150 vi = 50 m/ s
(D) 17 sec. 100m
75° 74. A police jeep is chasing a culprit going on a motor

100
60°
45°
bike. The motor bike crosses a turning at a speed of
50
30° 72 km/h. The jeep follows it a speed of 90 km/h
15°
x(m)
crossing the turning ten seconds later than the bike.
100 150 200 250
50 Assuming that they travel at constant speeds, how
far from the turning will the jeep catch up with the
(A) 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 75° bike ? (in km)
(A) 3 km (B) 5 km
(B) 75°, 60°, 45°, 30°, 15°
(C) 1 km (D) 7 km
(C) 15°, 75°, 30°, 60°, 45°
(D) 30°, 60°, 15°, 45°, 75° 75. A wooden block of mass 20g is dropped from the
top of the cliff 50 m high. Simultaneously a bullet of
70. A particle is projected with a velocity of 20 m/s at mass 20 g is fired from the foot of the cliff upwards
an angle of 30º to an inclined plane of inclination with a velocity 25 ms-1. The bullet and the wooden
30º to the horizontal. The particle hits the inclined block will meet each other after time :
plane at an angle 30º, during its journey. The time (A) 2 s (B) 1 s
of flight is - (C) 0.5 s (D) 4 s
4 2 76. A cart is moving horizontally along a straight line

(A) (B)
3 3 with constant speed 30m/sec. A particle is to be fired
vertically upwards from the moving cart in such a
3 way that it returns to the cart at the same point from
(C) 3 (D)
2 where it was projected after the cart has moved 80
m. At what speed (relative to cart) must the projectile
be fired? (g = 10m/sec2)
(A) 10 m/sec (B) 10 8 m / sec
Section F - Relative Motion
40
71. Two trains each of length 50 m are approaching (C) m / sec (D) None of these
3
each other on parallel rails. Their velocities are 10
m/sec and 15 m/sec. They will cross each other in -
77. A passenger in a train drops a ball from the window
(A) 2 sec (B) 4 sec of the train running at an acceleration a. A pedestrian,
(C) 10 sec (D) 6 sec on the ground, by the side of the rails, observes the
ball falling along
72. A car A is going north-east at 80 km/hr and another (A) a vertical with an acceleration g2  a 2
car B is going south-east at 60 km/hr. Then the
direction of the velocity of A relative to B makes (B) a vertical acceleration g2  a 2
with the north an angle such that tan  is -
(A) 1/7 (B) 3/4 (C) a parabola with an acceleration g2  a 2
(C) 4/3 (D) 3/5 (D) a parabola with an acceleration g
Page 8
78. A monkey is climbing up a tree at a speed of 3 m/s. A 83. A boat moves relative to water a velocity which is
dog runs towards the tree with a speed of 4 m/s. What n times the river flow velocity. At what angle to the
is the relative speed of the dog as seen by the monkey? stream direction must be boat move to minimize
(A) > 7 m/s drifting ?
(B) Between 5 m/s and 7 m/s (A) /2 (B) sin–1 (1/n)
(C) 5 m/s (D) < 5 m/s  
(C) + sin–1 (1/n) (D) – sin–1 (1/n)
2 2
79. A car is going eastwards with a velocity of 8 m s–1.
To the passengers in the car, a train appears to be
84. A swimmer’s speed in the direction of flow of river
moving north wards with a velocity 15 m s–1. What
is 16 km h–1. Against the direction of flow of river,
is the actual velocity of the train?
the swimmer’s speed is 8 km h–1. Calculate the
(A) 7 ms–1 (B) 17 ms–1
–1
swimmer’s speed in still water and the velocity of
(C) 23 ms (D) None of the above
flow of the river.
(A) 12 km/h, 4 km/h (B) 10 km/h, 3 km/h
80. A particle is moving in x-y plane. At certain instant,
(C) 10 km/h, 4 km/h (D) 12 km/h, 2 km/h
the components of its velocity and acceleration are
as follows Vx = 3 m/s, Vy = 4 m/s, ax = 2 m/s2 and
85. A man wishes to cross a rive in a boat. If he crosses
ay = 1 m/s2. The rate of change of speed at this
the river in minimum time, then he takes 10 min
moment is
with a drift of 120 m. If he crosses the river taking
(A) 4 m/s2 (B) 2 m/s2
shortest route, he takes 12.5 min, find the velocity
2 2
(C) 3 m/s (D) 5 m/s of the boat with respect to water.
1 1
(A) (B)
3 5
Section G - River Boat Problems
1 1
(C) (D)
81. A river has width 0.5 km and flows from West to 6 2
East with a speed 30 km/hr. If a boatman starts
sailing his boat at a speed 40 km/hr normal to 86. A man crosses the river perpendicular to river flow
bank, the boat shall cross the river in time – in time t seconds and travels an equal distance down
(A) 0.6 minute (B) 0.75 minute the stream in T seconds. The ratio of man’s speed
(C) 0.45 minute (D) 3 minute in still water to the speed of river water will be:
t2  T2 T2  t 2
82. A boat man could row his boat with a speed (A) 2 (B) 2
t  T2 T  t2
10 m/sec. He wants to take his boat from P to a
point Q just opposite on the other bank of the river
flowing at a speed 4 m/sec. He should row his boat– t 2  T2 T2  t2
(C) (D)
t2  T2 T2  t 2
Q
vs = 4 m/s 87. A swimmer crosses the river along the line making
an angle of 45° with the direction of flow. Velocity
P of the river is 5 m/s. Swimmer takes 6 seconds to
cross the river of width 60 m. The velocity of the
(A) at right angle to the stream swimmer with respect to water will be :
(B) at an angle of sin–1 (2/5) with PQ up the stream (A) 10 m/s (B) 12 m/s
(C) at an angle of sin–1 (2/5) with PQ down the stream (C) 5 5 m/s (D) 10 2 m/s
(D) at an angle cos–1 (2/5) with PQ down the stream
Page 9
Kinematics 3.53
88. A swimmer crosses a river with minimum possible 92. An aeroplane flying at a constant velocity releases a
time 10 second. And when he reaches the other end bomb. As the bomb drops down from the aeroplane.
starts swimming in the direction towards the point
(A) it will always be vertically below the aeroplane
from where he started swimming. Keeping the
direction fixed the swimmer crosses the river in 15 (B) it will always be vertically below the aeroplane
sec. The ratio of speed of swimmer with respect to only if the aeroplane is flying horizontally
water and the speed of river flow is (Assume (C) it will always be vertically below the aeroplane
constant speed of river & swimmer) : only if the aeroplane is flying at an angle of 45° to
3 9 the horizontal.
(A) (B)
2 4 (D) it will gradually fall behind the aeroplane if the
aeroplane is flying horizontally
2 5
(C) (D)
5 2
93. A helicopter is flying south with a speed of 50 kmh–1.
89. STATEMENT 1 : The magnitude of velocity of two A train is moving with the same speed towards east.
boats relative to river is same. Both boats start The relative velocity of the helicopter as seen by
simultaneously from same point on one bank may the passengers in the train will be towards.
reach opposite bank simultaneously moving along (A) north east (B) south east
different paths.
(C) north west (D) south west
STATEMENT 2 : For boats to cross the river in
same time. The component of their velocity relative
to river in direction normal to flow should be same. 94. Two particles are moving with velocities v1 and v2.
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Their relative velocity is the maximum, when the
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1. angle between their velocities is
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-
(A) zero (B) /4
2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False. (C) /2 (D) 
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
95. A man in a balloon, throws a stone downwards with
90. A swimmer jumps from a bridge over a canal and swims a speed of 5 m/s with respect to balloon. The balloon
1 km upstream. After that first km, he passes a floating
is moving upwards with a constant acceleration of 5
cork. He continues swimming for half an hour and then
m/s2. Then velocity of the stone relative to the man
turns around and swims back to the bridge. The swimmer
after 2 second is :
and the cork reach the bridge at the same time. The
swimmer has been swimming at a constant speed. How (A) 10 m/s
fast does the water in the canal flow ? (B) 30 m/s
(A) 2 km/h (B) 3 km/h
(C) 15 m/s
(C) 1 km/h (D) 4 km/h
(D) 35 m/s
Section H - Rain Problems, Aircraft wind

96. Three stones A, B and C are simultaneously
problems, Relative Motion
between two projectiles projected from same point with same speed. A is
thrown upwards, B is thrown horizontally and C is
91. A man is walking on a road with a velocity
thrown downwards from a building. When the
3 km/hr. Suddenly rain starts falling. The velocity
distance between stone A and C becomes 10 m,
of rain is 10 km/hr in vertically downward direction.
The relative velocity of the rain is - then distance between A and B will be :
(A) (A) 10 m (B) 5 m

13 km/hr (B) 7 km/hr
(C) (C) 5 2 m/s (D) 10 2 m/s
109 km/hr (D) 13 km/hr
Page 10
97. Two aeroplanes fly from their respective position 99. STATEMENT 1 : Three projectiles are moving in
‘A’ and ‘B’ starting at the same time and reach of differnt paths in the air. Vertical component of
point ‘C’ (along straight line) simultaneously when relative velocity between any of the pair does not
wind was not blowing. On a windy day they head change with time as long as they are in air. Neglect
towards ‘C’ but both reach the point ‘D’ the effect of air friction.
simultaneously in the same time which they took to STATEMENT 2 : Relative acceleration between any
reach ‘C’. Then the wind is blowing in : of the pair of projectiles is zero.
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for
Statement-1.
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False.
(A) North-East direction
(B) North-West direction
(C) Direction making an angle 0 <  < 90 with North
100. STATEMENT 1 : Two stones are projected with
towards West.
different velocities from ground from same point
(D) North direction
and at same instant of time. Then these stones cannot
collide in mid air. (Neglect air friction)
98. A particle is thrown up inside a stationary lift of STATEMENT 2 : If relative acceleration of two
sufficient height. The time of flight is T. Now it is particles initially at same position is always zero,
thrown again with same initial speed v0 with respect then the distance between the particle either remains
to lift. At the time of second throw, lift is moving up constant or increases continuously wiht time.
with speed v0 and uniform acceleration g upward
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
(the acceleration due to gravity). The new time of
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
flight is:
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
T T Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for
(A) (B)
4 2 Statement-1.
(C) T (D) 2T (C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False.

Page 11

1. B 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. B
6. C 7. D 8. B 9. A 10. B
11. C 12. C 13. D 14. C 15. D
16. A 17. B 18. C 19. C 20. A
21. C 22. C 23. D 24. A 25. A
26. B 27. C 28. B 29. C 30. A
31. A 32. (a) B (b) D 33. (a) A (b) C 34. A 35. B
36. A 37. D 38. D 39. C 40. C
41. (a) D (b) A 42. A 43. B 44. C 45. B
46. D 47. A 48. A 49. B 50. C
51. B 52. D 53. B 54. C 55. D
56. D 57. D 58. B 59. D 60. D
61. C 62. B 63. C 64. B 65. B
66. D 67. A 68. A 69. A 70. A
71. B 72. A 73. C 74. C 75. A
76. C 77. D 78. C 79. B 80. B
81. B 82. B 83. C 84. A 85. A
86. C 87. C 88. C 89. A 90. C
91. C 92. A 93. D 94. D 95. D
96. C 97. B 98. B 99. A 100. A
Exercise - 2 (Leve-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. D 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. A
6. A 7. B 8. A 9. D 10. C
11. B 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. B
16. B 17. D 18. C 19. B 20. C
21. A 22. A 23. A 24. C 25. C
26. D 27. B 28. D 29. C 30. B
31. B 32. C 33. A 34. D 35. B
36. A 37. B 38. B 39. A 40. D
41. A 42. D 43. A 44. B 45. C
46. C 47. B 48. A 49. C 50. C
51. D 52. B 53. B 54. B 55. C
56. C 57. B 58. B 59. A 60. B
61. B 62. B 63. B 64. B 65. A
66. C 67. A 68. B 69. C 70. D
71. B 72. C 73. A 74. B 75. B
Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. B 2. A,B,C,D 3. A,C 4. B,C,D 5. A,D
6. A,C 7. A,C 8. A,B,C,D 9. A,B,C 10. A,C,D
11. A,B 12. D,C 13. A,B,C,D 14. A,B 15. A,B,C,D
16. A,C,D 17. A,B,C,D 18. A,B,C 19. B,C,D 20. A,C,D
21. C,D 22. B,D 23. B,C,D 24. A,C 25. C,D
26. B,D
Page 12
Errors 4.13
Section A - Significant digits, Rounding off 7. The percentage error in the above problem is
& mathematical operation, (A) 7% (B) 5.95%
Types of Errors
(C) 8.95% (D) 9.85%
1. The percentage errors in the measurement of mass
and speed are 2% and 3% respectively. How much
8. A student performs an experiment for determination
will be the maximum error in the estimation of the
kinetic energy obtained by measuring mass and speed? 4 2l
of g  and he commits an error of l. For that
(A) 11% (B) 8% T2
(C) 5% (D) 1% he takes the time of n oscillations with the stop watch
of least count T and the commits a human error of
2. The random error in the arithmetic mean of 100 0.1 sec. For which of he following data, the
observations is x; then random error in the arithmetic measurement of g will be most accurate?
mean of 400 observations would be l T n Ampli. of oscill.
1 (a) 5 mm 0.2 sec 10 5 mm
(A) 4x (B) x
4 (b) 5 mm 0.2 sec 20 5 mm
(c) 5 mm 0.1 sec 20 1 mm
1
(C) 2x (D) x (d) 1 mm 0.1 sec 50 1 mm
2
3. The unit of percentage error is Section B - Mathematical operation with

(A) Same as that of physical quantity Errors, Experiment of simple
(B) Different from that of physical quantity pendulum
(C) Percentage error is unit less 9. Consider the MB shown in the diagram, let the
(D) Errors have got their own units which are resistance X have temperature coefficient 1 and
different from that of physical quantity measured. the resitance from the RB have the temperature
coefficient 2. Let the reading of the meter scale be
4. The number of significant figures in all the given 10cm from the LHS. If the temperature of the two
numbers 25.12,2009, 4.156 and 217×10-4 is resistance increase by small temperature T then
(A) 1 (B) 2 what is the shift in the position of the null point ?
(C) 3 (D) 4 Neglect all the other changes in the bridge due to
temperature rise.
5. If the length of rod A is 3.25 ± 0.01 cm and that of
B is 4.19± 0.01 cm, then the rod B is longer than A X B C9 D
rod A by
(A) 0.94±0.00 mm (B) 0.94±0.01 cm G
(C) 0.94 ± 0.02 cm (D) 0.94±0.005 cm
E O
6. A body travels uniformly a distance of (13.8±0.2) 10 cm
m in a time (4.0±0.3) s. The velocity of the body
within error limits is (A) 9(1 – 2)T (B) 9(1 + 2)T
(A) (3.45±0.2) ms-1 (B) (3.45±0.3) ms-1 1 1
(C) (3.45±0.4) ms -1
(D) (3.45±0.5) ms-1 (C) ( + 2)T (D) ( – 2)T
9 1 9 1
Page 13
10. In a meter bridge set up, which of the following 14. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum in
should be the properties of the one meter long wire? the experiment is recorded as 2.63 s, 2.56 s, 2.42 s,
(A) High resistivity and low temperature coefficient 2.71 s and 2.80 s respectively. The average absolute
error is
(B) Low resistivity and low temeprature coefficient
(A) 0.1 s (B) 0.11s
(C) Low resistivity and high temperature coefficient
(C) 0.01 s (D) 1.0 s
(D) High resistivity and high temperature coefficient
15. According to Joule’s law of heating, heat produced

11. For a post office Box, the graph of galvanometer
H= I2 Rt, where I is current, R is resistance and t is
deflection versus R (resistance pulled out of RB) is
time. If the errors in the measurements of I, R and t
given as shown. A carelesss student pulls out two
are 3%, 4% and 6% respectively, then error in the
non consecutive values R marked in the graph. Find
measurement of H is
the value of unknown
Deflection (in division) (A) ±17% (B) ±16%
resistance.
(C) ±19% (D) ±25%
(A) 3.2 ohm
5
(B) 3.24 ohm
3.26
3.20
R 16. The length and breadth of a metal sheet are 3.124
(C) 3.206 –3
m and 3.002 m respectively. The area of this sheet
(D) 3.26
upto four correct significant figures is :
(A) 9.37 m2 (B) 9.378 m2
12. Identify which of the following diagrams represent
(C) 9.3782 m2 (D) 9.378248 m2
the internal construction of the coils wound in a
resistance box or PO box ?
Section C - Instruments (Vernier Callipers,
Screw Gauge) + Searle's
Method (Y) + u – v Method Exp.
(A) (B) 17. The length of a cylinder is measured with a metre

rod having least count 0.1 cm. Its diameter is
measured with vernier callipers having least count
0.01 cm. Given that length is 5.0 cm and radius is
2.0 cm. The percentage error in the calculated value
of the volume will be
(A) 1% (B) 2%
(C) (D)
(C) 3% (D) 4%
18. In an experiment, the following observations were

13. The relative density of material of a body is found recorded : L = 2.820 m, M = 3.00 kg, l = 0.087 cm,
by weighing it first in air and then in water. If the diameter D = 0.041 cm. Taking g = 9.81 m/s2 using
weight in air is (5.00 ± 0.05) Newton and weight in 4MgL
water is (4.00 ± 0.05) Newton. Then, the relative the formula, Y = , the maximum permissible
D 2l
density along with the maximum permissible
error in Y is
percentage error is
(A) 7.96% (B) 4.56%
(A) 5.0 ± 11% (B) 5.0 ±1%
(C) 6.50 % (D) 8.42%
(C) 5.0 ± 6% (D) 1.25 ± 5%
Page 14
Errors 4.15
19. A vernier callipers having 1 main scale division 23. One centimetre on the main scale of Vernier calli-
= 0.1 cm is designed to have least count of 0.02 cm. pers is divided into ten equal parts. If 10 divisions
If n be the number of divisions on veriner scale and of the main scale coincide with 8 small divisions of
m be the length of vernier scale, then the main scale, the least count of the callipers is :
(A) n = 10, m = 0.5 cm (A) 0.01 cm (B) 0.02 cm
(B) n = 9, m = 0.4 cm (C) 0.05 cm (D) 0.005 cm
(C) n = 10, m = 0.8 cm
(D)n = 10, m = 0.2 cm 24. The dimensions of a rectangular block measured
with a vernier callipers having least count of 0.1
mm is 5 mm × 10 mm × 5 mm. The maximum
20. In a Verniner Callipers (VC), N divisons of the main
percentage error in measurement of volume of the
scale coincide with (N + m) division of the vernier
block is
scale. What is the value of m for which the instrument
has minimum least count ? (N > 2) (A) 5 % (B) 10 %
(A) 1 (B) N (C) 15 % (D) 20 %
(C) Infinity (D) N/2
25. Two resistances R1 and R2 are connected in (i) series
and (ii) parallel. What is the equivalent resistance
21. In the Searle's experiment, after every step of loading,
with limit of possible percentage error in each case
why should we wait for two minutes before taking
of R1 = 5.0 ± 0.2 and R2=10.0 ± 0.1 .
the readings ?
(A) 15 ±2%, 3.3 ±3%
(A) So that the wire can have its desired change in
length (B) 25 ±2%, 3.3 ±2%
(B) So that the wire cannot attain room temeprature. (C) 15 ±3%, 3.3 ±2%
(C) So that vertical oscillations cannot get subsided. (D) 3.3 ±2%, 15 ±3%
(D) So that the wire has no change in its radius.
22. A thin copper wire of length l metre increases in

length by 2% when heated through 10°C. What is
the percentage increase in area when a square copper
sheet of length l metre is heated through 10°C?
(A) 4% (B) 8%
(C) 16% (D) None of these
Page 15

1. B 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. C 6. B 7. C
8. D 9. A 10. A 11. B 12. D 13. A 14. B
15. B 16. B 17. C 18. C 19. C 20. A 21. A
22. A 23. B 24. A 25. A

1. C 2. D 3. D 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. D
8. C 9. C 10. C 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. A
15. D 16. D 17. B 18. D 19. A 20. C 21. A
22. B 23. B

1. A,C 2. A,D
Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. 7% 2. 0.002 cm 3. 1.7×10-6m3 4. a 5. 19% 6. 0%
2
7. (2.00±0.05)s 8. 6% 9. ± 0.2 cm 10. 3% 11. 1.00 cm
12. 2.5%
Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced
1  X Y 
1. x 2. (22.1±0.1) cm 3. Q  n X  m Y  Q
4  
4. 8% 5. 1s 6. 1.0 mm
Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. D 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. D 6. B 7. B
8. D 9. A 10. A 11. 12. A 13. C 14. D
15. D 16. D 17. A 18. B 19. CD 20. A,C 21. D
22. C 23. A 24. B 25. D
Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. B 2. D 3. C 4. 4 5. B 6. A,B,D
7. B,C 8. 4 9. B 10. C
Page 16
NLM & FRICTION 2.37
Section A - String Constrained, W edge 5. Find velocity of ring B (VB) at the instant shown.
Constrained The string is taut and inextensible:
1
1. Find the velocity of the hanging block if the velocities (A) m/s
2
of the free ends of the rope are as indicated in the
VB 30°
figure.
2m/s 3 B
(A) 3/2 m/s  (B) m/s
4 VA=1m/s
(B) 3/2 m/s  1m/s 60°
A
1
(C) 1/2 m/s  (C) m /s
4
(D) 1/2 m/s 
(D) 1 m/s
2. Find velocity of block 'B' at the instant shown in

6. The 50 kg homogeneous smooth sphere rests on the
figure.
30° incline A and bears against the smooth vertical
(A) 25 m/s wall B. Calculate the contact forces at A and B.
37°
(B) 20 m/s B A
1000 500 B
(C) 22 m/s (A) NB = N,N = N
3 A 3
30°
(D) 30 m/s A 10 m/s
1000 500
(B) NA = N, N = N
3 B 3
3. In the figure shown
the velocity of
100 500
different blocks is (C) NA = N,N = N
3 B 3
shown. The velocity
of C is
1000 50
(A) 6 m/s (D) NA = N, N = N
3 B 3
6 m/s
4 m/s
(B) 4 m/s
6m/s
(C) 0 m/s
A B C D 7. Three blocks 1, 2 and 3 are arranged as shown in
(D) none of these the figure. The velocities of the blocks v1, v2 and v3
are shown in the figure. What is the relationship
4. The velocity of end ‘A’ of rigid rod placed between between v1, v2 and v3?
two smooth vertical walls moves with velocity ‘u’ v1 v2
along vertical direction. Find out the velocity of end 1 2
‘B’ of that rod, rod always remains in constant with
the vertical walls. A
(A) u tan 2 3
'u' v3
(B) u cot 
B
(C) u tan  (A) 2v1 + v2 = v3 (B) v1 + v2 =v3
(D) 2u tan  (C) v1 + 2v2 = v3 (D) None of these
Page 17
8. The ratio of acceleration of pulley to the 13. According to Newton’s third law action is always
acceleration of the block is (string is inextensible) equal to the reaction, a horse can pull a cart because
(A) 0.5 it applies a...
(A) Force on cart (B) Force on ground
(B) 2
P F (C) Both of than(D) None of these
(C) 1 m
(D) None of these

14. Which of the Newton’s law explain difficultly for a
fireman to hold a hose pipe, which ejects large
Section B - Newton's Law theory Question amounts of water athigh velocity.
(A) Newton’s First law (B) Newton’s Second law
   
9. When force F1 , F2 , F3 .....Fn act on a particle, the (C) Newton’s Third law (D) E = mc2

particle remains in equilibrium. If F1 is now removed
then acceleration of the particle is 15. When a carpet is beaten with a stick, dust comes
out of it. Explains by
 
F1 F1 (A) Newton’s First law (B) Newton’s Second law
(A) (B) 
m m
(C) Newton’s Third law (D) E = mc2
    
F2  F3  ...Fn  F1 F2
(C)  (D) 16. As an inclined plane is made slowly horizontal by
m m
reducing the value of angle  with horizontal. The
component of weight parallel to the plane of a block
10. You are on a friction less horizontal plane. How resting on the inclined plane-
can you get off if no horizontal force is exerted by (A) decreases (B) remains same
pushing against the surface ? (C) increases
(A) by jumping (B) by spitting or sneezing (D) increases if the plane is smooth
(C) by rolling your body on the surface
(D) by running on the plane Section C - Equillibrium Questions (Normal
and Tension), Problems with
Acceleration (F=ma)
11. A particle moves in the xy plane under the action of
a force F such that the value of its linear momentum 17. Two blocks of masses 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are
(P) at any time t is, Px = 2 cost, Py = 2 sint. The suspended from a rigid support S by two inextensible
angle  between P and F at that time t will be - wires each of length 1 m. The upper wire has
(A) 0º (B) 30º negligible mass and the lower wire has a uniform
mass of 0.2 kg/m. Thewhole system of block, wire
(C) 90º (D) 180º
and support have an upward acceleration of
0.2 m/s2. g=9.8 m/s2. The
12. You fall in the forward direction when a moving tension at the mid-point of
bus apply brakes to stop and fall backward when it lower wire is-
accelerates from rest because of..
(A) 10 N
(A) Newton’s First law (B) Newton’s Second law (B) 20 N
(C) Newton’s Third law (D) E = mc2 (C) 30 N
(D) 50 N
Page 18
NLM & FRICTION 2.39
18. The forces acting on an object are shown in the fig. 22. A weight can be hung in any of the following four
If the body moves horizontally at a constant speed ways by string of same type. In which case is the
of 5 m/s, then the values of the forces P and S are, string most likely to break ?
respectively-
(A) 0 N, 0 N
(B) 300 N, 200 N
(C) 300 N, 1000 N (A) W
(B) (C)
(D) 2000 N, 300 N W (D)
W
W
19. A body of mass 5 kg is suspended by the strings
making angles 60º and 30º with the horizontal -
(A) A (B) B
(C) C (D) D
23. An aeroplane, which together with its load has a

mass M =9600kg, is falling with an acceleration of
(a) T1 = 25 N (b) T2 = 25 N a = 5 m/s2 . If a part of the load equal to m kg be
thrown out, the aeroplane will begin to rise with an
(c) T1 = 25 3 N (d) T2 = 25 3 N
acceleration of a = 5 m/s2. Find the value of m?
(A) a, b (B) a, d (A) 6400 (B) 6450
(C) c, d (D) b, c (C) 6600 (D) 6700
20. A mass M is suspended by a rope from a rigid 24. A stretching force of 1000 Newton is applied at one
support at A as shown in figure. Another rope is end of a spring balance and an equal stretching force
tied at the end B, and it is pulled horizontally with a is applied at the other end at the same time. The
force F. If the rope AB makes an angle  with the reading of the balance will be :
vertical in equilibrium, then the tension in the string
(A) 2000 N (B) Zero
AB is :
(C) 1000 N (D) 500 N
(A) F sin  A
(B) F/sin   B
F Section D - Wedge problems
(C) F cos 
(D) F/cos  M 25. Body A is placed on frictionless wedge making an
angle  with the horizon. The horizontal acceleration
21. Three block are connected as shown, on a horizontal towards left to be imparted to the wedge for the body
frictionless table and pulled to the right with a force A to freely fall vertically, is –
T3 = 60 N. If m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 20 kg and m3 = 30 (A) g sin (B) g cos
kg, the tension T2 is-
(C) g tan (D) g cot
26. A trolley is accelerating down an incline of angle 

with acceleration gsin. Which of the following is
(A) 10 N (B) 20 N correct. ( is the constant angle made by the string
with vertical)
(C) 30 N (D) 60 N
Page 19
29. Two wooden blocks are moving on a smooth

horizontal surface such that the mass m remains
 stationary with respect to block of mass M as shown
in
m
gs
 in the figure. The magnitude of force P is :

(A) (M+m)g tan 
P m
 (B) g tan 
M
(C) mg cos 
(A)  =  (B)  = 0º (D) (M+m)g coses 
(C) Tension in the string, T = mg
30. A block of mass m is kept
(D) Tension in the string, T = mg sec 
on a wedge of mass M.
Initially the system is held.
27. A body of mass 1 kg lies on smooth inclined plane. At certain time the sytstem
is released and the wedge
The block of mass m is given force F = 10 N
is observed to move with
horizontally as shown. The magnitude of net normal accelertion A on inclined
reaction on the block is : surface as shown. There is
no friction anywhere. The
m=1kg acceleration of block (m)
with respect to wedge (M)
F=10N will be
(A) A rightward (B) A cos  rightward
45° (C) A cos  leftward (D) none of these
Section E - Pulley Block system

10
(A) 10 2N (B) N 31. Three blocks A, B and C are suspended as shown in
2
the figure. Mass of each blocks A and C is m. If
(C) 10 N (D) none of these system is in equilibrium and mass of B is M, then :
(A) M = 2m
28. In the figure shown ‘P’ is a plate on which a wedge (B) M < 2 m
B is placed and on B a block A of mass m is placed. (C) M > 2m
The plate is suddenly removed and system of B and A B C
(D) M = m
A is allowed to fall under gravity. Neglecting any
force due to air on A and B, the normal force on A
32. Two masses are hanging vertically over
due to B is
frictionless pulley. The acceleration of the two
masses is–
A m m1
(A) m g
2
P
B
m2
(B) m g
1
mg
(A) (B) mg cos  m 2  m1 
cos  (C)  m  m  g
 1 2 
2mg
(C) zero (D)  m1  m 2 
cos  (D)  m  m  g
 2 1 
Page 20
NLM & FRICTION 2.41
33. In the given arrangement, n number of equal masses 36. A particle of small mass m is joined to a very heavy
are connected by strings of negligible masses. The body by a light string passing over a light pulley.
tension in the string connected to nth mass is – Both bodies are free to move. The total downward
force in the pulley is
(A) mg (B) 2 mg
(C) 4 mg (D) can not be determined
37. Three equal weights A, B, C of mass 2 kg each are

m Mg m Mg hanging on a string passing over a fixed frictionless
(A) n m  M (B) n m M pulley as shown in the fig. The
tension in the string connecting
m Mg weights B and C is-
(C) mg (D) m N  M (A) zero
(B) 13 Newton
(C) 3.3 Newton
34. In the given figure, pulleys and strings are massless.
(D) 19.6 Newton
For equilibrium of the
system, the value of  is –
Section F - Spring force and spring cutting
(A) 60°
problems
(B) 30°
(C) 90° 38. Two masses of 1 kg and 5 kg are attached to the
ends of a massless string passing over a pulley of
(D) 120°
negligible weight. The pulley itself is attached to a
light spring balance as shown in
35. The pulley arrangements shown in figure are figure. The masses start moving
identical the mass of the rope being negligible. In during this interval; the reading of
case I, the mass m is lifted by attaching a mass 2m spring balance will be:
to the other end of the rope. In case II, the mass m is (A) more than 6 kg
lifted by pulling the other end of the rope with
(B) less than 6 kg
cosntant downward force F = 2mg, where g is
(C) equal to 6 kg 1kg
acceleration due to gravity. The acceleration of mass
(D) none of the above 5kg
in case I is
39. A system consists of two cubes of masses m1 and

m2 respectively connected by a spring of force
constant k. The force (F) that should be applied to
F=2mg the upper cube for which the lower one just lifts
after the force is removed is-
m 2m m
(A) m1g m1
(I) (II)
m1m 2
(A) zero (B) m  m g k
1 2
(B) more than that in case II (C) (m1 + m2) g m2

(C) less than that in case II (D) m2g
(D) equal to that in case II
Page 21
40. A block of mass 2 kg is hanging with two identical 43. With what acceleration ‘a’ should the box of figure
massless springs as shown in figure. The acceleration moving up so that the block of mass M exerts a
of the block at the moment, the right spring breaks force 7 Mg/4 on the floor of the box?
is (g = 10 m/s2) (A) g/4
(A) 10 m/s2 30º 30º (B) g/2 a
(B) 5 m/s2 (C) 3g/4 M
(C) 25 m/s2 2kg (D) 4g
2
(D) 4 m/s
44. A triangular block of mass M with angle 30º, 60º,
90º rests with its 30º– 90º side on
Section G - Pseudo force, W eighing
a horizontal smooth fixed table. A cubical block of
Machine
mass m rests on the 60º – 30º side of the triangular
41. A lift is going up. The total mass of the lift and the block. What horizontal acceleration a must M have
passenger is 1500 kg. The variation in the speed of relative to the stationary table so that m remains
the lift is as given in the graph. The tension in the stationary with respect to the triangular block
rope pulling the lift at t = 11th sec will be [M = 9 kg, m = 1 kg]
(A) 2.8 m/s2 (B) 5.6 m/s2
(C) 8.4 m/s2 (D) Zero
3.6
speed in m/sec
45. Which of the following statement is absolutely

correct about mass -
(A) More the mass of a body connected with spring
balance more will be elongation in spring balance
(B) More the mass of body kept in one pan of beam
balance more the mass has to be kept on the other
2 10 12 pan to keep beam-horizontal
(C) More the mass of a body, lesser will be its
(A) 17400 N (B) 14700 N acceleration for a given force
(C) 12000 N (D) Zero (D) All
46. In the arrangement shown, the pulleys are fixed and

42. Figure shows a man of mass 50 kg standing on a
ideal, the strings are light, m1 > m2 and S is a spring
light weighting machine kept in a box of mass 30
balance which is itself massless. The reading of S
kg. The box is hanging from a pulley fixed to
(in unit of mass) is
theceiling throught a light rope, the other end of
S
which is held by the man himself.
If the man manages to keep the box
at rest, the weight shown by the
machine is.
m2 m1
(A) 10 N
(B) 100 N 1
(A) m1 – m2 (B)  m1  m2 
(C) 800 N 2
(D) 200 N m1m 2 2m1m 2 g

(C) m  m (D) m  m
1 2 1 2
Page 22
NLM & FRICTION 2.43
47. A block of mass m resting on a wedge of angle  as 51. If the coefficient of friction between an insect and
shown in the figure. The wedge is given an accel- bowl is  and the radius of the bowl, is r, the
eration a. What is the minimum maximum height to which the insect can crawl in
value of a so that the mass m A
the bowl is :
falls freely ? m
(A) g a
(B) g cos  r

(C) g cot  B C
(D) g tan 
r  1 
48. Find out the reading of the weighing machine in the (A) (B) r 1 – 
1 2
 1   2 
following cases.
(A) 10 3 2k
g 2k
g
M
W
M (C) r 1  2 (D) r 1   2 – 1
W
(B) 10 2 30º 30º
(C) 20 3 (D) 30 3 52. A block is placed on a rough floor and a horizontal

force F is applied on it. The force of friction f by the
floor on the block is measured for different values
Section H - Static friction, Kinetic friction
of F and a graph is plotted between them -
49. The maximum value of the block m2 for which the (a) The graph is a straight line of slope 45°
system will remain in equilibrium (coefficient of (b) The graph is straight line parallel to the F axis
friction between block m1 and plane surface is ,
(c) The graph is a straight line of slope 45º for small
Pulley are mass less) is : m 1
F and a straight line parallel to the F-axis for largeF.
m1 (d) There is small kink on the graph
(A) 
2 m1
(A) c, d (B) a, d
m (C) a, b (D) a, c
(B) 1
2
(C) m1 (D) 2m1
53. Mark the correct statements about the
50. If the coefficient of friction between A and B is , friction between two bodies -
the maximum horizontal acceleration of the wedge (a) static friction is always greater than the kinetic
A for which B will remain at rest w.r.t the wedge is : friction
 1   (b) coefficient of static friction is always greater

(A)  g (B) g   than the coefficient of kinetic friction
1 
(c) limiting friction is always greater than the kinetic
B
g friction
(C) A
 (d) limiting friction is never less than static friction
a
(A) b, c, d (B) a, b, c
1–   45°
(D) g   (C) a, c, d (D) a, b, d
 1  
Page 23
54. A body is placed on a rough inclined plane of 58. A wooden block of mass m resting on a rough
inclination . As the angle  is increased from 0º to horizontal table (coefficient of friction = ) is pulled
90º the contact force between the block and the plane by a force F as shown in figure. The acceleration of
the block moving horizontally is :
(A) remains constant
F cos  F
(B) first remains constant then decreases (A)
m
(C) first decreases then increases 
(D) first increases then decreases Fsin  m
(B)
M
55. A block of mass 2kg rests on a rough inclined plane F

(C) (cos    sin ) – g
making an angle of 30º with the horizontal. The m
coefficient of static friction between the block and (D) none
the plane is 0.7. The frictional force on the block is–
(A) 0.7 × 9.8 Newton 59. A cart of mass M has a block of mass m
(B) 9.8 Newton attached to it as shown in figure. The coefficient of
friction between the block and cart is . The
(C) 0.7 × 9.8 3 Newton minimum acceleration of the cart so that the block
m does not fall is ?
(D) 9.8 × 3 Newton
(A) g/
M m
(B) /g
56. A body of mass m moves with a velocity v on a (C) g
surface whose friction coefficient is . If the body (D) Mg/m
covers a distance s then v will be :
60. In the arrangement as shown, block A of mass 3 kg
(A) 2gs (B) gs moves towards left with velocity 10 m/s. Initially
block A is 100 m from pulley on a smooth surface.
(C) gs / 2 (D) 3gs Block B is of mass 2 kg (g = 10m/s2) :
(A) At t = 1 sec, velocity A
of A will be 6 m/s towards
Section I - Direction of friction, Pulley left
Block system on horizontal
(B) A will stop at t = 4.5 sec
plane
(C) Block A will be at a 100 m B
57. A box 'A' is lying on the horizontal floor of the distance 108 m from
compartment of a train running along horizontal rails pulley at t = 5s
from left to right. At time 't', it decelerates. Then the (D) Block A will again be a distance of 100 m from
reaction R by the floor on the box is given best by pulley at t = 10s
R R 61. A body is projected up a 45° rough incline. If the

A A
(A) (B) coefficient of friction is 0.5, then the retardation of
floor floor
the block is
R g g
R
(A) (B)
A A 2 2 2
(C) (D)
floor floor 3g g
(C) (D)
2 2 2
Page 24
NLM & FRICTION 2.45
62. Mass of upper block and lower block kept over the Section J - Pulley Block system on inclined
table is 2 kg and 1 kg respectively and coefficient of plane
friction between the blocks is 0.1. Table surface is
65. Two masses M1 and M2 are attached to the ends of a
smooth. The maximum mass M for which all the three light string which passes over a massless pulley attached
blocks move with same acceleration is (g = 10 m/s2) - to the top of a double inclined smooth plane of angles
(A) 1 kg of inclination and . The tension in the string is :
(B) 2/3 kg
(C) 1/3 kg
(D) 3/4 kg
M2
M1  fixed

63. A body A of mass 1 kg rests on a smooth surface.
Another body B of mass 0.2 kg is placed over A as
M 2 (sin ) g M1 (sin ) g
shown. The coefficient of static friction between A (A) M  M (B) M1  M 2
1 2
and B is 0.15. B will begin to slide on A, if A is
pulled with a force greater than M1 M 2 (sin   sin ) g
(C) M1  M 2
(A) 1.764 N
(B) 0.1764 N (D) zero
(C) 0.3 N
(D) it will not slide for any F 66. Two masses M1 and M2 are attached to the ends of
a string which passes over a pulley attached to the
top of an inclined plane. The angle of inclination of
64. In the figure shown, blocks A, B and C weigh 3 kg,
the plane is 30° and M1 = 10 kg. M2=5 kg. What is
4 kg and 8 kg respectively. The coefficient of sliding the acceleration of mass M2 ?
friction between any two surfaces is 0.25. A is held (A) 10 m/s2
at rest by a massless rigid rod fixed to the wall while
(B) 5 m/s2
B and C are connected by a string passing round a M1
(C) Zero
frictionless pulley. Find the force needed to drag C
(D) Data insufficient M2
along the horizontal surface to left at constant speed. 
67. Inclined plane is moved towards right with an

A acceleration of 5ms–2 as shown in figure. Find force
B in newton which block of mass 5 kg exerts on the
incline plane. (All surfaces are smooth)
F C
5kg
Assume the arrangement shown in figure is 37º
maintained all through. (g = 10 m/s ) 2 5 m/s2
(A) 50 N (B) 60 N
(A) 75 (B) 80
(C) 55 N (D) 70 N
(C) 85 (D) None of these
Page 25
68. A block of mass 5 kg resting on a horizontal surface 71. The value(s) of mass m for which the 100 kg block
is connected by a cord, passing over a light does not move upward
frictionless pulley to a hanging block of mass 5 kg. (A) 39 kg
The coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and (B) 40 kg
100 m
the surface is 0.5. Tension in the cord is (g = 9.8 m/s2) (C) 83 kg   0.3
A 37°
(A) 49 N 5 kg (D) 85 kg
(B) Zero
(C) 36.75 N 72. For the arrangement shown in the figure
5 kg B
(D) 12.75 the tension in the string is
[Given: tan-1 (0.8) = 39°].
(A) 6 N m=1kg
69. In the arrangement as shown, when mass of block A
is m1 and mass of block B is m2, time taken by m1 to (B) 6.4 N
reach maximum height is 3 times the time taken by (C) 0.4 N 30°
m2 to reach maximum height, when block A is of (D) zero
mass m2 and block B is of mass m1. All ropes and
pulleys are smooth and massless -
Section K - Two Block system, Two Block on

Inclined plane
L
L
A 73. Three blocks A, B and C of equal mass m are placed
on a smooth surface as shown. Coefficient of friction
B
between any block A, B and C is . The maximum
30º value of mass D so the block A, B & C move without
slipping over each other is -
C
(A) The ratio of acceleration in first to second case B
3m
is 2/9. (A)   1 A
(B) The ratio of acceleration in first to second case
is 9. 3m(1  )
(B) 
(C) The ratio of (m1/m2) is (19/11) D
(D) The ratio of (m1/m2) is (4/3)

3m (1  ) 3m
(C)  (D) (1  )
70. Two blocks are connected over a massless pulley as

shown in figure. The mass of block A is 10 kg and
74. Two masses 40 kg and 30 kg connected by a
the coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.2. Block A
massless string passing over a frintionless light
sliders down the incline at constant speed. The mass
pulley as shown in the figure. The tension (almost)
of block B in kg is
in the string will be : (All surfaces are frictionless)
(A) 5.4
(A) 188 N
T T
(B) 3.3 kg
30
(B) 368 N 40 m
kg
(C) 4.2 m1 2
30° B (C) 288 N

Fixed
(D) 6.8 (D) 168 N 30° 30°
Page 26
NLM & FRICTION 2.47
75. In the figure (g = 10 m/s2). Acceleration of 2 kg 78. A block of mass 15 kg is resting on a rough inclined
block is : F =18 N
2
plane as shown in figure. The block is tied up by a
(A) 2 m/sec2 1
horizontal string which has a tension of 50 N. The
sm kg 2
2 oo kg coefficient of friction between the surfaces of contact
(B) 4 m/sec th 3k g
F
1 =6 is (g = 10 m/s2)
(C) 6 m/sec2 0
N T
30°
(A) 1/2
(D) 8 m/sec2 m
(B) 2/3
horizontal
(C) 3/4 45º
76. A block placed on a rough inclined plane of
(D) ¼
inclination ( = 30º) can just be pushed upwards by
applying a force “F” as shown. If the angle of
inclination of the inclined plane is increased to ( = 79. Figure shows two blocks in contact sliding down an
60º), the same block can just be prevented from inclined surface of inclination 30º. The friction
sliding down by application of a force of same coefficient between the block of mass 2.0 kg and
magnitude. The coefficient of friction between the the incline is µ1, and that between the block of mass
block and the inclined plane is 4.0 kg and the incline is µ2. Calculate the acceleration
of the 2.0 kg block if µ1 = 0.30 and µ2 = 0.20, Take
3 1 g = 10 m/s2
(A)
3 1 (A) 2 m/s2
F
(B) 2.7 m/s2
2 3 1
(B) (C) 4 m/s2
3 1
(D) 2.4 m/s2
3 1
(C) (D) none of these
3 1 80. Two blocks connected by a massless string slide
down an inclined plane having angle of inclination
37º. The masses of the two blocks are M1 = 4 kg
77. A fixed wedge with both surface inclined at 45° to and M2 = 2 kg respectively and the coefficients of
the horizontal as shown in the figure. A particle P of friction 0.75 and 0.25 respectively –
mass m is held on the smooth plane by a light string
which passes over a smooth pulley A and attached
to a particle Q of mass 3m which rests on the rough
plane. The system is released from rest. Given that
the acceleration of each particle is of magnitude
g
then, the tension
5 2 A
(A) The common acceleration of the two masses is
in the string is : 1.3 ms–2
(A) mg
th
Ro
P Q (b) The tension in the string is 14.7 N

oo
ug
m 3m
Sm
6mg 45° fixed 45° (c) The common acceleration of the two masses is
(B) 2.94 ms–2
5 2
(d) The tension in the string is 5.29 N
mg mg (A) a, d (B) c, d
(C) (D)
2 4
(C) b, d (D) b, c
Page 27
NLM & FRICTION 2.75
1. A 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. B 7. D
8. A 9. B 10. B 11. C 12. A 13. B 14. C

15. A 16. A 17. B 18. C 19. B 20. B 21. C
22. C 23. A 24. C 25. D 26. A 27. A 28. C
29. A 30. B 31. B 32. C 33. A 34. A 35. C
36. C 37. B 38. B 39. C 40. A 41. C 42. B
43. C 44. B 45. C 46. D 47. C 48. A 49. A
50. B 51. B 52. A 53. A 54. B 55. B 56. A
57. C 58. C 59. A 60. A 61. C 62. D 63. A
64. B 65. C 66. C 67. C 68. C 69. C 70. B
71. C 72. D 73. D 74. D 75. A 76. C 77. B
78. A 79. D 80. A
Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. A 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. C
8. B 9. B 10. B 11. C 12. C 13. A 14. A
15. B 16. A 17. C 18. B 19. C 20. B 21. C
22. C 23. B 24. B 25. C 26. B 27. B
28. (i) A (ii) A (iii) A (iv) C (v) B (vi) C
(vii) C (viii) B
29. (i) A (ii) A (iii) C (iv) D (v) B (vi) D
(vii) B (viii) B
30. B 31. B 32. B 33. A 34. D 35. A 36. C
37. D 38. C 39. A 40. A 41. B 42. D 43. A
44. C 45. A 46. C 47. D 48. C 49. B 50. D
51. B 52. A 53. D 54. A

1. B 2. B,C 3. A,C 4. A,B,C 5. A,C
6. A,C 7. A,B,C 8. A,C 9. A,B,D 10. A,C
11. A,C 12. B 13. AC 14. A,B,D 15. ABCD
16. BC 17. C,D 18. A,B 19. B,D 20. A,B
21. A,D 22. B,D 23. AB 24. A,B,C 25. A,B,D
26. A,B
Page 28
CIRCULAR MOTION & WPE 3.41
Circular Motion 4

(A) 0, 2( + 4) (B) ,0
Section A - Kinematics of circular Motion 2
4
1. A wheel is at rest. Its angular velocity increases (C) 21.4, (D) 0, 3(+ 4)
2
uniformly and becomes 80 radian per second after
5 second. The total angular displacement is : 6. A particle is moving on a circular path of radius r
(A) 800 rad (B) 400 rad with uniform speed v. What is the diplacement of
(C) 200 rad (D) 100 rad the particle after it has described an angle of 60°?
(A) r 2 (B) r 3
2. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular a cceleration (C) r (D) 2r
about its axis. Initially its angular velocity is zero. In
7. An insect trapped in a circular groove of radius 12
the first 2 sec, it rotates through an angle  ; in the
cm moves along the groove steadily and completes 7
next 2 sec, it rotates through an additional angle 2.
revolutions in 100 s. The linear speed of the insect is-
The ratio of 2 /1 is-
(A) 4.3 cm s-1 (B) 5.3 sm s-1
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 6.3 cm s -1
(D) 7.3 cm s-1
(C) 3 (D) 5
8. The magnitude of displacement of a particle moving
in a circle of radius a with constant angular speed
3. The second’s hand of a watch has length 6 cm. Speed
varies with time t is
of end point and magnitude of difference of velocities
at two perpendicular positions will be : t
(A) 2a sin t (B) 2a sin
2
(A) 2 & 0 mm/s (B) 2 2  & 4.44 mm/s
t
(C) 2a cos t (D) 2a cos
(C) 2 2  & 2 mm/s (D) 2 & 2 2  mm/s 2
9. Position vector of a particle moving in xy plane at

4. A particle is moving along a circular path with
uniform speed. Through what angle does its angular time t is r = a(1–cos t) î + a sin t ĵ . The path of
velocity change when it completes half of the circular the particle is
path? (A) a circle of radius a and center at (a,0)
(A) 0° (B) 45° (B) a circle of radius a and center at (0,0)
(C) an ellipse
(C) 180° (D) 360° (D) neither a circle nor an ellipse
5. A cyclist starts from the centre O of a circular park 10. A particle moves in xy plane. The
of radius 1 km, reaches the edge P of the park, then position vector at any time t is

cycles along the PQ circumference and returns to r  {(2t)iˆ  (2t 2 )ˆj}m . The rate of change of a  at
the centre along QO as shown in
Q time t = 2 second (where  is the angle which its
the figure. velocity vector makes with positives x-axis) is
If the round trip takes ten 2 1
minutes, the net P (A) rad / s (B) rad / s
O 17 14
displacement and average
speed of the cyclist (in 4 6
(C) rad / s (D) rad / s
kilometre and kilometer 7 5
per hour) is
Page 29
Section B - Centripetal and tangential 14. Velocity vector and acceleration vector in a uniform
Acceleration, Relative Circular circular motion are related as
Motion (A) both in the same direction
11. Two moving particles P and Q are 10 m apart at a (B) perpendicular to each other
certain instant. The velocity of P is 8 m/s making 30º
(C) both in opposite direction
with the line joining P and Q and that of Q is 6 m/s
(D) not related to each other
making an angle 30º with PQ as shown in the firuge
.Then angular velocity of P with respect to Q is-
15. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two
revolutions per sec. The acceleration of the particle
in m/s2 is :
(A) 2 (B) 82
(C) 42 (D) 22
16. For a particle performing uniform circular motion,

choose the incorrect statement from the following.
(A) 0 rad/s (B) 0.1 rad/s
(A) Magnitude of particle velocity (speed) remians
(C) 0.4 rad/s (D) 0.7 rad/s
constant.
(B) Particle velocity remains directed perpendicular
12. A racing car is travelling along a track at a constant to radius vector.
speed of 40 m/s. A T.V. camera men is recording the
(C) Direction of acceleration keeps changing as
event from a distance of 30 m directly away from
particle moves.
the track as shown in figure. In order to keep the car
under view in the positio shown, the angular speed (D) Magnitude of acceleration does not remain
with which the camera should be rotated, is- constant.
17. A motor car is travelling at 60 m/s on a circular

road or radius 1200 m. It is increasing its speed at
the rate of 4 m/s2. The acceleration of the car is :
(A) 3 m/s2 (B) 6 m/s2
(C) 5 m/s2 (D) 7m/s2
(A) 4/3 rad/sec (B) 3/4 rad/sec 18. A car speeds up in a circular path. Which of the following
figures illustrates the acceleration of the car?
(C) 8/3 3 rad/sec (D) 1 rad/sec
a a
13. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius 'a' with a
uniform speed v. C is the centre of the circle and AB (A) (B)
is a diameter. When passing through B the angular
velocity of P about A and C are in the ratio
(A) 1 :1 (B) 1 :2
(C) 2 :1 (D) 4 :1 a
(C) a (D)
Page 30
19. The linear and angular acceleration of a particle are 24. If the radii of circular paths of two particles of same
10 m/sec2 and 5 rad/sec2 respectively it will be at a masses are in the ratio of 1 : 2, then in order to have
distance from the axis of rotation - same centripetal force, their speeds should be in the
(A) 50 m (B) 1/2 m ratio of :
(C) 1 m (D) 2 m (A) 1 : 4 (B) 4 : 1
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
20. The diagram shows a CD rotating clockwise (as seen
from above) in the CD-player. After turning it off,
the CD slows down. Assuming it has not come to a 25. A particle moving along a circular path due to a
stop yet, the direction of the acceleration of point P centripetal force having constant magnitude is an
at this instance is : example of motion with :
(A) constant speed and velocity
(B) variable speed and velocity
(C) variable speed and constant velocity
(D) constant speed and variable velocity.
(A) (B)
(C) (D) 26. A stone of mass m tied to a string of length l is

rotated in a circle with the other end of the string as
the centre. The speed of the stone is v. If the string
Section C - Dynamics of Circular Motion breaks, the stone will move
(Centripetal force, Centrifugal
force), Circular Motion in (A) towards the centre
horizontal plane (B) away from the centre
(C) along a tangent
21. A stone of mass 0.5 kg tied with a string of length (D) will stop
1 metre is moving in a circular path with a speed of
4 m/sec. The tension acting on the string in Newton is-
27. A stone of mass 0.1 kg tied to one end of a string
(A) 2 (B) 8
1.0 m long is revolved in a horizontal circle at the
(C) 0.2 (D) 0.8
rate of 10/ revolution per second. Calculate the
tension of the string?
22. A coin placed on a rotating turn table just slips if it
(A) 30 N (B) 40 N
is at a distance of 40 cm from the centre if the angular
velocity of the turntable is doubled, it will just slip (C) 50 N (D) 60 N
at a distance of
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm 28. A block of mass M is situated on a smooth horizontal
(C) 40 cm (D) 80 cm frictionless table. A thread tied to the block passes
through a hole in the table and carries a mass m at
23. A stone is rotated steadily in a horizontal circle with its other end. If the length of the thread above the
a time period T by means of a string of length . If table is l, what should be the value of m so that it
the tension in the string is kept constant and length may remain suspended at a constant height and the
 increase by 1%, then percentage change in time block M moves in a circular path with an angular
period T is- velocity on the table?
(A) 1 % (B) 0.5 %
(C) 2 % (D) 0.25 %
Page 31
32. The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a circle

l M
of radius R depends on the distance covered s as
T = KS2 where K is a constant. Find the force acting
on the particle as a function of S -
2 2
2K S R
(A) 1   (B) 2KS 1   
S R S
m
2 2
2
Ml 2 S 2S R
Ml (C) 2KS 1    (D) 1  
(A)
g
(B)
3g R K S
Ml 2 2Ml 2
Section D - Circular Turning on Roads, Well
(C) (D)
5g g of death and cycle on curved
path
33. A car of mass 1000 kg moves on a circular path

29. A string of length l = 1 m is fixed at one end and
with constant speed of 16 m/s. It is turned by 90º
carries a mass of 100 gm at other end. The string
after travelling 628 m on the road. The centripetal
makes 5/ revolutions per second about a vertical force acting on the car is-
axis passing through its second end. What is the (A) 160 N (B) 320 N
angle of inclination of the string with the vertical? (C) 640 N (D) 1280 N
(A) 30° (B) 45°
(C) 60° (D) 75° 34. A cyclist is moving on a circular track of radius 80
m with a velocity of 72 km/hr. He has to lean from
the vertical approximately through an angle
30. Indicate the direction of frictional force on a car
(A) tan–1 (1/4) (B) tan–1 (1)
which is moving along the curved path with non
–1
zero tangential acceleration; in anti-clock direction. (C) tan (1/2) (D) tan–1 (2)
f 35. A curved section of a road is banked for a speed v. If

f
f there is no friction between road and tyres of the car,
f then :
(A) car is more likely to slip at speeds higher than v
(a) (b) (c) (d)
than speeds lower than v
(B) car cannot remain in static equilibrium on the
31. A particle is attached to an end of a rigid rod. The curved section
other end of the rod is hinged and the rod rotates (C) car will not slip when moving with speed v
always remaining horizontal. Its angular speed is (D) none of the above
increasing at constant rate. The mass of the particle
is 'm'. The force exerted by the rod on the particle is 36. A road is banked at an angle of 30° to the horizontal

F , then : for negotiating a curve of radius 10 3 m. At what
(A) F mg (B) F is constant velocity will a car experience no friction while
 negotiating the curve?
(C) The angle between F and horizontal plane
decreases. (A) 54 km/hr (B) 72 km/hr
 (C) 36 km/hr (D) 18 km/hr
(D) The angle between F and the rod decreases.
Page 32
37. A cyclist taking turn bends inwards while a car WORK, POWER, ENERGY
passenger take the same turn is thrown outwards.
Section A - Work done by constant force,
The reason is-
Work done by variable force,
(A) car is heavier then cycle Area under Graph
(B) car has four wheels while cycle has only two 41. A man pushes a wall and fails to displace it. He
(C) difference in the speed of the two does
(D) Cyclist has to counteract the centrifugal force (A) negative work (B) positive work
while in the case of car only the passenger is thrown (C) no work at all (D) can't say
by this force
42. A weightlifter lifts a weight off the ground and holds
it up, then
38. A circular track is banked at an angle  for the speed (A) work is done in lifting as well as holding the weight.
v. Which of the following is correct? (B) no work is done in both lifting and holding the weight
(A) There is one value of speed for which friction is (C) work is done in lifting the weight but no work is
zero. required to be done in holding it up
(B) There is range of speeds for which friction is (D) no work di done in lifting the weight but work
zero. id required to be done in holding it up.
(C) Friction always acts up the plane.

43. When the bob of a simple pendulum swings, the
(D) The friction that acts is kinetic in nature. work done by tension in the string is :
(A) > 0 (B) < 0
39. A car is negotiating a curved road of radius r. If the (C) zero (D) maximum
coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road
is , the car will skid if its speed exceeds 44. In case of circular motion of a body, if tangential
force also acts on the body in addition to centripetal
(A) rg (B) 2rg force, then work done:
(A) by both the forces is zero.
(C) 3rg (D) 2 rg (B) by both the forces is positive.
(C) by centripetal force is zero but work done by
tangential force is not zero.
40. A car turns a corner on a slippery road at a constant (D) by tangential force is zero by work done by
speed of 12 m/s. If the coefficient of friction is 0.4, centripetal force is not zero.
the minimum radius of the arc in metres in which
the car turns is 45. The relationship between the force F and position x
(A) 72 (B) 36 of a body is as shown in figure. The work done in
displacing the body from x = 1 m to x = 5 m will be
(C) 18 (D) 9
F(N)
10
5
0 x(m)
1 2 3 4 5 6
-5
-10
(A) 30 J (B) 15 J
(C) 25 J (D) 20 J
Page 33
46. A force F acting on an object varies with distance x Section B - Work done by conservative,
as shown in the figure. Non conservative force
20 49. A body travels through a distance of 10 m on a

15 straight line, under the influence of 5 N . If the work
F
(in N) 10
done by the force is 25J, the angle between the force
5
and displacement is-
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (A) 0º (B) 30º
-5 x(in m)
-10 (C) 60º (D) 90º

-15
-20
50. The work done in pushing a block of mass 10 kg
The work done by the force in moving the object from bottom to the top of a frictionless inclined plane
from x = 0 to x = 8 m is 5 m long and 3 m high is- (g = 9.8 m/sec2)
(A) zero J (B) 80 J (A) 392 J (B) 294 J
(C) – 40 J (D) 40 J (C) 98 J (D) 0.98 J
47. A particle of mass 0.5 kg is displaced from position 51. A chain of mass m and length  is placed on a table
 
with one-sixth of it hanging freely from the table
r1 (2, 3, 1) to r2 (4, 3, 2) by applying of force of edge. The amount of work. done to pull the chain
on the table is
magnitude 30 N which is acting along (iˆ  ˆj  k)
ˆ .
(A) mg/4 (B) mg/6
The work done by the force is -
(C) mg/72 (D) mg/36
(A) 10 3 J (B) 30 3 J
(C) 30 J (D) None of these 52. The work done by the frictional force on a surface
in drawing a circle of radius r on the surface by a
pencil of negligible mass with a normal pressing
48. A particle of mass .m. moves along the quarter
force N (coefficient of friction k) is :
section of the circular path whose centre is at the
origin. The radius of the circular path is .a.. A force (A) 0 (B) –2 r 2 k N

F  yî  xj
ˆ newton acts on the particle, where x, y
(C) –3r 2 k N (D) –2 r k N
denote the coordinates of position of the particle.
Calculate the work done by this force in taking the
particle from point A (a, 0) to point B (0, a) along 53. The work done is joules in increasing the extension of
the circular path. a spring of stiffness 10 N/cm from 4 cm to 6 cm is :
(A) 1 (B) 10
a 2
(A) J (C) 50 (D) 100
4
a 2 54. A block of mass 10 kg is released on a fixed wedge

(B) J
2 inside a cart which is moved with constant velocity
10 m/s towards right. Take initial velocity of block
a 2 a 2 with respect to cart zero. Then work done by normal
(C) – J (D) – J
2 4 reaction (with respect to ground) on block in two
second will be: (g = 10 m/s2).
Page 34
(A) zero 61. Kinetic energy of a particle moving in a straight

(B) 960 J line varies with time t as K = 4t2. The force acting
(C) 1200 J on the particle-
(D) none of these (A) is constant
(B) is increasing
55. Work done by force of friction :
(C) is decreasing
(A) can be positive (B) can be negative
(C) can be zero (D) any of these (D) first increase and then decrease
56. Natural length of a massless spring (of spring 

62. The potential energy for a force field F is given by
constant k) is x. It is slowly stretched by applying
U(x, y) = sin (x + y). The force acting on the particle
an external force. What is the work done in slowly
stretching it from length 3x to 4x?  
of mass m at  0,  is
(A) 1.5 kx2 (B) 2.5 kx2  4
2
(C) 3.5 kx (D) 4.5 kx2
(A) 1 (B) 2
Section C - Energy (Kinetic Energy,
Potential energy) 1
(C) (D) 0
2
57. If a man increases his speed by 2 m/sec, his K.E. is
doubled. The original speed of the man is-
(A) (2 + 2 ) m/s (B) (2 + 2 2 ) m/s 63. A particle is released from rest at origin.
It moves under influence of potential field
(C) 4 m/s (D) (1 + 2 ) m/s
U = x2 – 3x, kinetic energy at x = 2 is
(A) 2 J (B) 1 J
58. When a conservative force does positive work on a
body (C) 1.5 J (D) 0 J
(A) the potential energy increases
(B) the potential energy decreases 64. Two water slides at a pool are shaped differently
(C) total energy increases but start at the same height. Two riders Sita and
(D) total energy decreases Gita start from rest at the same time on different
slides. Neglecting friction, and assume same path
59. The P.E. of a certain spring when stretched from length for both. Mark the correct statement.
natural length through a distance 0.3 m is 10 J. The
amount of work in joule that must be done on this
Gita
spring to stretch it through an additional distance
0.15 m will be Sita
h
(A) 10 J (B) 20 J
(C) 7.5 J (D) 12.5 J
60. A man who is running has half the kinetic energy of (A) Gita reaches ground earlier than Sita
the boy of half his mass. The man speeds up by (B) Sita reaches ground earlier than Gita.
1 m/s and then has the same kinetic energy as the
(C) Sita and Gita arrive on horizontal ground level
boy. The original speed of the man was
simultaneously.
(A) 2 m / s (B) ( 2 – 1)m / s
(D) Information is insufficient
(C) 2 m/s (D) ( 2  1)m / s
Page 35
Section D - Work Energy theorem, (A) The tension in the string is Mg

Conservation of Mechenical (B) The tension in the string is F
energy
(C) The work done by the tension on the block is 20
65. A section of fixed smooth circular track of radius R J in the above 1s
in vertical plane is shown in the figure. A block is (D) The work done by the force of gravity is –20 J
released from position A and leaves the track at B. in the above 1s
The radius of curvature of its trajectory just after it
leaves the track at B is ? O'
69. A 1.0 kg block collides with a horizontal weightless
(A) R R spring of force constant 2.75 Nm–1 as shown in figure.
53º 37º
R The block compresses the spring 4.0 m from the rest

(B) position. If the coefficient of kinetic friction between
4 A
B
the block and horizontal surface is 0.25, the speed of
O
R the block at the instant of collision is
(C) (D) None of these
2
66. A rigid body of mass m is moving in a circle of

radius r with a constant speed v. The force on the
mv 2
body is and is directed towards the centre.
r
What is the work done by this force in moving the (A) 0.4 ms–1 (B) 4 ms–1
body over half the cirumference of the circle.
(C) 0.8 ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
mv 2
(A) (B) zero
r 2 70. In the figure the block A is released from rest when
the spring is at its natural length. For the block B of
mv 2 r 2 mass M to leave contact with the ground at some
(C) (D)
r2 mv 2 stage, the minimum mass of A must be-
(A) 2 M
67. A uniform flexible chain of mass m and length 2 (B) M
hangs in equilibrium over a smooth horizontal pin of
M
negligible diameter. One end of the chain is given a (C)
2
small vertical displacement so that the chain slips over
the pin. The speed of chain when it leaves pin is- (D) a function of M and
the force constant of
(A) 2g (B) g
the spring
(C) 4g (D) 3g
71. In the given figure, the inclined surface is smooth.
The body releases from the top. Then-
68. A block of mass M is hanging over a smooth and
light pulley through a light string. The other end of
the string is pulled by a constant force F. The kinetic
energy of the block increases by 20 J in 1s.
Page 36
(A) the body has maximum velocity just before 75. A body of mass M is dropped from a height h on a
striking the spring sand floor. If the body penetrates x cm into the sand,
(B) The body performs periodic motion the average resistance offered by the sand to the
(C) the body has maximum velocity at the body is :
mg sin 
compression where k is spring constant h  h
k (A) Mg   (B) Mg  1  
x  x
(D) both (B) and (C) are correct
 h
72. A locomotive of mass m starts moving so that its (C) Mgh + Mgx (D) Mg  1  
 x
velocity varies according to the law v = k s where
k is constant and s is the distance covered. Find the
76. A raindrop of mass 1 g falling from a height of 1 km
total work performed by all the forces which are
hits the ground with a speed of 50 ms-1. If the resistive
acting on the locomotive during the first t seconds
force is proportional to the speed of the drop, then
after the beginning of motion.
the work done by the resistive force is (Take g : 10
1 42 1 2 42 ms-2)
(A) W = mk t . (B) W = mkt
8 4 (A) 10 J (B) –10 J
1 44 1 44 (C) 8.75 J (D) –8.75 J
(C) W = mk t (D) W = mk t
4 8
Section E - Vertical circular Motion
73. Block A in the figure is released from the rest when
the extension in the spring is x0 . The maximum 77. Water in a bucket is whirled in a vertical circle with
downward a string attached to it. The water does not fall down
displacement of the even when the bucket is inverted at the top of its
block will be : path. We conclude that :
(A) Mg/2k – x0
mv 2 mv 2
(B) Mg/2k + x0 (A) mg = (B) mg >
R R
(C) 2 Mg/k – x0
(D) 2 Mg/k + x0 mv 2
(C) mg < (D) None of these
R
74. The system is released from rest with both the springs
in unstretched positions. Mass of each block is 1 kg
and force constant of each spring is 10 N/m. 78. A body is allowed to slide on a frictionless track from
Extension of horizontal spring in equilibrium is: rest position under gravity. The track ends into a
circular loop of diameter D. What should be the
minimum height of the body in terms of D so that it
may complete successfully the loop?
4 5
(A) D (B) D
5 4
(C) 1 D (D) 2 D
(A) 0.2 m (B) 0.4 m

(C) 0.6 m (D) 0.8 m
Page 37
79. A smooth wire is bent into a vertical circle of radius

(A) 6g /5 (B) g /5
a. A bead P can slide smoothly on the wire. The
circle is rotated about vertical diameter AB as axis
(C) 12 g / 5 (D) 2g /5
with aspeed as shown in figure. The bead P is at
rest w.r.t. the circular ring in the position shown.
Then 2 is equal to : 82. A particle suspended from a fixed point, by a light
inextensible thread of length L is projected
2g
(A) horizontally from its lowest position with velocity
a
7gL
2g . The thread will slack after swinging through
2
(B)
a 3
an angle , such that  equal
(A) 30º (B) 135º
g 3
(C) (C) 120º (D) 150º
a
2a 83. A stone of mass m tied to the end of a string revolves

(D)
g 3 in a vertical circle of radius R. The net forces at the
lowest and highest points of the circle directed
vertically downwards are:
80. A particle is rotated in a vertical circle by connecting
[Choose the correct alternative]
it to a light rod of length l and keeping the other end
of the rod fixed. The minimum speed of particle when Lowest point Highest point
the light rod is horizontal for which the particle will (A) mg – T1mg + T2
complete the circle is (B) mg + T1 mg – T2
(A) gl (B) 2gl (C) mg+T1–(mv12)/R mg – T2+(mv12)/R

(D) mg–T1 – (mv12)/R mg + T2+(mv12)/R
(C) 3gl (D) none T1 and v1 denote the tension and speed at the lowest
point. T2 and v2 denote the corresponding values at
the highest point.
81. A light rod of length  is pivoted at the upper end.
Two masses (each m), are attached to the rod, one
at the middle and the other at the free end. What 84. A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by a
horizontal velocity must be imparted to the lower light inextensible string of length  is projected
end mass, so that the rod may just take up the horizontally with speed (gl) . Then the speed of
horizontal position?
the particle and the inclination of the string to the
vertical at the instant of the motion when the tension
in the string equal the weight of the particle-
3l lg
(A) , cos–1 (3/2) (B) , cos–1 (2/3)
g 3
3g gl
(C) , cos–1 (2/3) (D) , sin–1 (2/3)
l 3
Page 38
85. A stone of mass 1 kg tied to a light inextensible 88. A car of mass 'm' is driven with acceleration 'a' along
string of length 10/3 metre is whirling in a vertical a straight level road against a constant external
circle. If the ratio of maximum tension to minimum resistive force 'R'. When the velocity of the car is
tension in the string is 4, then speed of stone st highest 'V', the rate at which the engine of the car is doing
point of the circle is- [g = 10 m/s2] work will be :
(A) 20 m/s (B) 10 3 m/s (A) RV (B) maV
(C) (R + ma) V (D) (ma – R)V
(C) 5 2 m/s (D) 10 m/s
89. A partcile of mass m is moving in a circular path of

86. A particle rests on the top of a hemisphere of radiu constant radius r such that its centripetal acceleration
R. Find the smallest horizontal velocity that must be ac is varying with time t as ac= k2 r t2, where k is a
imparted to the particle if it is to leave the hemisphere constant, the power delivered to the particle by the
without sliding down it- forces acting on it is-
(A) 2 m k2 r2 t (B) m k2 r2 t
(A) gR (B) 2gR
4 2 5
(C) (m k r t )/3 (D) 0
(C) 3gR (D) 5gR
90. The force required to row a boat over the sea is
proportional to the speed of the boat. It is found
Section F - Power
that it takes 24 h.p. to row a certain boat at a speed
87. A pump ejects 12000 kg of water at speed of 4 m/s of 8km/hr, the horse power required when speed is
in 40 second. Find the average rate at which the doubled -
pump is working (A) 12 h.p. (B) 6 h.p.
(A) 0.24 KW (B) 2.4 W (C) 48 h.p. (D) 96h.p.
(C) 2.4 KW (D) 24 W
Page 39

1. C 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. C 7. B
8. B 9. A 10. A 11. D 12. D 13. B 14. B
15. C 16. D 17. C 18. B 19. D 20. A 21. B
22. A 23. B 24. C 25. D 26. C 27. B 28. A
29. C 30. C 31. C 32. C 33. C 34. C 35. C
36. C 37. D 38. A 39. A 40. B 41. C 42. C
43. C 44. C 45. B 46. A 47. B 48. C 49. C
50. B 51. C 52. D 53. A 54. B 55. D 56. B
57. B 58. B 59. D 60. D 61. A 62. A 63. A
64. B 65. C 66. B 67. B 68. B 69. D 70. C
71. D 72. A 73. A 74. B 75. B 76. D 77. C
78. B 79. B 80. B 81. C 82. C 83. A 84. B
85. D 86. A 87. C 88. C 89. B 90. D

1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. A 7. D
8. A 9. C 10. A 11. A 12. A 13. C 14. B
15. A 16. D 17. A 18. D 19. D 20. B 21. C
22. D 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. A 27. A 28. A
29. C 30. B 31. C 32. B 33. D 34. C 35. B
36. D 37. A 38. A 39. B 40. D 41. A 42. C
43. C 44. D 45. D 46. C 47. D 48. A 49. C
50. C 51. B 52. A 53. A 54. A 55. D 56. B
57. C 58. A 59. C 60. B 61. C 62. A

1. A,C 2. A,C,D 3. B,D 4. A,B 5. B,D
6. A,C,D 7. A,B,C 8. B,C,D 9. B,D 10. B,D
11. A,C,D 12. A,B,C 13. A,B,C,D 14. A,B 15. A,B,C
16. C,D 17. A,B 18. A,B 19. A,B,C 20. A,B,D
21. A,B,C,D 22. A,C,D 23. A,B,C 24. B,C,D 25. A,B,D
26. A,B,C 27. B,C 28. A,B,C,D
1. 9 2. (a) 4.0 cm/s2 (b) 2.0 cm/s2 (c) 20 cm/s

2
3. (a) t = 2s, (b) 3.14 m/s 4.  0

(1 - e-k t)
k
5R 11π 17v 289v 2 v2

5. (i) sec, (ii) (iii) (iv) 6. 2 2 7. 2
6v 6 5R 25R 2
R
30 35
8. 2 sec 9. 2 g rad/s 10. (a) per min., (b) 150 N 11. cos 
 2
2 2g
12. 10–2 m 13. (i) 5 m/s2 (ii) km 14. 5 15. 2
=
3 3 a 3
Page 40
Centre of Mass 1.33

Section A - Calculation of COM of system of 4. In the adjacent diagram, objects 1 and 2 each have
N-particles, COM of continuous mass m while objects 3 and 4 each have mass 2m.
distributed system, Combination
Note four lines A, B, C and D. The center of mass
of structure and Cavity problems
of the system is most likely to be at the intersection
1. The centre of mass of two particles lies of lines :
(A) on the line perpendicular to the line joining
the particles
(B) on a point outside the line joining the particles
(C) on the line joining the particles.
2. A uniform square plate ABCD has a mass of

10kg. If two point masses of 3 kg each are
(A) A and B (B) B and C
placed at the corners C and D as shown in the
(C) A and D (D) A and C
adjoining figure, then the centre of mass shifts to
the point which is lie on -
5. For particles of mass 5,3,2,4 kg are at the points
(1,6), (-1,5), (2,-3), (-1,-4). Find the coordinates of
their centre of mass.
 2 23   1 23 
(A)  7 , 4  (B)  7 , 4 
   
 2 11   1 23 
(C)  7 , 4  (D)  7 , 3 
   
(A) OC (B) OD
(C) OY (D) OX
6. As shown in diagram there are five identical rods.
Length of each rod is  and mass m. Find out distance
3. There is a thin uniform disc of radius R and mass
of C.O.M. of system From (C)
per unit area , in which a hole of radius R/2 has
been cut out as shown in the figure. Inside the hole A
a square plate of same mass per unit area  is B
inserted so that its corners touch the periphery of
C
the hole. Find centre of mass of the system.
109 190
(A)  (B) 
50 50
190 109
(C)  (D) 
R/2 100 100
O A
7. The position vectors of three particles of
mass m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 2 kg and m3 = 3 kg
are


r1  î  4j
ˆ k  2 
ˆ , r  î  ˆj  k
ˆ  and
(A)
R[2  ]
2[3  2]
(B)
R[2 – ]
2[3  2]

 
ˆ respectively. Find the position
r3  2iˆ  ˆj  2k
vector of their centre of mass.
R[ 2 – ] R[2 – ] ˆ
ˆ (B) 2.5î  ˆj  k
(A) 1.5 î  0.5jˆ  0.5k
(C) 2[3  2] (D) [3  2]
(C) 2.0 î  ˆj  kˆ ˆ
(D) 3.5î  ˆj  k
Page 41
8. In the figure a uniform disc of radius R, from which

 2r 
a hole of radius R/2 has been cut out from left of (A) At distance   towards left of O
the centre and is placed on right of the centre of  3  4 
disc. Find the centre of mass of the resulting disc.
 2r 
y
(B) At distance   towards right of O
 3  4 
o
(-R/2,0) (R/2,0)
x  4r 
(C) At distance   towards left of O
 3  4 
R
 4r 
R R R (D) At distance   towards right of O
(A) ,0 (B) ,0 (C) ,0 (D) R, 0  3  4 
3 2 4
12. Look at the drawing given in the figure which has
9. Find the centre of mass of a uniform L-shaped lamina been drawn with ink of uniform line-thickness. The
(a thin flat plate) origine with dimensions as shown mass of ink used to draw each of the two inner circles,
in figure. The mass of lamina is 3 kg. and each of the two line segments is m. The mass of
y
the ink unsed to draw the outer circle is 6m. The
1m
coordinates of the centres of the different parts are
outer circle (0, 0), left inner circle (–a, a), right inner
C2 circle (a, a), vertical line (0, 0) and horizontal line
A2
(0,–a). The y-coordinate of the centre of mass of the
2m
1m ink in this drawing is:
C1
A1 1m
m
m
(-a, a)
(a, a)
x
O (0,0) (0, 0) 7m
5 5 5 7 m
(A)  6 , 6  (B)  6 , 6 
    (0, -a)
5 5 5 5 a a a a
(C)  3 , 6  (D)  6 , 7  (A)
10
(B)
8
(C)
12
(D)
3
   
10. A graph between kinetic energy and Section B - Motion of COM, Conservation of
momentum of a particle is plotted as shown in the Momentum, Trolley problems
figure. The mass of the moving particle is :
13. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of
K
length L which lies at rest on a frictionless surface.
The man walks to other end of the plank. If the
M
4 mass of the plank is , then the distance that the
3
man moves relative to ground is :
4 P 3L L 4L L
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 5 3
(A) 1 kg (B) 2 kg
(C) 3 kg (D) 4 kg 14. Two balls A and B of masses 100gm and 250 gm
respectively are connected by a stretched spring of
11. A Wireframe is made of a B
negligible mass and placed on a smooth table. When
wire or uniform cross- C A
the balls are released simultaneously the initial
section. which is shown in acceleration of B is 10 cm/sec2 west ward. What
D
figure ABC. HGF and DIE is the magnitude and direction of initial acceleration
I O
are semicircular arcs of of the ball A-
E
redius r. CD=DO=OE=EF=r
(A) 25 cm/sec2 Eastward
and 'O' is the centre of H F (B) 25 cm/sec2 North ward
circle. Then centre of
(C) 25 cm/sec2 West ward
mass of frame is: G
(D) 25 cm/sec2 South ward
Page 42
Centre of Mass 1.35
15. A particle of mass 3m is projected from the ground

at some angle with horizontal. The horizontal range ln p ln p
is R. At the highest point of its path it breaks into
two pieces m and 2m. The smaller mass comes to (A) (B)
rest and larger mass finally falls at a distance x ln K ln K
from the point of projection where x is equal to
3R 3R 5R
(A) (B) (C) (D) 3R ln p
4 2 4
(C) (D) None
16. A man weighing 80 kg is standing at the centre of a ln K
flat boat and he is 20 m from the shore. He walks
21. Two balls are thrown in air. The acceleration of the
8 m on the boat towards the shore and then halts.
The boat weight 200 kg. How far is he from the centre of mass of the two balls while in air (neglect
shore at the end of this time? air resistance)
(A) 11.2 m (B) 13.8 m (A) depends on the direction of the motion of the
(C) 14.3 m (D) 15.4 m balls
(B) depends on the masses of the two balls
17. Two particles having mass ratio n : 1 are
interconnected by a light inextensible string that (C) depends on the speeds of the two balls
passes over a smooth pulley. If the system is (D) is equal to g
released, then the acceleration of the centre of mass
22. Conservation of linear momentum is equivalent
of the system is :
to-
2
 n  1 (A) Newton's second law of motion
(A) (n –1)2 g (B)   g
n – 1 (B) Newton's first law of motion
2 (C) Newton's third law of motion
 n – 1  n  1
(C)   g (D)  n – 1 g (D) Conservation of angular momentum.
n  1
18. Internal forces can change 23. A body of mass m collides against a wall with
(A) the linear momentum but not the kinetic energy the velocity  and rebounds with the same speed.
of the system. Its change of momentum is-
(B) the kinetic energy but not the linear momentum (A) 2 m (B) m
of the system.
(C) – m (D) 0
(C) linear momentum as well as kinetic energy of
the system.
(D) neither the linear momentum nor the kinetic 24. A bomb initially at rest explodes by it self into three
energy of the system. equal mass fragments. The velocities of two fragments

19. A small sphere is moving at a constant speed in a are ( 3 i + 2 j ) m/s and (– i – 4 j ) m/s. The
vertical circle. Below is a list of quantities that could velocity of the third fragment is (in m/s)-
be used to describe some aspect of the motion of
the sphere (A) 2 i + 2 j (B) 2 i – 2 j
I - kinetic energy
(C) – 2 i + 2 j (D) –2 i – 2 j
II - gravitational potential energy
III - momentum 25. A stone of mass m1 moving with a uniform speed
Which of these quantities will change as this sphere v suddenly explodes on its own into two
moves around the circle ? fragments. If the fragment of mass m2 is at rest,
(A) I and II only (B) I and III only the speed of the other fragment is-
(C) III only (D) II and III only
m1v m2 v
20. Which of the following graphs represents the (A) (m  m ) (B) (m  m )
1 2 1 2
graphical relation between momentum (p) and
kinetic energy (K) for a body in motion ? m1v m1v
(C) (m  m ) (D) m
1 2 2
Page 43
(A) Yes, the momentum is completely conserved

26. A nucleus of mass number A originally at rest
(B) Only the momentum component in the vertical
emits -particle with speed v. The recoil speed
direction is conserved
of daughter nucleus is :
(C) Only the momentum component parallel to the
4v 4v
(A) (B) track is conserved
A4 A4
v v (D) No components are conserved
(C) (D)
A4 A4
30. Surface is perfectly smooth
27. There are some passengers inside a stationary
railway compartment. The track is frictionless. The m
m
centre of mass of the compartment itself (without
the passengers) is C1, while the centre of mass of M
M
the compartment plus passengers system is C2. If
the passengers move about inside the compartment Choose the correct Statement
along the track.
(A) Linear Momentum of system is conserved in case
(A) both C1 and C2 will move with respect to the
A only
ground
(B) neither C1 nor C2 will move with respect to the (B) Linear Momentum will be conserved in case B
ground only.
(C) C1 will move but C2 will be stationary with (C) Linear Momentum will be conserved in both
respect to the ground cases.
(D) C2 will move but C1 will be stationary with (D) Linear Momentum can not be conserved.
respect to the ground
28. A system of N particles is free from any external 31. A uniform triangular plate ABC of moment of inertia
forces I (about an axis passing through A and perpendicu-
(a) Which of the following is true for the magnitude of lar to plane of the plate) can rotate freely in the
the total momentum of the system ? vertical plane about point ‘A’ as shown in figure.
(A) It must be zero The plate is released from the position shown in the
(B) It could be non-zero, but it must be constant
figure. Line AB is horizontal. The acceleration of
(C) It could be non-zero, and it might not be constant
centre of mass just after the release of plate is :
(D) It could be zero, even if the magnitude of the
total momentum is not zero. a
A B
(b) Which of the following must be true for the sum of
the magnitudes of the momenta of the individual
particles in the system ?
(A) It must be zero a
(B) It could be non-zero, but it must be constant a
(C) It could be non-zero, and it might not be constant
(D) The answer depends on the nature of the
internal forces in the system C
mga 2 mga 2
29. An isolated rail car of mass M is moving along a (A) (B)
3I 4I
straight, frictionless track at an initial speed v0. The
car is passing under a bridge when a crate filled
mga 2 mga 2
with N bowling balls, each of mass m, is dropped (C) (D)
2 3I 3I
from the bridge into the bed of the rail car. The
crate splits open and the bowling balls bounce
around inside the rail car, but none of them fall out.
Is the momentum of the rail car + bowling balls
system conserved in this collision ?
Page 44
Centre of Mass 1.37
32. A bomb of mass 3m is kept inside a closed box of 35. Two blocks of mass 3 kg and 6 kg respectively are
mass 3m and length 4L at it's centre. It explodes in placed on a smooth horizontal surface. They are
two parts of mass m & 2m. The two parts move in connected by a light spring of force constant k =
opposite direction and stick to the apposite side of 200 N/m. Initially the spring is unstretched. The
the walls of box. Box is kept on a smooth horizontal indicated velocities are imparted to the blocks. The
surface. maximum extension of the spring will be –
1.0 m/s 2.0 m/s
3 kg 6 kg
4L
(A) 30 cm (B) 25 cm
What is the distance moved by the box during this
time interval. (C) 20 cm (D) 15 cm
L
(A) 0 (B) 36. Two ring of mass m and 2 m are connected
6 with a mass less spring and can slips over two
L L frictionless parallel horizontal rails as shown in
(C) (D)
12 3 figure. Ring of mass m is given velocity ‘v0’ in the
direction shown. Maximum stretch in spring will be -
Section C - Spring block system m v0
33. Two blocks 1 and 2 of masses m and 2m respectively
k
are connected by a spring of force constant k. The
masses are moving to the right with uniform velocity
v each, the heavier mass, leading the lighter one. The 2m
spring is of natural length in the motion. Block 2 collides m 3m
(A) v0 (B) v0
head on with a third block 3 of mass m, at rest, the k k
collision being completely inelastic. Determine the
2m 2m
velocity of blocks at the instant of maximum (C) v0 (D) v0
3k k
compression of the spring.
1 2 3 37. A block is hanged from spring in a cage. Elongation
k
m 2m v m in spring is ‘x1’ and ‘x2’ when cage moves up and
Smooth down respectively with same acceleration. The
5v 5v expansion in spring when the cage move horizontally
(A) m / sec (B) m / sec with same acceleration -
4 2
5v 3v x1  x 2 x12  x 22
(C) m / sec (D) m / sec (A) (B)
3 4 2 2
34. Two blocks A and B of mass m and 2m are con-
x12  x 22
nected by a massless spring of force constant k. (C) (D) x1 x 2
2
They are placed on a smooth horizontal plane. Spring
is stretched by an amount x and then released. The
relative velocity of the blocks when the spring 38. All surfaces shown in figure are smooth. System is
comes to its natural length is – released with the spring unstretched. In equilibrium,
compression in the spring wiil be –
A B
m k
M
 3k   2k 
   
(A)  2m  x (B)  3m  x
    45º
2 kx 3km
(C) (D) mg 2mg (M  m )g mg
m 2x (A) (B) (C) (D)
2k k 2k k
Page 45
39. A 2 kg block is connected with two springs of force 43. A block of mass ‘m’ is attached to a spring in natu-
constants k1 = 100 N/m and k2 = 300 N/m as shown ral length of spring constant ‘k’. The other end ‘A’
in figure. The block is released from rest with the of the spring is moved with a constant velocity ‘v’
springs unstretched. The acceleration of the block away from the block. Find the maximum extension
in its lowest position is : (g = 10 m/s2) – in the spring -
v
k1 m A
2kg
k2
1 mv 2 mv 2
(A) (B)
4 k k
(A) zero (B) 10 m/s2 upwards
(C) 10 m/s downwards (D) 5 m/s2 upwards
2
1 mv 2 mv 2
(C) (D) 2
2 k k
40. Two masses m and 2m are attached to two ends of
an ideal spring and the spring is in the compressed
state. The energy of spring is 60 joule. If the spring Section D - Impulse
is released, then-
m 2m 44. A super-ball is to bounce elastically back and forth
(A) the energy of both bodies will be same between two rigid walls at a distance d from each
(B) energy of smaller body will be 10J other. Neglecting gravity and assuming the velocity
(C) energy of smaller body will be 20J
(D) energy of smaller body will be 40 J of super-ball to be v0 horizontally, the average force
being exerted by the super-ball on each wall is :
41. Two blocks A(3kg) and B(6kg) are connected by a
spring of stiffness 512 N/m and placed on a smooth 1 mv 20 mv 20
(A) (B)
horizontal surface. Initially the spring has its 2 d d
equilibrium length. Velocities 1.8m/s and 2.2 m/s
are imparted to A and B in opposite direction. The 2mv 20 4mv 20
maximum extension in the spring will be – (C) (D)
d d
B
A
1.8 m/s K 2.2 m/s 45. A force exerts an impulse I on a particle changing
3kg 6 kg
its speed from u to 2u. The applied force and the
initial velocity are oppositely directed along the same
(A) 25 cm (B) 10 cm
line. The work done by the force is
(C) 12 cm (D) 2.5 cm
3 1
(A) Iu (B) Iu
42. The spring block system lies on a smooth horizontal 2 2
surface. The free end of the spring is being pulled (C) Iu (D) 2 Iu
towards right with constant speed
V0 = 2m/s. At t = 0 sec, the spring of constant 46. A boy hits a baseball with a bat and imparts an
k = 100 N/cm is unstreched and the block has a impulse J to the ball. The boy hits the ball again
speed 1 m/s to left. The maximum extension of the with the same force, except that the ball and the
spring is – bat are in contact for twice the amount of time as
in the first hit. The new impulse equals.
1 m/s
k = 100 N/cm (A) half the original impulse
m (B) the original impulse
4kg V0= 2m/s
(C) twice the original impulse
(A) 2cm (B) 4 cm (D) four times the original impulse
(C) 6 cm (D) 8 cm
Page 46
Centre of Mass 1.39
47. A system of two blocks A and B are connected by 51. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected
an inextensible massless strings as shown. The by a spring of negligible mass and placed on a
pulley is masselss and frictionless. Initially the frictionless horizontal surface. An impulse gives a
system is at rest when, a bullet of mass 'm' moving velocity of 14 m/s to the heavier block in the direction
with a velocity 'u' as shown hits the block 'B' and of the lighter block. The velocity of the centre of
gets embedded into it. The impulse imparted by mass is -
tension force to the block of mass 3m is : (A) 30 m/s (B) 20 m/s
5mu (C) 10 m/s (D) 5 m/s
(A)
4
4mu Section E - Collision in 1D, Oblique collision
(B) m
5
2mu u 52. A ball strikes a smooth horizontal ground at an angle
(C) of 45° with the vertical. What cannot be the possible
5 m B
3mu angle of its velocity with the vertical after the
(D) A 3m collision. (Assume e  1).
5
(A) 45° (B) 30°
48. The position-time graph of a particle of mass 0.1 (C) 53° (D) 60°
kg is shown. The impulse at t = 2s is :
53. In an inelastic collision-
X(m) (A) momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not
(B) momentum is not conserved but kinetic energy is
4 conserved
(C) neighter momentum nor kinetic energy is
t(s) conserved
2 4 6 (D) both the momentum and kinetic energy are
(A) 0.2 kg m s 1 (B) 0.2 kg m s 1 conserved
(C) 0.1 kg m s 1 (D) 0.4 kg m s 1 54. Two perfectly elastic balls of same mass m are
moving with velocities u1 and u2. They collide
49. The magnitude of force (in Newtons) acting on a elastically n times. The kinetic energy of the
body varies with time (in micro second) as shown system finally is:
in the figure. The magnitude of total impulse of the 1m 2 1m 2
(A) u1 (B) (u1  u22 )
force on the body from t = 4µs to t = 16µs is – 2 u 2 u
1 1
(C) m(u12  u 22 ) (D) mn(u12  u 22 )
800 2 2
600
Force (N)
55. When two bodies collide elastically, then

400 (A) kinetic energy of the system alone is
200 conserved
(B) only momentum is conserved
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 (C) both energy and momentum are conserved
Time (s) (D) neighter energy nor momentum is conserved
(A) 5 × 10–2 Ns (B) 5 × 10–3 Ns
56. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an
(C) 5 × 10–4 Ns (D) 5 × 10–6 Ns
inelastic collision . In this case-
(A) the momentum of the ball just after the
50. An impulse I changes the velocity of a particle collision is the same as that just before the
collision
 
from V1 to V2 . Kinetic energy gained by the (B) the mechanical energy of the ball remains
the same in the collision
particle is–
(C) the total momentum of the ball and the earth
   
(A) (1/2) I ( V1 + V2 ) (B) (1/2) 
I ( V1 – V2 )
is conserved.
(D) the total energy of the ball and the earth is
   
(C) I ( V2 – V1 ) (D) I ( V2 + V1 ) conserved
Page 47
57. Six steel balls of identical size are lined up long 61. A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity
a straight frictionless groove. Two similar balls hits another stationary sphere of the same mass, if
moving with a speed V along the groove collide e is the coefficient of restitution, then ratio of speed
with this row on the extreme left hand then- of the first sphere to the speed of the second sphere
after collision will be
 1 – e  1 e 
(A)  1  e  (B)  1 – e 
(A) all the balls will start moving to the right  e  1  e – 1

with speed 1/8 each (C)  e – 1 (D)  e  1
(B) all the six balls initially at rest will move on
with speed V/6 each and two identical balls will
62. Three blocks are initially placed as shown in the
come to rest figure. Block A has mass m and initial velocity v to
(C) two balls from the extreme right end will the right. Block B with mass m and block C with
move on with speed V each and the remaining mass 4 m are both initially at rest. Neglect friction.
balls will remain at rest All collisions are elastic. The final velocity of block
(D) one ball from the right end will move on A is
with speed 2V, the remaining balls will be at V
rest. A B C
m m 4m
58. The bob of a simple pendulum of length l dropped
from a horizontal position strikes a block of the (A) 0.60 v to the left (B) 1.4 v to the left
same mass, placed on a horizontal table (C) v to the left (D) 0.4 v to the left
(frictionless) as shown in the diagram, the block
shall have kinetic energy- 63. Two billiard balls undergo a head-on collision. Ball
1 is twice as heavy as ball 2. Initially, ball 1 moves
with a speed v towards ball 2 which is at rest.
Immediately after the collision, ball 1 travels at a
speed of v/3 in the same direction. What type of
collision has occured ?
(A) inelastic
(B) elastic
(C) completely inelastic
(A) Zero (B) mgl. (D) Cannot be determined from the information
(C) 1/2 mgl. (D) 2mgl.
given
59. Two balls A and B having masses 1 kg and 2 kg,
64. A ball is dropped from a height h. As is bounces off
moving with speeds 21 m/s and 4 m/s respectively
the floor, its speed is 80 percent of what it was just
in opposite direction, collide head on. After collision
before it hit the floor. The ball will then rise to a
A moves with a speed of 1 m/s in the same direction,
height of most nearly
then the coefficient of restitution is
(A) 0.80 h (B) 0.75 h
(A) 0.1 (B) 0.2
(C) 0.64 h (D) 0.50 h
(C) 0.4 (D) None
60. A truck moving on horizontal road east with velocity 65. A ball is thrown vertically downwards with velocity
20ms–1 collides elastically with a light ball moving 2gh from a height h. After colliding with the
with velocity 25 ms–1 along west. The velocity of ground it just reaches the starting point. Coefficient
the ball just after collision of restitution is
(A) 65 ms–1 towards east
(B) 25 ms–1 towards west (A) 1 / 2 (B) 1/2
(C) 65 ms–1 towards west (C) 1 (D) 2
(D) 20 ms–1 towards east
Page 48
Centre of Mass 1.41
Section F - Variable Mass system, Rocket 69. A trolley filled with sand moves on a smooth
propulsion horizontal surface with an initial velocity v. A small
hole is there at the base of trolley, from which sand
66. A chain of mass M and length  is held vertically is leaking out at constant rate. As the sand leaks
out
such that its bottom end just touches the surface of
a horizontal table. The chain is released from rest. V
Assume that the portion of chain on the table does

not form a heap. The momentum of the portion of Smooth surface
the chain above the table after the top end of the (A) The velocity of the trolley increases.
(B) The velocity of the trolley remains unchanged.

chain falls down by a distance . (C) The momentum of the trolley is conserved
8
(D) The momentum of the total system (trolley +
3 3 leaked sand ) conserved.
(A) M g (B) M g
14 16
7 9 70. Find velocity of wagon as function of time when it
(C)
16
M g (D)
14
M g is being filled with stationary hopper at the rate 
kg/sec. and constant force F is applied horizontally
on the wagon as shown in figure.
67. Container is massless. Mass of liquid filled in the M0 is the mass of the wagon and initial speed of
container is M. There is a hole in the container as the wagon u = 0 at time t = 0.
shown. There is no friction between container and
ground. Then –
F
M0
M. t=0, u=0
Ft 2Ft
M (A) M  t (B) M  t
0 0
(A) Initial acceleration of system is less than g/2 Ft 2 Ft

(C) M  t (D) M  t
0
(B) Initial acceleration of system is greater than g/2 0
(C) System moves with constant velocity

71. A wagon fully loaded with sand moue on parallel
(D) System remains at rest
rails with constant speed v, Now, bottom door of
wagon s partially opened and sand starts falling at
68. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 in projectile the rate m kg per second. Find ext. force req. (if
  any) to keep pull of wagon constant as function of
motion have velocities v 1 and v 2 respectively at
time?
time t = 0. They collide at time to. Their velocities
  Ft
become v 1 ' and v 2 ' at time 2t o while still (A) 0 (B) M  t
0
moving in air. The value of
2Ft
m1v1'm2v2 '  m1v1  m2v2  is (C) M  t
0
(D) None of these
(A) zero (B) (m1 + m2)gto
1
(C) 2(m1 + m2)gto (D) m1  m2 gto
2
Page 49
Centre of Mass 1.61

1. C 2. C 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. D 7. A
8. C 9. A 10. B 11. A 12. A 13. B 14. A
15. C 16. C 17. C 18. B 19. D 20. D 21. D
22. A 23. A 24. C 25. A 26. A 27. C 28. (a)B (b)C
29. C 30. A 31. C 32. D 33. D 34. A 35. A
36. C 37. C 38. D 39. B 40. D 41. A 42. C
43. B 44. B 45. B 46. C 47. D 48. B 49. B
50. A 51. C 52. B 53. A 54. C 55. C 56. C
57. C 58. B 59. D 60. A 61. A 62. A 63. B
64. C 65. A 66. C 67. A 68. C 69. D 70. D
71. A

1. C 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. D 6. B 7. D
8. D 9. A 10. A 11. D 12. A 13. D 14. A
15. B 16. A 17. C 18. A 19. B 20. D 21. A
22. D 23. C 24. D 25. B 26. D 27. D 28. B
29. C 30. C 31. D 32. B 33. D 34. D 35. A
36. B 37. C 38. A 39. A 40. B 41. D 42. C

1. C,D 2. B,D 3. A,B 4. B,C 5. C,D
6. A, B 7. B 8. B,D 9. C 10. C
11. B,C 12. B 13. A,B,C,D 14. A,C 15. B,C
16. B,C 17. B,D 18. A,B,D 19. A,B,C 20. A,B,C
21. AB 22. B,C 23. A,B,D 24. B,C,D 25. A,B,C
26. B,C 27. A,B,D 28. A,B,C,D
x 5 4  b3  a 3  3
1. (a) ( x)    , (b) L 2. y   3. a 4. 0016
L 9 3  b2 – a2  4
5. At R/5 from the centre of the bigger disc towards the centre of the smaller disc. 6. (5a/6, 5a/6)
13
7. 8. 100 m
4
9. (i) zero; (ii) right ; (iii) 20 cm ; (iv) 2.2 m ; (v) 1.8 m
2gR
10. g/9 downwards 11. v 12. 9 m/s, 9 m
m
1
M
m B v0  m B v 0  v 02 kx 20 Kx 20
13. v= m m ,h =   14. 40 cm 15. 2 16. (a) , (b)
A B  m A  m B  2g 2m 4
Page 50
Rotational 2.37

Section A - Moment of Inertia, Theorems of 6. A rigid body in shape of a triangle has
Moment of Inertia, Radius of vA = 5 m/s down, vB = 10 m/s down. Find velocity
gyration, Cavity problems of point C.
C
1. The moment of inertia of a body depends X

upon - a
(A) mass only

A B
(B) angular velocity only a Y
(C) distribution of particles only (A) 5iˆ  10jˆ (B) 5iˆ  10jˆ
(D) mass and distribution of mass about the axis (C) 5iˆ  10jˆ (D) 5iˆ  10j
ˆ
2. Two spheres of same mass and radius are in 7. A solid cylinder of radius R & length 3R is made of
contact with each other. If the moment of inertia a metarial having density . Now two hemispheres
each of radius R is removed from two ends of
of a sphere about its diameter is I, then the cylinder as shown in figure. Determine the moment
moment of inertia of both the spheres about the of inertia of this object about axis of cylinder?
tangent at their common point would be - 11R 5
(A) 3I (B) 7I (A) R
18
(C) 4I (D) 5I 26R5
(B)
3
3. Mass M is distributed over the rod of length L. If 29R 5 3R
linear mass density (  ) of the rod is linearly (C)
30
increasing with length as l = Kx, where x is
26R5
measured from one end as shown in figure & K is (D)
15
contant. The moment of inertia. of the rod about
the end perpendicular to rod where linear mass 8. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of the
density is zero. same mass have the same moments of inertia
about their respective diameters, the ratio of
ML2 ML2 their radii is
(A) (B) (A) (5)1/2 : (3)1/2 (B) (3)1/2 : (5)1/2
3 12
(C) 3 : 2 (D) 2 : 3
2 KL4
(C) ML2 (D) 9. A stone of mass 4kg is whirled in a horizontal
3 4
circle of radius 1m and makes 2 rev/sec. The
moment of inertia of the stone about the axis of
4. A disc of metal is melted to recast in the form rotation is
of a solid sphere. The moment of inertias about (A) 64 kg × m2 (B) 4 kg × m2
2
a vertical axis passing through the centre would - (C) 16 kg × m (D) 1 kg × m2
(A) decrease
10. A circle and a square (wire frame) each of mass m
(B) increase are arranged as shown in the diagram. The diameter
(C) remains same of the circle and the edge of the square are 2R
(D) nothing can be said each. Find moment of inertia of this configuration
about XX. 2R
5. The M.I. of a disc about its diameter is 2 units. 17mR 2
(A)
Its M.I. about axis through a point on its rim and 6
in the plane of the disc is 11mR 2
(B) X X
(A) 4 units. 6
19mR 2
(B) 6 units (C)
6
(C) 8 units
13mR 2
. (D) 10 units (D) 2R
6
Page 51
Section B - Torque (about point, about axis), 17. An automobile engine develops 100H.P. when
Torque and angular Acceleration rotating at a speed of 1800 rad/min. The torque
it delivers is
11. A body is rotating uniformly about a vertical axis (A) 3.33 W-s (B) 200W-s
fixed in an inertial frame. The resultant force on a (C) 248.7 W-s (D) 2487 W-s
particle of the body not on the axis is 18. The moment of inertia and rotational kinetic
(A) vertical energy of a fly wheel are 20kg-m2 and 1000
(B) horizontal and skew with the axis joule respectively. Its angular frequency per
(C) horizontal and intersecting the axis minute would be –
(D) none of these 600 25
(A) (B)
 2
12. One end of a uniform rod of mass m and length I is
clamped. The rod lies on a smooth horizontal surface 5 300
(C) (D)
and rotates on it about the clamped end at a uniform  
angular velocity . The force exerted by the clamp
on the rod has a horizontal component 19. The angular velocity of a body is
(A) m 2 l (B) zero  
1 =2 i +3 j +4 k and a torque = i +2 j +3 k acts
2
(C) mg (D) m 
2 on it. The rotational power will be
(A) 20 watt (B) 15 watt
13. A rod of length 'L' is hinged from one end. It is
brought to a horizontal position and released. The (C) 17 watt (D) 14 watt
angular velocity of the rod when it is in vertical
position is 20. A torque of 2 newton-m produces an angular
2g 3g acceleration of 2 rad/sec2 a body. If its radius of
(A) (B)
L L gyration is 2m, its mass will be:
g g (A) 2kg (B) 4 kg
(C) (D)
2L L (C) 1/2 kg (D) 1/4 kg
14. A disc of radius 2m and mass 200kg is acted Section C - Pulley Block system
upon by a torque 100N-m. Its angular
acceleration would be
21. A rod and a block are of same mass. Initially rod is
(A) 1 rad/sec2 (B) 0.25 rad/sec2 in horizontal position. What will be acceleration of
(C) 0.5 rad/sec2. (D) 2 rad/sec2. tip of the rod just after the system is released from
this position shown in figure.
15. On applying a constant torque on a body-
(A) linear velocity may be increases
(B) angular velocity may be increases
(C) it will rotate with constant angular velocity m
(D) it will move with constant velocity
16. A wheel starting with angular velocity of 10

radian/sec acquires angular velocity of 100 m
radian/sec in 15 seconds. If moment of inertia is 3g
10kg-m2, then applied torque (in newton-metre) (A) zero (B)
4
is
(A) 900 (B) 100 3g 3g
(C) (D)
(C) 90 (D) 60 8 2
Page 52
Rotational 2.39
22. In the figure, the blocks have masses M1 and M2 256 136
(M1 > M2) and acceleration a. The pulley P has a (A) T1 = N;T2  N
13 13
radius r and some mass the string not slip on the
125 136
pulley. (B) T1 = N; T2  N
13 13
256 272
P (C) T1 = N; T2  N
13 13
128 136
(D) T1 = N; T2  N
M2 13 13
M1
25. A pulley is hinged at the centre and a massless thread
is wrapped around it. The thread is pulled with a
(A) The two sections of the string have unequal constant force F starting from rest. As the time
tensions increases,
(B) The two blocks have acceleration of unequal
magnitude F
(C) The angular acceleration of P is 'ar'
(D) angular acceleration of the pulley is zero.
23. A 0.6 m radius drum carrying the load A is rigidly (A) its angular velocity increases, but force on hinge
attached to a 0.9m radius pulley carrying the load remains constant (B) its
B as shown. At the time t=0, the load B moves with angular velocity remains same, but force on hinge
a velocity of 2m/s (downward) and a constant increases
acceleration of 3m/s2 (downward). Over the time (C) its angular velocity increases and force on hinge
interval 0 < t < 2s, determine increases
(D) its angular velocity remains same and force on
hinge is constant.
26. In the situation shown, a heavy wheel with a small

A drum attached is suspended by its frictionless axle
from a ceiling. Attached to strings around the rims
B
of the wheel and drum are two blocks of equal
The number of revolution executed by the pulley mass. The system is originally at rest. When the
and the displacement of the load A. blocks are released.
100 20 50 20
(A) , m (B) , m
3 3 9 3
50 10 25 20
(C) , m (D) , m
9 3 9 3
24. For the situation shwn in figure, if the system is

released from rest. Determine tension T1 and T2.
(Take g = 10 m/s2) (A) Nothing happens, since the blocks have equal
mass.
T1 I = 5kg–m2 (B) The right hand block falls and the left hand one
5kg T1 rises, with acceleration of the same magnitude.
R = 0.5 m
T2 M = 40 kg (C) While the blocks are moving, the tension in the
T2 right hand string is less than that in the left hand
string.
37° (D) Which block falls depends on the moment of
1kg inertia of the wheel–drum system.
Page 53
27. A uniform disc of mass M = 2.50 kg and radius

2M
R = 0.20 m is mounted on an axle supoorted on (A) 1 
m
fixed frictionless bearings. A light cord wrapped R
M
around the rim is pulled with a force 5N. On the h
(B)
same system of pulley and string, instead of pulling R
it down, a body of weight 5 N is suspended. If the
h m
first process is termed A and the second B, the (C) 1
2R
tangential acceleration of point P will be h
M M MR
(D)
P P mh
R R
30. A magnetic tape isbeing played on a cassette deck.

The tension in the tape applies a torque to the supply
mg = 5N
reel. Assuming the tension remains constant during
5N
(Pull)
play, plot this angular acceleration ith reel radius r
[A] [B] as the reel becomes empty. Neglect the moment of
inertia of empty reel.
(A) equal in the processes A and B
 
(B) greater is process A than in B
(C) greater in process B than in A
(A) (B)
(D) independent of the two processes
r r
28. Uniform rod AB is hinged at end A in horizontal
 
position as shown in the figure. The other end is
connected to a block through a massless string m
(C) (D)
as shown. The pulley is smooth and massless.
Masses of block and rod is same and is equal to m. r r
Then find the reaction force at the hinge H. Just
after release. Section D - Angular Momentum (about point,
about axis), Conservation of
Angular Momentum
m,l 31. A particle moves with a constant velocity parallel

m to the X-axis. Its angular momentum with respect
to the origin.
6mg g (A) is zero
(A) (B)
13 4 (B) remains constant
3mg (C) goes on increasing
(C) (D) None (D) goes on decreasing.
8
29. A solid uniform cylinder of mass M and radius R is 32. A person sitting firmly over a rotating stool has his
pivoted at its centre free to rotate about horizontal arms streatched. If he folds his arms, his angular
axis. A massless inextensible string is wrapped momentum about the axis of rotation
around it, and attached to a block of mass m which (A) increases
is initially at a height h above the floor. The (B) decreases
acceleration due to gravity is g, directed downward. (C) remains unchanged
The block is released from rest. By what total angle
(D) doubles.
 (in radians)
Page 54
Rotational 2.41
33. A man, sitting firmly over a rotating stool has his 39. A particle starts from the point (0m, 8m) and moves
arms streched. If he folds his arms, the work done with uniform velocity of 3 i m/s. After 5 seconds,
by the man is the angular velocity of the particle about the origin
(A) zero will be :
(B) positive 8
(A) rad / s
289 y
(C) negative
(D) may be positive or negative. 3 3m/s
(B) rad / s
8
34. A particle of mass 2 kg located at the position 24 8m

(C) rad / s
289 x
( i  j) m has a velocity 2(  i – j  k ) m/s. Its O
8
angular momentum about z-axis in kg-m2 /s is : (D) rad / s
17
(A) zero (B) +8
(C) 12 (D) – 8 40. A uniform rod kept vertically on the ground falls
from rest. Its foot does not slip on the ground
35. The angular momentum of a flywheel having a (A) No part of the rod can have acceleration greater
moment of inertia of 0.4 kg m2 decreases from 30 than g in any positive
2
to 20 kg m /s in a period of 2 second. The average (B) For any one position of the rod, different points
torque acting on the flywheel during this period is : on it have different accelerations
(A) 10 N.m (B) 2.5 N.m (C) The maximum acceleration on any point on the
(C) 5 N.m (D) 1.5 N.m rod, at any position, is 1.5 g
(D) None of these
36. The rotational kinetic energy of a rigid body of
moment of inertia 5 kg-m2 is 10 joules. The
41. A thin uniform rigid rod of legth/is hinged at once
angular momentum about the axis of rotation
would be - and so that it can move in a vertical plane by rotating
(A) 100 joule-sec (B) 50 joule-sec about a horizontal axis through upper end. The lower
(C) 10 joule-sec (D) 2 joule -sec and is given a sharp blow and made to acquire a
linear velocity vo. Find the maximum height to which
37. The angular velocity of a body changes from one
revolution per 9second to 1 revolution per second the lower end can rise.
without applying any torque. The ratio of its radius
of gyration in the two cases is
(A) 1 : 9 (B) 3 : 1
(C) 9 : 1 (D) 1 : 3
38. A dog of mass m is walking on a pivoted disc of

radius R and mass M in a circle of radius R/2
v0
with an angular frequency n: the disc will revolve
in opposite direction with frequency - V02
mn
(A) 2l If V0 > 5gl , 3g if V0 < 6gl
(A)
M R/2
mn V02
(B) R (B) 2l If V0 > 6gl , 3g if V0 < 6gl
2M
2mn
(C) V02
M (C) 2l If V0 > 6gl , 3g if V0 < 5gl
2Mn
(D)
M V02
(D) l If V0 > 6gl , 3g if V0 < 6gl
Page 55
42. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length l is free to 46. A uniform rod of mass M has an impulse applied at
rotate about an horizontal axis as shown in figure.
right angles to one end. If the other end begins to
The minimum initial angular velocity imparted to rod
so that it becomes horizontal is move with speed V, the magnitude of the impulse
g is
(A)
l MV
3g
(A) MV (B)
2
(B)
l
2 MV
2g (C) 2MV (D)
(C) 3
l
3g Section E - Angular Impulse + Collision Of
(D)
2l point Mass with Rigid Bodies
43. A uniform rod of mass M & length L is hinged about

47. A particle P strikes the rod R perpendicularly as
its one end as shown. Initially it is held vartical and
then allowed to rotate, the angular velocity of rod shown. The rod is suspended vertically with upper
when it makes an angle of 37° with the vertical is
l
12g end hinged. ( x  , elastic collision) Then select
(A) 2
5L
correct statement :
3g
(B)
5L 37°
g
(C) x
5L
g
(D) P
L
R
44. Two identical rode are joined as shown. The system (A) Linear momentum of P,R system increases
is pivoted at point O and is released from rest from (B) Linear momentum of P,R system decreases
the horizontal positoin. The speed of point A when
(C) Linear momentum of P,R system remains
OB because vertical is
constant
l/2 (D) Data is insufficient
O B
l 48. A particle P strikes the rod R perpendicularly as

A shown. The rod is suspended vertically with upper
gl 5gl end hinged. (x = l, elastic collision) Then select
(A) 6 (B) 3
17 17 incorrect statement :
3gl 15gl
(C) 4 (D) 2
17 17
x
45. A ball of mass m moving with velocity v, collide
with the wall elastically as shown in the figure. After P
impact the change in angular momentum about P is R
:
P (A) Linear momentum of P,R system increases
d (B) KE of the P decreases
 (C) Angular momentum of the P,R system is
conserved about image.
(A) 2 mvd (B) 2 mvd cos (D) None of these
(C) 2 mvd sin (D) zero
Page 56
Rotational 2.43
49. A particle P strikes the rod R perpendicularly as 52. Mass of the pulley is m & radius is R. Assume
shown. The rod is suspended vertically with upper pulley to be disc. Block of mass m is released from
l the position shown. String is massless & inextensible.
end hinged. ( x  , P sticks to R) Then select
2
There is no slipping between rope and pulley. The
correct statement :
impulse exerted by the string on the pulley at the
2m gR
moment string becomes taut is is equal
x J
to
P
R
m R
(A) Linear momentum of P,R system decreases m
(B) KE of the P decreases
(C) Angular momentum of the P,R system is R
(D) All of the above
(A) 5 (B) 3
50. A particle P strikes the rod R perpendicularly as (C) 1 (D) None of these
shown. The rod is suspended vertically with upper
Section F - Combined Translational and
end hinged. (x = l, P sticks to R) Then select Rotational Motion of Rigid body,
correct statement : Pure Rolling, Slipping
53. A ring of radius R rolls without sliding with a

x constant velocity. The radius of curvature of the
path followed by any particle of the ring at the
P
R
highest point of its path will be
(A) R (B) 2R
(A) Linear momentum of P,R system increases
(C) 4R (D) none
(B) KE of the P decreases
(C) Angular momentum of the P,R system is
54. The linear speed of a uniform spherical shell after
rolling down an inclined plane of vertical height h
(D) All of the above
from rest, is :
51. Two separate cylinders of masses m (= 1kg) and 10 gh 4 gh

(A) (B)
4m and radii R(= 10 cm) and 2R rotating in clock- 7 5
wise direction with 1 100 rad/sec and 2 = 200 6 gh

rad/sec. Now they are held in contact with each (C) (D) 2gh
5
other as in fig. Determine their angular velocities
after the slipping between the cylinders stops. 55. A body kept on a smooth horizontal surface is pulled
by a constant horizontal force applied at the top
point of the body. If the body rolls purely on the
surface, its shape can be :
(A) thin pipe
(A) 150 rad/sec, 150 rad/sec
(B) uniform cylinder
(B) 150 rad/sec, 300 rad/sec
(C) uniform sphere
(C) 300 rad/sec, 150 rad/sec
(D) thin spherical shell
(D) 300 rad/sec, 300 rad/sec
Page 57
56. A uniform circular disc 60. A uniform rod ABC of mass M is placed vertically
0
placed on a rough on a rough horizontal surface. The coefficient of
kinetic friction between the rod and the surface is
horizontal surface has
. A force F (>  mg) is applied on the rod at point
v0
initially a velocity v0 and B at distance /3 below centre of the rod as shown
an angular velocity 0 as in figure. The initial acceleration of point A is
F A
shown in the figure. The
(A) g 
disc comes to rest after moving some distance in M
F
v0 (B)
the direction of motion. Then r is M l/3
0 (C) 4 g F
1 3 B
(A) (B) 1 (C) (D) 2 F
2 2 (D) 2g 
M
57. Consider the following statements 61. A light thread is wound on a disk of mass m and
(A) both A and R are true and R is the correct other end of tjhread is connected to a block of mass
explanation of A m, which is placed on a rough ground as shown in
(B) both A and R are true but R is not the correct diagram. Find the minimum value of coefficient of
explanation of A friction for which block remain at rest.
(C) A is true but R is false
m
(D) A is false but R is true
58. A rod is hinged at its centre and rotated by applying m

a constant torque starting from rest. The power r
developed by the external torque as a function of 1 1 1 1

time is : (A) (B) (C) (D)
3 4 2 5
P ext P ext 62. A cylinder of mass m is suspended through two
strings wrapped around it as shown in figure. Find
(A) (B)
the tension T in the string and the speed of the
time time cylinder as it falls through a distance h.
P ext P ext
T T
(C) (D)
time time
mg
59. A string is would over a
mg gh mg 2gh
cylinder of mass M, radius (A) , (B) ,
R and moment of inertia I 6 3 6 3
M1,l1,R1
and then the string is mg 4gh mg 4gh
wound over the pulley as (C) , (D) ,
3 3 6 3
shown in the figure. If the
system is released from 63. Determine the point of application of resultant force,
M,R,l
rest then determine the when forces acting on the rod are as shown in figure.
tension is string. Assume
there is no slipping 5N 10N
between string and pulley
cylinder. 5cm 5cm 37°
(A) g (B) g
I I I1 3N
M 2 M 
R R2 R12 (A) 2.5 cm right on the rod from the point where 5
g N force is acting.
(C) (D) None of these
I 2I1 (B) 1.8 cm right on the rod from the point where 5
M 
R2 R12 N force is acting.
Page 58
Rotational 2.45
(C) 5.625 cm right on the rod from the point where 67. A disc rolls on a table. The ratio of its K.E. of
5 N force is acting. rotation to the total K.E. is -
(D) None of these (A) 2/5 (B) 1/3 (C) 5/6 (D) 2/3
64. Two uniform cylinders, each of mass m = 10 kg 68. A disk and a ring of the same mass are rolling to
and radius r = 150 mm, are connected by a rough have the same kinetic energy. What is ratio of their
belt as shown. If the system is released from rest, velocities of centre of mass
determine (A) (4:3)1/2 (B) (3 : 4)1/2
1/2 1/2
the velocity of the centre of cylinder A after it has (C) (2) : (3) (D) (3)1/2 : (2)1/2
moved through 1.2 m & the tension in the portion
of the belt connecting the two cylinders. 69. A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a disc, all having
r smooth incline and released. Least time will be taken
in reaching the bottom by
(A) the solid sphere (B) the hollow sphere
(C) the disc (D)all will take same time.
70. The centre of a wheel rolling without slipping in a

r plane surface moves with speed v0. A particle on
the rim of the wheel at the same level as the centre
3 200 will be moving at speed.
(A) m/s ; N
7 7 (A) zero (B) v0
3 200 (C) 2v0 (D) 2v0
(B) 4 m/s ; N
7 7
71. A wheel of radius r rolling on a straight line, the
3 100 velocity of its centre being v. At a certain instant
(C) 4 m/s ; N
7 7 the point of contact of the wheel with the grounds
3 100
is M and N is the highest point on the wheel
(D) m/s ; N (diametrically opposite to M). The incorrect
7 7
statement is :
(A) The velocity of any point P of the wheel is
65. Thread would around cylinder of mass M and radius
proportional to MP.
R. It is allowed to fall as shown. Find its (B) Points of the wheel moving with velocity greater
acceleration. than v form a larger area of the wheel than points
moving with velocity less than v.
Thread
(C) The point of contact M is instantaneously at
rest.
(D) The velocities of any two parts of the wheel
R (M,R) which are equidistant from centre are equal.
Solid
Cylinder
72. If the applied torque is directly proportional to the
g 4g angular displacement , then the work done in
(A) (B)
3 3 rotating the body through an angle  would be –
2g (C is constant of proportionality)
(C) (D) None
3 1 1
(A) C (B) C (C) C2 (D) C2
2 2
66. In the figure shown, a string is wound over a
cylinder A. The other end of the string is attached Section G - Toppling + Direction of Friction
to block B through a pulley. When the system is
released the cylinder rolls down without 73. A Cubical bloc of mass M and edge a slides down
slipping. The ratio of the magnitude of vertical a rough inclined plane of inclination  with a uniform
component of displacement of A and B in any velocity. The torque of the normal force on the block
time interval t about its centre has a magnitude.
(A) sin  : 1 (A) zero (B) Mga
(B) sin : 2 A
1
(C) cos  : 1 B (C) Mga sin  (D) Mga sin
 2
(D) cos  : 2
Page 59
74. A homogeneous cubical brick lies motionless on a 78. Find the coordinates of IAOR
rough inclined surface. The half of the brick which
////////////////////////
applies greater pressure on the plane is : (0,5)
(A) left half

(B) right half ///////////////////////////
(4,0)
(C) both applies equal pressure
(D) the answer depend upon coefficient of friction (A) (4,5) (B) (4,5)
75. A rod AB of length L slides in the XY plane. If the (C) (5,4) (D) None of these
rod makes an angle  with the vertical, the angular 79. Find the distance of instantaneous point of rest, of
velocity of the rod can be found by an expression the disc, from point B.
which is
A
10m/s
A
 r=1m
L
5m/s
B
B
(A) dependent upon length of the rod and on linear
(A) 4 m (B) 2 m
velocity of end A of the rod at that instant.
(C) 1 m (D) 6 m
(B) dependent upon L and  at that instant.
(C) independent of velocity of end A of rod at that 80. Find the angular speed of the triangular plate &
instant. speed of point A, if instantaneous axis of rotation
(D) dependent upon L,  and velocity of end A of passes through point O as shown in figure.
rod at that instant.
A 4m 4m B
76. A uniform cube of side a and mass m rests on a
5m/s
rough horizontal table. A horizontal force F is applied
normal to one of the faces at a point that is directly 3m
3a
above the centre of the face, at a height above
4
the base. Find the minimum value of F for which C
the cube begins to tip about the edge? (Assume
that the cube does not slide).
5mg 2mg
(A) (B) 5m
3 3
mg
(C) (D) None of these O
3
Section H - Instantaneous Axis of Rotation 1

(A) rad / sec ; 3 m/sec
77. There is rod of length l. The velocities of its two 2
ends are v1 and v2 is opposite directions normal to 1
(B) rad / sec ; 6 m/sec
the rod. The distance of the instantaneous axis of 4
rotation from v1 is :
1
v2 (C) rad / sec ; 6 m/sec
(A) zero (B) v  v l 2
1 2
v1l 1
(D) rad / sec ; 3 m/sec
(C) v  v (D) l/2 4
1 2
Page 60
Rotational 2.77

1. D 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. C 7. C
8. A 9. B 10. C 11. C 12. D 13. B 14. B
15. D 16. D 17. D 18. D 19. A 20. D 21. C
22. A 23. B 24. A 25. A 26. C 27. B 28. D
29. B 30. A 31. B 32. C 33. B 34. D 35. C
36. C 37. B 38. B 39. C 40. B 41. B 42. B
43. B 44. B 45. B 46. B 47 B 48. D 49. D
50. D 51. C 52. B 53. C 54. C 55. A 56. A
57. B 58. B 59. B 60. D 61. A 62. D 63. C
64. B 65 C 66. B 67. B 68. A 69. D 70. C
71. D 72. C 73. D 74. A 75. D 76. B 77. C
78. B 79. B 80. A

1. C 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. A
8. C 9. C 10. A 11. B 12. B 13. C 14. D
15. D 16. C 17. B 18. C 19. C 20. A 21. A
22. C 23. A 24. B 25. A 26. B 27. B 28. C
29. B 30. C 31. A 32. D 33. B 34. B 35. C
36. B 37. D 38. A 39. C 40. B 41 B 42. B
43. D 44. C 45. C 46. A 47. C 48. B 49. A
50. B 51. C 52. A 53. A 54. A 55. C 56. A

1. A,B,C,D 2. BC 3. BCD 4. ABC 5. ACD
6. A,B,C,D 7. A,B,C,D 8. A,B,C,D 9. ACD 10. B,C
11. A,B,C,D 12. B,C 13. A,B,D 14. B,C,D 15. B,C
16. A,C 17. B,C 18. A,B,C,D 19. B,D 20. A,B,C
21. A,B,C 22. C 23. B,C,D 24. A,C,D 25. A,B,D

2
MR2  4R  14mr 2
1. – M  2. 3. 2r
2  3  5
4. w  sin , when the bob is at the lowest point 5. –14 i  10 j – 9k
mg
6. P= cot  7. (i) 10/13 m/s2, (ii) 5000/26, (iii) 480/13 N 8. 1
2
 2gh  2g
9. M = 2m 2 2 – 1 10.  11. 16 kg m2/s 12. 2k kg m 2 / s
R   5
13. 0.5 kg – m2/s, 75 J 14. 19.7 rad/s 15. 60° east of south, 30° south of east.
3g  
16. (1/2)KE0 17. (a) ( cw ) (b) N  13mg , F   3 3  mg  (c)
3 3
4L  
16  16  16
v0 2v 7 10 gh
18. ( ), 0 () 19. mv 2 20. 50m/s 21.
3 3 10 7
Page 61
Gravitation 3.27
Section A - Newton's law of Gravitation & 6. Statement - I : Assuming zero potential at infinity,
Gravitational Field, Potential gravitational potential at a point cannot be positive.
& Potential energy Statement - 2 : Magnitude of gravitational force
between two particle has inverse square dependence
1. On doubling the distance between two masses the on distance between two particles.
gravitational force between them will - (A) Statement - 1 is true, statement-2 is true and
(A) remain unchanged (B) become one-fourth statement-2 is correct explanation for statement-1
(C) become half (D) become double (B) Statement -1 is true, statement-2 is true and
statement - 2 is NOT the correct explanation for
statement-1
2. A hollow spherical shell is compressed to half its
(C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
radius. The gravitational potential at the centre
(D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.
(A) increases
(B) decreases
7. A particle of mass M is at a distance a from surface of a
(C) remains same thin spherical shell of equal mass and having radius a.
(D) during the compression increases then returns
M
at the previous value
M
3. Two different masses are dropped from same a

heights, then just before these strike the ground, the
(A) Gravitational field and potential both are zero at
following is same :
centre of the shell
(A) kinetic energy (B) potential energy
(B) Gravitational field is zero not only inside the
(C) linear momentum (D) Acceleration shell but at a point outside the shell also
(C) Inside the shell, gravitational field alone is zero
4. A body of mass m rises to height h = R/5 from the (D) Neither gravitational field nor gravitational
earth’s surface, where R is earth’s radius. If g is potential is zero inside the shell
acceleration due to gravity at earth’s surface, the
increase in potential energy is 8. Work done in taking a body of mass m to a height nR
above surface of earth will be : (R = radius of earth)
5
(A) mg/h (B) mgh (A) mgnR (B) mgR (n/n + 1)
6
(n  1) m gR
3 6 (C) mgR (D)
n n (n + 1 )
(C) mgh (D) mgh
5 7
9. If the distance between sun and earth is made 3

5. A planet has mass 1/10 of that of earth, while radius times of the present value then gravitational force
is 1/3 that of earth. If a person can throw a stone on between them will become :
earth surface to a height of 90m, then he will be
1
able to throw the stone on that planet to a height (A) 9 times (B) times
9
(A) 90m (B) 40 m
(C) 100 m (D) 45 m 1
(C) times (D) 3 times
3
Page 62
10. Two point masses of mass 4m and m respectively Section C - Kepler's law, Orbital velocity,
separated by d distance are revolving under mutual force Escape velocity, Geo -
of attraction. Ratio of their kinetic energies will be Stationary Satellites
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1 : 5
16. The potential energy of a body of mass 3kg on the
(C) 1 : 1 (D) 1 : 2 surface of a planet is 54 joule. The escape velocity
will be -
Section B - Variations in 'g' (A) 18m/s (B) 162 m/s

(C) 36 m/s (D) 6 m/s
11. If R is the radius of the earth and g the acceleration
due to gravity on the earth’s surface, the mean 17. If the kinetic energy of a satellite orbiting around
density of the earth is the earth is doubled then -
(A) 4G/3gR (B) 3R/4gG (A) the satellite will escape into the space.
(C) 3g/4RG (D) Rg/12G (B) the satellite will fall down on the earth
(C) radius of its orbit will be doubled
(D) radius of its orbit will become half.
12. The height above surface of earth where the value
of gravitational acceleration is one fourth of that at
surface, will be 18. The escape velocity from a planet is v0. The escape
velocity from a planet having twice the radius but
(A) Re/4 (B) Re/2
same density will be -
(C) 3Re/4 (D) Re
(A) 0.5 v0 (B) v0
(C) 2v0 (D) 4v0
13. The decrease in the value of g on going to a height
R/2 above the earth’s surface will be - 19. Two planets A and B have the same material density.
If the radius of A is twice that of B, then the ratio of
5g
(A) g/2 (B)
9 vA
the escape velocity v is
B
4g g
(C) (D) (A) 2 (B)
9 3 2
(C) 1 / 2 (D) 1/2

14. At what altitude will the acceleration due to gravity
be 25% of that at the earth’s surface (given radius 20. Select the correct choice(s) :
of earth is R) ? (A) The gravitational field inside a spherical cavity,
(A) R/4 (B) R within a spherical planet must be non zero and
(C) 3R/8 (D) R/2 uniform.
(B) When a body is projected horizontally at an
appreciable large height above the earth, with a
15. If the radius of the earth be increased by a factor of
velocity less than for a circular orbit, it will fall to
5, by what factor its density be changed to keep the the earth along a parabolic path
value of g the same ?
(C) A body of zero total mechanical energy placed
(A) 1/25 (B) 1/5 in a gravitational field will escape the field
(C) 1 / 5 (D) 5 (D) Earth’s satellite must be in equatorial plane.
Page 63
Gravitation 3.29
21. A (nonrotating) star collapses onto itself from an 23. A satellite revolves in the geostationary orbit but in a
initial radius Ri with its mass remaining unchanged. direction east to west. The time interval between its
Which curve in figure best gives the gravitational successive passing about a point on the equator is
acceleration ag on the surface of the star as a function (A) 48 hrs (B) 24 hrs
of the radius of the star during the collapse ?
(C) 12 hrs (D) never
ag 24. A satellite can be in a geostationary orbit around

b d earth at a distance r from the centre. If the angular
a velocity of earth about its axis doubles, a satellite
c can now be in a geostationary orbit around earth if
its distance from the center is
R
Ri
r r
(A) (B)
2 2 2
(A) a (B) b
(C) c (D) d
r r
(C) (D)
(4)1/ 3 (2)1/ 3
22. A satellite of the earth is revolving in circular orbit
with a uniform velocity V. If the gravitational force
suddenly disappears, the statellite will 25. The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular
orbit just above the earth’s surface is . For a satellite
(A) continue to move with the same velocity in the
same orbit orbiting at an altitude of half of the earth’s radius,
the orbital velocity is –
(B) move tangentially to the original orbit with
velocity V 3 3
(A)  (B) 
(C) fall down with increasing velocity 2 2
(D) come to a stop somewhere in its original orbit
2 2
(C)  (D) 
3 3
Page 64
Gravitation 3.41

1. B 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. B 7. D 8. B 9. B 10. A
11. C 12. D 13. B 14. B 15. B
16. D 17. A 18. C 19. A 20. C
21. B 22. B 23. C 24. C 25. C

1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. A
6. B 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. C
11. A 12. A 13. A

1. A,D 2. B,C,D 3. A,B 4. B,C 5. B,C
6. B,C 7. A,C 8. A,B,C 9. A,C 10. B,D
11. A,C 12. A,D
3Gm 2 Gm 2 2G
1. – 2. 3. (sin ), (–G 2 )
a 3L2 R
–4GM 2  3 1  5 –1 4 Gm 2 2Gm
4. 3    5. h R 6. (i) , (ii) 3 5R
L  2 3 2 3 R
 
 
 G0 R  3
1 8 ˆ
g – i  2G0 R ˆ
7. 6  R
2
x2  , g  – i
 x –   3
  2 
8. 1.6 hours if is rotating from west to east, 24/17 hours if it is rotating from west to east.
9. 1 × 105 J 10. (a) –GmMe/r, (b) –2GmMe/r
GMm  1 1   x2 – R2 
t  –  1 –  4R 2
11.
2C  R e r 
12.  x 
 
Page 65
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 7. A particle of mass 1 kg is undergoing S.H.M., for
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of which graph between force and displacement (from
SHM mean position) as shown. Its time period, in
1. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, seconds, is. F(N)
the acceleration is proportional to. (A) /3 13.5
(A) displacement from the mean position (B) 2/3 1.5
–1.5 xm
(B) distance from the mean position
(C) /6 –13.5
(C) distance travelled since t = 0
(D) 3/
(D) speed
2. The distance moved by a particle in simple harmonic 8. The time period of a particle in simple harmonic
motion in one time period is motion is equal to the time between consecutive
(A) A (B) 2A appearance of the particle at a particular point in its
(C) 4A (D) zero motion. This point is
(A) the mean position
3. Equations y = 2 A cos t and y = A(sin t + 3
2
(B) an extreme position
cost) represent the motion of two particles. (C) between the mean position and the positive
(A) Only one of these is S.H.M extreme.
(B) Ratio of maximum speeds is 2 : 1 (D) between the mean position and the negative
(C) Ratio of maximum speeds is 1 : 1 extreme.
(D) Ratio of maximum accelerations is 1:4
4. A particle executes S.H.M. given by the equation y

= 0.45 sin 2t where y is in meter and t is in second. Section B – Time period and angular
What is the speed of the particle when its frequency in SHM
displacement is 7.5 cm? 9. A simple harmonic motion having an amplitude A
(A) 0.075 3 ms–1 (B) 7.5 3 ms–1 and time period T is represented by the equation :
(C) 0.15 3 ms–1 (D) 15 3 ms–1 y = 5 sin(t + 4) m

Then the values of A (in m) and T (in sec) are :
5. The maximum displacement of a particle executing (A) A = 5; T = 2 (B) A = 10 ; T = 1
S.H.M. is 1 cm and the maximum acceleration is (C) A = 5 ; T = 1 (D) A = 10 ; T = 2
(1.57)2cm per sec2. Then the time period is
(A) 0.25 sec (B) 4.00 sec
10. A simple pendulum performs S.H.M. about x = 0
(C) 1.57 sec (D) (1.57)2 sec
with an amplitude a and time period T. The speed
of the pendulum at x = a/2 will be–
6. The angular frequency of motion whose equation
d2 y a 3 a 3
is 4 + 9y = 0 is (y = displacement and t = time) (A) (B)
dt 2 T 2T
9 4 3 2 a 32a
(A) (B) (C) (D) (C) (D)
4 9 2 3 T T
Page 66
Simple Harmonic Motion 1.29
11. A particle performing SHM is found at its equilibrium Section C – Two block system
at t = 1 sec. and it is found to have a speed of 0.25
m/s at t = 2 sec. If the period of oscillation is 6 sec. 17. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by
Calculate amplitude of oscillation a massless spring of constant K. When the masses
3 3 are in equilibrium, m1 is removed without disturbing
(A) m (B) m
2 4 the system. Then the angular frequency of
6 3
(C) m (D) oscillation of m2 is -
 8
k
12. A particle performs SHM with a period T and (A) m1
amplitude a. The mean velocity of the particle over
the time interval during which it travels a distance
k m1
a/2 from the extreme position is (B) m2 m2
(A) a/T (B) 2a/T
(C) 3a/T (D) a/2T
k k
(C) m1  m 2 (D) m1  m 2
13. The time taken by a particle performing SHM to
pass from point A to B where its velocities are same
is 2 seconds. After another 2 seconds it returns to 18. A block of mass m =1 kg placed on top of another
B. The time period of oscillation is (in seconds) block of mass M = 5 kg is attached to a horizontal
(A) 2 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D) 4 spring of force constant K = 20 N/m as shown in
figure. The coefficient of friction between the blocks
14. Two particles are in SHM on same straight line with
is µ where as the lower block slides on a friction-
amplitude A and 2A and with same angular
less surface. The amplitude of oscillation is 0.4 m.
frequency . It is observed that when first particle
What is the minimum value of µ such that the upper
is at a distance A / 2 from origin and going toward
block does not slip over the lower block ?
mean position, other particle is at extreme position
K m
on other side of mean position. Find phase difference
M
between the two particles.
(A) 45° (B) 90° (C) 135° (D) 180° (A) 0.133 (B) 0.5
(C) 0.362 (D) 0.21
15. Two particles are in SHM in a straight line about
same equilibrium position. Amplitude A and time
19. A block of mass m moves with a speed v towards
period T of both the particles are equal. At time t = the right block in equilibrium with a spring. If the
0, one particle is at displacement y1 = +A and the surface is frictionless and collisions are elastic, the
other at y2 = – A/2, and they are approaching frequency of collisions between the masses will be–
towards each other. After what time they cross
each other ? v K
(A) T/3 (B) T/4 (C) 5T/6 (D) T/6 m m
L
16. Two particles execute SHM of same amplitude of
20 cm with same period along the same line about v 1 K  v 1 K
(A)  (B) 2 2L   m 
the same equilibrium position. The maximum 2L  m  
distance between the two is 20 cm. Their phase
difference in radians is 1 2
 2L   2L 
2    (C)  + π m  (D)    m 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 2 3 4  V K   v K 
Page 67
20. Two blocks each of mass m are connected with Section D – Combination of springs
springs each of force constant K as shown in fig.
23. A body of mass 'm' hangs from three springs, each
The mass A is displaced to the left & B to the right
of spring constant 'k' as shown in the figure. If the
by the same amount and released then the time
mass is slightly displaced and let go, the system will
period of oscillation is -
oscillate with time period–
K
m m
K
K
A B m
(A) 2
3k
K K
M M
(A) 2 (B) 2 3m
K 2K (B) 2
2k m
M M
(C)  (D) 
K 2K 2m 3k
(C) 2 (D) 2
3k m
21. A block P of mass m is placed on a frictionless
surface. Another block Q of same mass is kept on
24. A block of mass m is connected between two
P, and is connected to a wall by a massless horizontal
springs (constants K1 and K2) as shown in the figure
spring of spring constant k, as shown. The
and is made to oscillate, the frequency of oscillation
coefficient of static friction between the two blocks
of the system shall be-
is s. Blocks P and Q are moved together to stretch
the spring by a distance A. When released, the
blocks oscillate without slipping. The maximum
frictional force between P and Q is
(A) 0
1/ 2 1/ 2
(B) Ka 1  m  1  K1K 2 
k (A)   (B)  
s
2   K1  K 2  2   (K1  K 2 )m 
kA Q
(C)
2
P 1/ 2
(D) s mg 1  (K1  K 2 )m 
1/ 2
SMOOTH
1  K1  K 2 
(C)   (D)  
2  m  2   K1K 2 
22. Four springs of constant as shown are attached to
a pair of masses m each as shown. The time period
25. Two springs of the same material but of length L
will be 2 times-
and 2L are suspended with masses M and 2M
k attached at their lower ends. Their time periods when
2k 2k they are allowed to oscillate
m m
k will be in the ratio
(A) 1 : 2
m 2m
(B) 2 : 1
(A) (B) (C) 1 : 4
k k
(D) 4 : 1
4m 3m
(C) (D)
k 4k
Page 68
Simple Harmonic Motion 1.31
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple 31. A simple pendulum with length  and bob of mass
pendulum m executes SHM of small amplitude A. The
26. Two identical simple pendulums A and B are fixed maximum tension in the string will be
at same point. They are displaced by very small (A) mg (1 + A/) (B) mg (1 + A/)2
angles  and  (  > ) and released from rest. (C) mg [1 + (A/) ] 2
(D) 2 mg
Find the time after which B reaches its initial position
for the first time. Collisions are elastic and length 32. Two pendulums have time periods T and 5T/4. They
of strings is . start SHM at the same time from the mean position.
 After how many oscillations of the smaller
 
(A)  g pendulum they will be again in the same phase
(A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 11 (D) 9
 B
(B) 2 g A
33. A hollow metal sphere is filled with water and hung
by a long thread. A small hole is drilled at the bottom
  2  through which water slowly flows out. Now the
(C)  g (D)  g sphere is made to oscillate, the period of oscillation
of the pendulum -
27. A pendulum of length 10 cm is hanged by wall making (A) remains constant
an angle 3° with vertical. It is swinged to position (B) continuously decreases
B. Time period of pendulum will be (C) continuously increases
(A) /5 sec (D) first increases and then decreases
2 3° 6°
(B) sec 34. The angular velocity and the amplitude of a simple
15
pendulum is  and a respectively. At a displacement
(C) /6 sec B
x from the mean position if its kinetic energy is T
(D) Subsequent A
and potential energy is V, then the ratio of T to V is
motion will not be periodic
(A) x22/(a2–x22) (B) x2/(a2 – x2)
28. The pendulum of the grandfather’s clock takes 1 (C) (a –x  ) / x 
2 2 2 2 2
(D) (a2–x 2)/ x 2
sec to oscillate from one end to another a distance
of 10 cms. Considering it a simple pendulum, find 35. Find the velocity when KE = PE of the body
its maximum velocity- undergoing SHM. Amplitude = x0 and angular
(A) 4 cms/sec (B) 8 cms/sec frequency is . How many times in a cycle
(C) 12 cms/sec (D) 16 cms/sec KE = PE ?
29. In an elevator, a spring clock of time period TS (mass x 0
attached to a spring) and a pendulum clock of time (A) ,2 (B) x0, 2
2
period TP are kept. If the elevator accelerates upwards
(A) TS well as TP increases x 0
(C) ,4 (D) x , 4
(B) TS remain same, TP increases 2 0
(C) TS remains same, TP decreases

(D) TS as well as TP decreases Section G – Compound pendulum / physical
pendulum, torsional pendulum
30. A simple pendulum is oscillating in a lift. If the lift is
36. A ring is suspended at a point on its rim and it
going down with constant velocity, the time period of
behaves as a second’s pendulum when it oscillates
the simple pendulum is T1. If the lift is going down
such that its centre move in its own plane. The radius
with some retardation its time period is T2, then
of the ring would be (g = 2)
(A) T1 > T2 (B) T1 < T2
(C) T1 = T2 (A) 0.5 m (B) 1.0 m
(D) depends upon the mass of the pendulum bob (C) 0.67 m (D) 1.5 m
Page 69
37. A rod of mass m, length  is held horizontal, using a Section H – Combination of two or more SHM
vertical string through its centre. If it is turned a 41. A particle is subjected to two mutually perpendicular
little, the frequency of oscillation will be proportional simple harmonic motions such that its x and y
to- [C-torsional constant of the string] coordinates are given by x = 2 sin t ; y = 2
3C
(A)  
m 2 sin  t  
(m, )  4
12C
(B) The path of the particle will be :
m
12C m (A) an ellipse (B) a straight line
(C) (D) (C) a parabola (D) a circle
m 2 12C
38. A long uniform rod of length L, mass M is free to 42. The amplitude of the vibrating particle due to
rotate in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis
through its end. Two springs of constant K each  
superposition of two SHMs, y1 = sin  t   and
are connected as shown. On equilibrium, the rod  3
was horizontal. The frequency will be – y2 = sin t is :
1 15 K (A) 1 (B)
(A) y 2
2 M 
L L (C) (D) 2
1 15 2 2
3
(B) K
K
2 4M
1 3K 1 15 K 43. Two simple harmonic motions y1 = A sin t and y2
(C) (D)
2 4 M 2 4M = A cos t are superimposed on a particle of mass
m. The total mechanical energy of the particle is :
39. A solid ball of mass m is allowed to fall from a
height h to a pan suspended with a spring of spring 1
(A) m2A2 (B) m2A2
constant k. Assume the ball does not rebound and 2
pan is massless, then amplitude of the oscillation is -
1
mg (C) m2A2 (D) zero
(A) 4
k
k
1/ 2
mg  2hk  44. The displacement of two identical particles executing
(B) +  mg 
k   SHM are represented by equations
 
1  2hk mg 2hk x1 = 4 sin 10 t  6  and x2 = 5 cos t
(C) mg 1  mg (D) 1
mg
 
k
For what value of  energy of both the
40. A uniform thin rod has a mass 1 kg and carries a particles is same ?
mass 2.5 kg at B. The rod is hinged at A and is
(A) 16 unit (B) 6 unit
maintained in the horizontal position by a spring
having a spring constant 18 kNm–1 at C as shown (C) 4 unit (D) 8 unit
in figure. The angular frequency
of oscillation is nearly-
(A) 10 rad/s
(B) 20 rad/s
(C) 40 rad/s A
C B
2.5 kg
(D) 80 rad/s 0.3 m 0.3 m
Page 70

1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. B
6. C 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. A
11. A 12. C 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. C 17. B 18. A 19. C 20. C
21. C 22. D 23. B 24. C 25. A
26. B 27. B 28. D 29. C 30. A
31. C 32. A 33. D 34. D 35. C
36. A 37. C 38. D 39. D 40. C
41. A 42. C 43. B 44. D
1. C 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. D
6. A 7. A 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. D 12. D 13. D 14. C 15. B
16. C 17. A 18. C 19. A 20. A
21. A 22. B 23. C 24. C 25. D
26. B 27. C 28. C 29. D 30. C
31. A 32. A 33. A 34. B 35. C
36. B 37. B 38. C 39. C 40. A
41. B

1. B,C,D 2. B,C,D 3. A,B,C 4. A,B,C 5. A,B
6. B,D 7. B,C,D 8. A,B,C 9. A,C 10. B,C
11. A,C 12. C,D 13. B,C 14. A,C
15. A,B,C,D
1. Amplitude = 5 m ; Initial Phase = /6; Maximum speed = 5m/sec
2. (a) 2.0 cm, /50 sec, 100 N/m ; (b) 1 cm, 3 m / sec , 100 m/sec–1
  
3. (a) sec. , (b) sec. (c) sec. 4. 2m/sec
120 30 30
11  11
5. (a) m (b) sec (c) x = 0.2 – cos t 6. (i) x0 = 2m (ii) T = 2 sec (iii) 2 3
5 5 5
5
7. 25 2 N 8. X = 10 sin (t + /6) 9. Hz , 5 cm
2
 
10. (a) sec , (b) 4 cm, (c) 2.40 kg m/sec 11.
10 7
Page 71
Section A – Equation of W ave, Particle 5. The equation of a wave travelling along the positive
Velocity and Acceleration x-axis, as shown in figure at t=0 is given by
1. A transverse wave is described by the equation   y
Y = Y0 sin 2 (ft – x/). The maximum particle (A) sin  kx – t  
 6 1
velocity is equal to four times the wave velocity if 0
(A)  =  Y0/4 (B)  =  Y0/2   –0.5
x
(C)  =  Y0 (D)  = 2 Y0 (B) sin  kx – t – 

 6 –0.1
2. If the speed of the wave shown in the figure is 330    

(C) sin  t – kx   (D) sin  t – kx – 
m/s in the given medium, then the equation of the  6  6
wave propagating in the positive x-direction will be
- (all quantities are in MKS units) 6. The displacement produced by a simple harmonic
wave is :
10  x
y sin  2000  t   cm. The time period
  17 
and maximum velocity of the particle will be
respectively -
(A) 10–3 second and 200 m/s
(A) y = 0.05 sin 2  (4000 t – 12.5 x)
(B) 10–2 second and 2000 m/s
(B) y = 0.05 sin 2  (4000 t – 122.5 x)
(C) 10–3 second and 330 m/s
(C) y = 0.05 sin 2  (3300 t – 10 x)
(D) 10–4 second and 20 m/s
(D) y = 0.05 sin 2  (3300 x – 10 t)
Section B – Speed of transverse wave on

3. A transverse wave of amplitude 0.50 m, wavelength
string, energy in waves
1 m and frequency 2 hertz is propagating in a string
in the negative x-direction. The expression form of 7. Both the strings, show in figure, are made of same
the wave is material and have same cross section. The pulleys
(A) y(x,t) = 0.5 sin (2x – 4t) are light. The wave speed of a transverse wave in
(B) y(x,t) = 0.5 cos (2x + 4t) the string AB is v1 and in
(C) y(x,t) = 0.5 sin (x – 2t) CD it is v2. The v1/v2 is A
(D) y(x,t) = 0.5 cos (2x – 2t) (A) 1
(B) 2
B C
4. A wave pulse is generated in a string that lies along (C) 2
x-axis. At the points A and B, as shown in figure, if
(D) 1/ 2 D
RA and RB are ratio of wave speed to the particle
speed respectively then :
y 8. A block of mass 1 kg is hanging vertically from a
string of length 1 m and Mass/length =0.001 kg/m.
B V A small pulse is generated at its lower end. The
Pulse reaches the top end in approximately.
A
x (A) 0.2 sec
(B) 0.1 sec
(A) RA > RB (B) RB > RA 1m
(C) 0.02 sec
(C) RA = RB (D) 0.01 sec
(D) Information is not sufficient to decide.
Page 72
WAVES 2.27
9. A uniform rope of length 10 m and mass 15 kg hangs 12. The relation between frequency  wavelength 
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 5 and velocity of propagation vof a wave is-
kg is attached to the free end of the rope. A
transverse pulse of wavelength 0.08 m is produced 
(A) v   (B) =1
v
at the lower end of the 3 rope. The wavelength of
the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope will
v  
be- (C) =1 (D) + =1
 v v
(A) 0.08 m
(B) 0.04 m
(C) 0.16 m
(D) 0 m
Section C – Super position principle
interference of waves
10. A uniform rope having some mass hanges vertically 13. Two waves of equal amplitude A, and equal
from a rigid support. A transverse wave pulse is frequency travels in the same direction in a medium.
produced at the lower end. The speed (v) of the The amplitude of the resultant wave is
wave pulse varies with height (h) from the lower (A) 0 (B) A
end as: (C) 2A (D) between 0 and 2A
v v
14. When two waves of the same amplitude and
(A) (B) frequency but having a phase difference of ,
travelling with the same speed in the same direction
h h
(positive x), interfere, then
(A) their resultant amplitude will be twice that of a
v
v single wave but the frequency will be same
(B) their resultant amplitude and frequency will both
(C) (D) be twice that of a single wave
h
h (C) their resultant amplitude will depend on the phase
angle while the frequency will be the same
(D) the frequency and amplitude of the resultant
11. A wire of 102 kg m 1 passes over a frictionless light wave will depend upon the phase angle.
pulley fixed on the top of a frictionless inclined plane,
which makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. 15. Two waves are represented by
Masses m and M are tied at two ends of wire such
y1 = a1 cos (t – kx) and
that m rests on the plane and M hangs freely
vertically downwards. The entire system is in y2 = a2 sin(t – kx + /3)
equilibrium and a transverse wave propagates along Then the phase difference between them is-
1
the wire with a velocity of 100 ms .
 
(A) (B)
3 2
m 1
(A) M=5 kg (B) 
M 4
5 
(C) (D)
m 6 6
(C) m=20 kg (D) 4
M
Page 73
16. Standing waves are produced by superposition of 20. A Wave pulse on a string has the dimension shown
two waves in figure. The waves speed is v=1 cm/s. If point O
y1 = 0.05 sin (3t – 2x) and is a free end. The shape of wave at time t=3 s is:
y2 = 0.05 sin (3t + 2x)
Where x and y are measured in meter and t in v=1cm/s
second. Find the amplitude of particle at x = 0.5m 1 cm
[cos 57.3 = 0.54] O
(A) 0.54 m (B) 5.4 m 1cm 1cm 2cm
(C) 54 m (D) 0.054 m
O
17. If two waves are represented by :
1c
y1=2 sin (4x – 300t) & (A) O (B)
y2 = sin (4x–300t – 0.2)
then their superposed wave will have angular
frequency -
1cm
(A) 150/ (B) 150 
2cm
(C) 300 (D) 600  (C) 1cm (D)
18. x1 = A sin (t – 0.1x) and O 1cm
 
x2 = A sin  t  0.1x  2 
 
21. A wave pulse, travelling on a two piece string, gets
Resultant amplitude of combined wave is– partially reflected and partially transmitted at the

junction. The reflected wave is inverted in shape
(A) 2A cos (B) A 2 cos  / 2 as compared to the incident one. If the incident wave
4
has wavelength  and the transmitted wave .
   (A)  >  (B)  = 
(C) 2A cos (D) A 21  cos 4 
2   (C)  < 
(D) nothing can be said about the relation of  and .
Section D – Reflection and transmission
between 2 string
22. Two sound waves are respectively
19. A pulse shown here is reflected from the rigid wall
A and then from free end B. The shape of the string y1 = a sin (t–kx) and y2 = b cos (t–kx).
after these 2 Reflection will be. The phase difference between the two waves is:
(A) /2 (B) /3
(C)  (D) 3/4
B A
23. Two waves are represented by the following

equations :
(A) A
(B) A y1 = 5 sin 2 (10t – 0.1 x) and
B B
y2 = 10 sin 2(20t – 0.2x)
Ratio of intensities I2/I1 will be -
(C) A
(D) A
(A) 1 (B) 2
B B
(C) 4 (D) 16
Page 74
WAVES 2.29
24. Figure shows a rectangular pulse and a triangular 28. The equation for the vibration of a string fixed at
pulse approaching each other along x-axis. The both ends vibrating in its third harmonic is given by
pulse speed is 0.5 cm/s. What is the resultant y=2 cm sin [(0.6 cm–1)x]cos [(500 s–1)t]
displacement of medium particles due to The length of the string is –
superposition of waves at x = 0.5 cm and t = 2 sec. (A) 24.6 cm (B) 12.5 cm
(C) 20.6 cm (D) 15.7 cm
y (cm)
0.5 cm/s 0.5 cm/s
2
29. The vibrations of a string of length 60 cm fixed at
1 both ends are represented by the equation
x (cm)
–2 –1 0 1 2 3 y = 4 sin (x/15) cos(96t),
where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. The
(A) 3.5 cm (B) 2.5 cm maximum displacement at x = 5 cm is–
(C) 4 cm (D) 3 cm (A) 2 3 cm (B) 3 2 cm
(C) 2 cm (D) 3 cm
Section E – Equation of standing wave
(Stationary waves)
25. A wave is represented by the equation y = 1 30. If a wave is represented by the following equation
0sin 2 (100t  0.02 X )  10sin 2 (100t  0.02 X ). The 2x 2vt

y = A cos sin then it is a :
 
maximum amplitude and loop length are respectively
(A) Progressive wave
(A) 20 units and 30 units (B) 20 units and 25 units
(B) Stationary wave
(C) 30 units and 20 units (D) 25 units and 20 units
(C) Longitudinal progressive wave
(D) Transverse progressive wave
26. The resultant amplitude due to superposition of two
waves
Section F – Stationary waves in strings,
Y1  5sin ( wt  kx) and y2  5cos ( wt  kx  1500 ) vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
(A) 5 (B) 5 3
31. Two wave pulses travel in opposite directions on a
(C) 5 2 – 3 (D) 5 2  3 string and approach each other. The shape of the
one pulse in inverted with respect to the other.
(A) the pulses will collide with each other and vanish
27. The equation of stationary wave along a stretched
after collision.
string is given by
(B) the pulses will reflect from each other i.e., the
x pulse going towards right will finally move towards
y = 5 sin cos 40  t
3 left and vice versa.
Where x and y are in cm and t in second. The (C) the pulses will pass through each other but their
separation between two adjacent nodes is - shapes will be modified
(A) 1.5 cm (B) 3 cm (D) the pulses will pass through each other without
(C) 6 cm (D) 4 cm any change in their shape.
Page 75
32. A wire of linear mass density 9x10 –3 kg/m is 34. In a stationary wave represented by y = a sin t
stretched between two rigid supports under a cos kx, amplitude of the component progressive
tension of 360 N. The wire resonates at frequency wave is :
210 Hz. The next higher frequency at which the
a
same wire resonates is 280 Hz. The number of loops (A) (B) a
2
produced in first case will be-
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 2a (D) None
(C) 3 (D) 4
35. The rate of transfer of energy in a wave depends
33. A stretched sonometer wire resonates at a (A) directly on the square of the wave amplitude
frequency of 350 Hz and at the next higher and square of the wave frequency
frequency of 420 Hz. The fundamental frequency (B) directly on the square of the wave amplitude
of this wire is : and square root of the wave frequency
(A) 350 Hz (B) 5 Hz (C) directly on the wave frequency and square of
(C) 70 Hz (D) 170 Hz the wave amplitude
(D) directly on the wave amplitude and square of
the wave frequency.
Page 76
WAVES 2.43

1. B 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D
6. A 7. D 8. D 9. C 10. C
11. C 12. B 13. D 14. C 15. D
16. D 17. C 18. A 19. A 20. D
21. C 22. A 23. D 24. D 25. B
26. A 27. B 28. D 29. A 30. B
31. D 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. A

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. D 7. A 8. C 9. C 10. C
11. B 12. B 13. C 14. B 15. C
16. C 17. C 18. B 19. A 20. B
21. A 22. B 23. C 24. B 25. A
26. D 27. C 28. D 29. D 30. B
31. C

1. A,B,C,D 2. B,C,D 3. B,C 4. C,D 5. A,D
6. C 7. B,D 8. B,C 9. A,D 10. A,B
11. A,C 12. A,C 13. C,D 14. C,D

2
1. (a) amplitude A = 5 mm ; (b) wave number k = 1 cm–1 ; (c) wavelength  = = 2 cm
k
 60 1 
(d) frequency v = = Hz ; (e) time period T = = s
2 2 v 30
(f) wave velocity u = n = 60 cm/s
10 
2. (a) im / s (b) –5.48 cm (c) 0.667 m, 5.00 Hz (d) 11.0 m/s
3
3. (a) 10  rad/s (b) /2 rad/m (c) y = (0.120m) sin (1.57x – 31.4 t) (d) 1.2  m/s
(e) 118 m/s2
1 2
4. Ar = – cm, At = cm 5. 0.2 cm 6. 0.02 s
3 3
7. (a) 0.52 m ; (b) 40 m/s ; (c) 0.40 m 8. 50 Hz, 4.0 cm, 2.0 m/s
Page 77
SOUND WAVES 3.23
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, 4. A sound level I is greater by 3.0103 dB from another
Velocity, Newton's and laplace sound of intensity 10 nW cm–2. The absolute value
formula, Loudness and of intensity of sound level I in Wm–2 is :
intensity, Energy in sound (A) 2.5 × 10–4 (B) 2 × 10–4
waves –2
(C) 2.0 × 10 (D) 2.5 × 10–2
1. The elevation of a cloud is 60°above the horizon. A
thunder is heard 8 s after the observation of lighting. 5. How many times more intense is 90 dB sound than
The speed of sound is 330 ms–1. The vertical height 40 dB sound?
of cloud from ground is (A) 5 (B) 50
(C) 500 (D) 105
Cloud 6. The ratio of intensities between two coherent sound

sources is 4:1 The difference of loudness in dB
between maximum and minimum intensities when
they interfere in space is
60° (A) 10 log 2 (B) 20 log 3
Horizon (C) 10 log 3 (D) 20 log 2
(A) 2826 m (B) 2682 m 7. The velocity of sound in an ideal gas at temperature
T1 and T2 K are v1 and v2 respectively. If the root
(C) 2286 m (D) 2068 m
mean square velocity of the same gas at same
temperature are c1 and c2 then–
2. The ratio of speed of sound in neon to that in water
vapours at any temperature (when molecular weight v2
(A) c2 = c1 (v2/v1) (B) c2 = c1 v1
of neon is 2.02 × 10–2 kg mol–1 and for water vapours
is 1.8 × 10–2 kg mol–1)
(A) 1.06 (B) 1.60 v1
(C) c2 = c1 (v1/v2) (D) c2 = c1 v2
(C) 6.10 (D) 15.2
3. A Firecracker exploding on the surface of a lake is 8. The speed of sound in a medium depends on-
heard as two sounds a time interval t apart by a man (A) the elastic property but not on the inertia property
on a boat close to water surface. Sound travels with (B) the inertia property but not on the elastic property
a speed u in water and a sped v in air. The distance (C) the elastic property as well as the inertia property
from the exploding firecracker to the boat is (D) neither the elastic property nor the inertia
property
uvt t (u  v )
(A) (B)
uv uv
9. At a pressure of 105 N/m2 the volume strain of water
t (u  v ) uvt is 5 x 10–5. Calculate the speed of sound in water
(C) (D)
uv uv density of water is 1×103 kg/m3
(A) 2.828 × 103 m/s (B) 1.414 × 103 m/s
(C) 0.707 × 103 m/s (D) 4.2 × 103 m/s
Page 78
Section B - Interference of waves, 14. The energy per unit area associated with a
Reflection and refraction progressive sound wave will be doubled if :
(A) the amplitude of the wave is doubled
10. When two waves with same frequency and constant
(B) the amplitude of the wave is increased by 50%
phase difference interfere,
(C) the amplitude of the wave is increased by 41%
(A) there is a gain of energy
(D) None of these
(B) there is a loss of energy
(C) the energy is redistributed and the distribution
15. Sound waves of frequency 660 Hz fall normally on
changes with time
a perfectly reflecting wall. The shortest distance from
(D) the energy is redistributed and the distribution the wall at which the air particle has maximum
remains constant in time amplitude of vibration is (velocity of sound in air is
330 m/s)
11. Sound waves from a tuning fork F reach a point P (A) 0.125 m (B) 0.5 m
by two separate routes FAP and FBP (when FBP is (C) 0.25 m (D) 2 m
greater than FAP by 12 cm there is silence at P). If
the difference is 24 cm the sound becomes maximum
16. Two loudspeakers L1 and L2 driven by a common
at P but at 36 cm there is silence again and so on. If
oscillator and amplifier, are arranged as shown. The
velocity of sound in air is 330 ms –1, the least
frequency of the oscillator is gradually increased
frequency of tuning fork is :
from zero and the detector at D records a series of
(A) 1537 Hz (B) 1735 Hz maxima and minima. If the speed of sound is 330
(C) 1400 Hz (D) 1375 Hz ms–1 then the frequency at which the first maximum
is observed is : L 40m
1
D
12. S1 and S2 are two sources of sound emitting sine (A) 165 Hz
waves. The two sources are in phase. The sound (B) 330 Hz
9m
emmited by the two sources interfere at point F. (C) 496 Hz
The waves of wavelength: (D) 660 Hz L2
2m 4m
S1 S2 F
17. Four waves are represented by y1 = A1 sin t,
(A) 1 m will result in constructive interference y2 = A2 sin (ty3 = A1 sin (2t and y4
= A2 sin (t–  Interference will happen with–
2
(B) m will result in constructive interference (A) y1, y2 and y3 only (B) y1, y2 and y4 only
3
(C) y1 and y3 only (D) y1, y2, y3 and y4
(C) 4m will result in destructive interference
(D) All the above
18. There is a destructive interference between the two
waves of wavelength  coming from two different
13. Two waves of sound having intensities I and 4I
paths at a point. To get maximum sound or
interfere to produce interference pattern. The phase
constructive interference at that point, the path of
 one wave is to be increased by-
difference between the waves is at point A and 
2
 
at point B. Then the difference between the resultant (A) (B)
4 2
intensities at A and B is
(A) 2I (B) 4I 3
(C) (D) 
4
(C) 5I (D) 7I
Page 79
SOUND WAVES 3.25
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes), 24. A pipe’s lower end is immersed in water such that the
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, length of air column from the top open end has a certain
Kundt's tube length 25 cm. The speed of sound in air is 350 m/s.
19. An open organ pipe of length L vibrates in its The air column is found to resonate with a tuning fork
fundamental mode. The pressure variation is maximum of frequency 1750 Hz. By what minimum distance
(A) at the two ends should the pipe be raised in order to make the air column
resonate again with the same tuning fork
(B) at the middle of the pipe
(C) at distance L/4 inside the ends (A) 7 cm (B) 5 cm
(D) at distance L/8 inside the ends (C) 35 cm (D) 10 cm
20. At the closed end of an organ pipe : 25. A closed organ pipe has length ‘l’. The air in it is
(A) the displacement is zero vibrating in 3rd overtone with maximum displacement
(B) the displacement is maximum amplitude ‘a’. The displacement amplitude at
(C) the wave pressure is zero distance l / 7 from closed end of the pipe is :
(D) None of these (A) 0 (B) a
(C) a / 2 (D) none of these
21. A cylindrical tube, open at one end and closed at the
other, is in acoustic unison with an external source
26. An organ pipe P1 closed at one end vibrating in its
of frequency held at the open end of the tube, in its
first overtone. Another pipe P2 open at both ends is
fundamental note. Then
vibrating in its third overtone. They are in a
(A) the displacement wave from the source gets
resonance with a given tuning fork. The ratio of the
reflected with a phase change of  at the closed end
length of P1 to that of P2 is:
(B) the pressure wave from the source get reflected
without a phase change at the closed end (A) 8/3 (B) 3/8
(C) the wave reflected from the closed end again (C) 1/2 (D) 1/3
gets reflected at the open end
(D) All the above 27. In Quincke’s tube a detector detects minimum
intensity. Now one of the tube is displaced by 5 cm.
22. An open organ pipe of length L vibrates in second During displacement detector detects maximum
harmonic mode. The pressure vibration is maximum intensity 10 times, then finally a minimum intensity
(A) At the two ends (when displacement is complete). The wavelength
(B) at a distance L/4 from either end inside the tube of sound is:
(C) At the mid-point of the tube (A) 10/9 cm (B) 1 cm
(D) None of these (C) 1/2 cm (D) 5/9 cm
23. An open organ pipe of length l is sounded together

with another organ pipe of length l + x in their Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound
& light)
fundamental tones (x << l). The beat frequency heard
will be (speed of sound is v) :
28. The number of beats heard per second if there are
vx vl 2 three sources of frequencies (n – 1), n and (n+ 1) of
(A) 2 (B)
4l 2x equal intensities sounded together is:
(A) 2 (B) 1
vx vx 2
(C) (D) (C) 4 (D) 3
2l 2 2l
Page 80
29. A tuning fork of frequency 280 Hz produces 10 beats 33. A detector is released from rest over a source of
per sec when sounded with a vibrating sonometer sound of frequency f0 = 103 Hz. The frequency
string. When the tension in the string increases slightly, observed by the detector at time t is plotted in the
it produces 11 beats per sec. The original frequency graph. The speed of sound in air is (g = 10 m/s2)
of the vibrating sonometer string is: f(Hz)
(A) 330 m/s
(A) 269 Hz (B) 291 Hz (B) 350 m/s 2000
(C) 270 Hz (D) 290 Hz (C) 300 m/s 1000
(D) 310 m/s 30 t(s)

30. The speed of sound in a gas, in which two waves
of wavelength 1.0 m and 1.02 m produce 6 beats
34. An observer starts moving with uniform acceleration
per second, is approximately :
‘a’ towards a stationary sound source of frequency
(A) 350 m/s (B) 300 m/s f. As the observer approaches the source, the
(C) 380 m/s (D) 410 m/s apparent frequency f’ heard by the observer varies
with time t as:
31. Consider two sound sources S1 and S2 having same
f f
frequency 100Hz and the observer O located
between them as shown in the fig. All the three are (A) (B)
moving with same velocity in same direction. The t t
beat frequency of the observer is
–1
f
–1
S1 30ms O 30ms S2 30ms–1 f'
(C) (D)
(A) 50 Hz (B) 5 Hz t
t
(C) zero (D) 2.5 Hz
32. A source S of frequency f0 and an observer O, 35. A source of sound S having frequency f. Wind is
moving with speeds v1 and v2 respectively, are blowing from source to observer O with velocity u.
moving away from each other. When they are If speed of sound with respect to air is C, the
separated by distance a (t = 0), a pulse is emitted by wavelength of sound detected by O is :
the source. This pulse is received by O at time t1
Cu C–u
then t1, is equal to (A) (B)
f f
a a
(A) v  v (B) v  v C(C  u) C
s 2 1 s (C) (D)
(C – u)f f
a a
(C) v  v (D) v  v  v
s 2 1 2 s
Page 81
1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. D
6. B 7. A 8. C 9. A 10. D
11. D 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. A
16. B 17. D 18. B 19. B 20. A
21. D 22. B 23. C 24. D 25. B
26. B 27. B 28. B 29. D 30. B
31. C 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. A
1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. C 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. B
11. C 12. C 13. C 14. A 15. B
16. D 17. D 18. D 19. C 20. B
21. A
1. A,B 2. C 3. A 4. A,D 5. C
6. A,B,D 7. B,C 8. A,B,C 9. A,B,D 10. B
11. A 12. B 13. C,D 14. B,D
 2
1. (a) (b) 2. (a) 1.7 × 10–5 (b) 1.08 × 10–4
2 35
3. 333 m/s 4. 30 dB, 10 10 mm
5. (a) p (b) I  ( I A – IB ) 2  (25 / 312 ) 2 6. 83 Hz 7. 420 Hz
8. /8 9. 20, 80 cm, 200 Hz 10. 1:1 11. 3 cm

12. 33 cm and 13.2 cm 13. 2.5 ms–1 14. 345, 341 or 349 Hz
15. (i) (V – Vw + Vs) / f (ii) (V + Vw – Vs) / f (iii) (V–Vw–VD) / fr ; where fr=(V+Vw+VD/v + Vw – Vs) f
(iv) (V – Vw – Vo/V – Vw – VD) fr
Page 82
Section A - Calorimetry Basic Question, 4. A solid material is supplied with heat at a constant
Calorimetry Mixing problems, rate. The temperature of material is changing with
Calorimetry Energy problems, heat input as shown in the figure. What does slope
Power problems DE represent.
1. In a kitchen experiment, you empty a tray of ice y

cubes into a bowl of water. After an hour or so,
when the mixture has come to thermal equilibrium,
Temperature
E
you notice a little more water in the bowl than you
C D
started with and fewer ice cubes in the bowl than
you started with. One can say that – A B
O Heat Input x
(A) latent heat of liquid

(B) latent heat of vapour
(A) the temperature of the water is slightly higher
(C) heat capacity of vapour
than the remaining ice cubes
(D) inverse of heat capacity of vapour
(B) the temperature of the water is slightly lower
than the remaining ice cubes
(C) the temperature of the water is the same as the 5. The graph shown in the figure represent change in
temperature of the remaining ice cubes the temperature of 5 kg of a substance as it abosrbs
heat at a constant rate of 42 kJ min–1. The latent
(D) the temperature of the water or the ice cubes
heat of vapourization of the substance is :
depends on the exact mass of water and ice cubes
in the bowl.
2. When vapour condenses into liquid -

Temp (°C)
(A) It absorbs heat

(B) It liberates heat
(C) Its temperature increases
(D) Its temperature decreases
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
time(min)
3. The specific heat of a metal at low temperatures
varies according to S = aT3 where a is a constant (A) 630 kJ kg–1 (B) 126 kJ kg–1
and T is absolute temperature. The heat energy (C) 84 kJ kg–1 (D) 12.6 kJ kg–1
needed to raise unit mass of the metal from T = 1 K
to T = 2 K is 6. 10 gm of ice at 0°C is kept in a calorimeter of water
15a equivalent 10 gm. How much heat should be supplied
(A) 3a (B) to the apparatus to evaporate the water thus formed?
4
(Neglect loss of heat)
2a 12a (A) 6200 cal (B) 7200 cal
(C) (D)
3 5 (C) 13600 cal (D) 8200 cal
Page 83
Heat-1 1.19
7. Heat is being supplied at a constant rate to a sphere of 12. Two rods A and B of different materials but same cross
ice which is melting at the rate of 0.1 gm/sec. It melts section are joined as in figure. The free end of A is
maintained at 100°C and the free end of B is maintained
completely in 100 sec. The rate of rise of temperature
at 0°C. If l2 = 2l1, K1 = 2K2 and rods are thermally
thereafter will be (Assume no loss of heat) insulated from sides to prevent heat losses then the
(A) 0.8 °C/sec (B) 5.4 °C/sec temperature  of the junction of the two rods is
(C) 3.6 °C/sec (D) will change with time l1 l2
8. A 2100 W continuous flow geyser (instant geyser) A B

has water inlet temperature = 10°C while the water 100°C K  K2 0°C
1
flows out at the rate of 20 g/sec. The outlet (A) 80°C (B) 60°C
temperature of water must be about (C) 40°C (D) 20°C
(A) 20°C (B) 30°C
13. The ends of a metal bar of constant cross-sectional
(C) 35°C (D) 40°C area are maintained at temperatures T1 and T2 which
are both higher than the temperature of the
9. A continuous flow water heater (geyser) has an surroundings. If the bar is unlagged, which one of
the following sketches best represents the variation
electrical power rating = 2 k W and efficienty of
of temperature with distance along the bar?
conversion of electrical power into heat = 80%. If
T1 T1
water is flowing through the device at the rate of
100 cc/sec, and the inlet temperature is 10 °C, the T2 T2
(A) (B)
oulet temperature will be
O Distance O Distance
(A) 12.2 °C (B) 13.8 °C
(C) 20 °C (D) 16.5 °C T1 T1
T2 T2
(C) (D)
10. Ice at 0°C is added to 200 g of water initially at
O Distance O Distance
70°C in a vacuum flask. When 50 g of ice has been
added and has all melted the temperature of the flask 14. The wall with a cavity consists of two layers of
and contents is 40°C. When a further 80 g of ice brick separated by a layer of air. All three layers
has been added and has all metled, the temperature have the same thickness and the thermal conductivity
of the whole is 10°C. Calculate the specific latent of the brick is much greater than that of air. The left
layer is at a higher temperature than the right layer
heat of fusion of ice. [Take Sw = 1 cal/gm °C]
and steady state condition exists. Which of the
(A) 3.8 × 105 J/kg (B) 1.2 × 105 J/kg following graphs predicts correctly the variation of
(C) 2.4 × 105 J/kg (D) 3.0 × 105 J/kg temperature T with distance d inside the cavity ?
T T
Section B - Conduction problems, Slab
questions for conduction,
(A) (B)
Variable K. problem
x x
O d O d
11. Four rods of same material with different radii r and
length l are used to connect two reservoirs of heat T T
at different temperatures. Which one will conduct
most heat ? (C) (D)
(A) r = 2cm, l =0.5m (B) r=2cm, l =2m O d
x
O d
x
(C) r=0.5cm, l =0.5m (D) r =1cm, l = 1 m
Page 84
15. A rod of length L and uniform cross-sectional area

0°C
has varying thermal conductivity which changes
100°C
linearly from 2K at end A to K at the other end B. 100°C
0°C
The ends A and B of the rod are maintained at
constant temperature 100°C and 0°C, respectively.
(a)
At steady state, the graph of temperature : T = T(x) (b)
where x = distance from end A will be (A) 0.75 min (B) 0.5 min
T T (C) 1.5 min (D) 1 min
100°C 100°C
(A) (B) 19. A wall consists of alternating blocks with length ‘d’
x x
L L and coefficint of thermal conductivity k1 and k2.
The cross sectional area of the blocks are the same.
T T
The equivalent coefficient of thermal conductivity
100°C 100°C
of the wall between left and right is
(C) (D)
x x
(A) K1 + K2
L L
(K1  K 2 )
(B)
2 d
16. A wall has two layers A and B, each made of different k1
K 1K 2 k2
material. Both the layers have the same thickness. k1
(C) K  K
The thermal conductivity for A is twice that of B. 1 2 k2
k1
Under steady state, the temperature difference across k2
2 K1K 2
the whole wall is 36°C. Then the temperature (D) K  K
difference across the layer A is 1 2
(A) 6°C (B) 12°C

(C) 18°C (D) 24°C 20. A cylinder of radius R made of a material of thermal
conductivity k1 is surrounded by a cylindrical shell
of inner radius R and outer radius 2R made of a
17. Two metal cubes with 3 cm-edges of copper and
material of thermal conductivity k2. The two ends
aluminium are arranged as shown in figure. (KCU =
of the combined system are maintained at different
385 W/m-K, KAL = 209 W/m-K)
temperatures. There is no loss of heat from the
The total thermal current from one reservoir to the cylindrical surface and the system is in steady state.
other is : The effective thermal conductivity of the system is
(A) 1.43 × 103 W Al
20°C
k1k 2
(B) 2.53 × 103 W 100°C Cu (A) k1 + k2 (B) k  k
1 2
(C) 1.53 × 104 W
1 1
(D) 2.53 × 104 W (C) (k1  3k 2 ) (D) (3k  k 2 )
4 4
18. Two identical square rods of metal are welded end

to end as shown in figure (a). Assume that 10 cal of Section C - Radiation problem
heat flows through the rods in 2 min. Now the rods
are welded as shown in figure. (b) The time it would 21. From a black body, radiation is not :
take for 10 cal to flow through the rods now, is : - (A) emitted (B) absorbed
(C) reflected (D) None of these
Page 85
Heat-1 1.21
22. In accordance with Kirchhoff’s law. Which of the 28. Transfer of heat in friction is by –
following is incorrect :
(A) Convection (B) Conduction
(A) bad absorber is bad emitter
(B) bad absorber is good reflector (C) Radiation (D) None of the above
(C) bad reflector is good emitter
(D) bad emitter is good absorber
29. Which of the following surface will emit least heat
radiation –
23. The energy radiated by a body does not depends on
(A) area of body (A) White (bright) (B) White and rough
(B) nature of surface (C) Polished black (D) Black and rough
(C) mass of body
(D) temperature of body
30. Emissive power of any surface (e), Absorptive power
24. A polished metallic piece and a black painted (a), Reflecting power (r) and transmission power (t)
wooden piece are kept in open in bright sun for a are related as –
long time :
(A) a + e + t = 1 (B) a + r + t = 1
(A) the wooden piece will absorbs less heat than
the metallic piece (C) r + e + t = 1 (D) r + e + a = 1
(B) the wooden piece will have a lower temperature
than the metallic piece
Section D, E, F - Stefan's Law, Newton's Law
(C) if touched, the metallic piece will feel hotter
of cooling, Wein's displacement
than the wooden piece
law
(D) when the two pieces are removed from the
open to a cold room, the wooden piece will lose
31. A black metal foil is warmed by radiation from a
heat at a lower rate than the metallic piece
small sphere at temperature ‘T’ and at a distance
‘d’. It is found that the power received by the foil is
25. Nature of thermal radiations is similar to the nature
P. If both the temperature and distance are doubled,
of -
the power received by the foil will be :
(A) electro magnetic waves
(B) gravity waves (A) 16 P (B) 4P
(C)  rays (C) 2 P (D) P
(D) sound waves
26. Heat radiation exhibit the phenomenon of 32. Two bodies P and Q have thermal emissivities of p
polarization which means that the radiation is in the and Q respectively. Surface areas of these bodies
form of - are same and the total radiant power is also emitted
(A) Electromagnetic waves which are longitudinal. at the same rate. If temperature of P is P kelvin
(B) Electromagnetic waves which are transverse. then temperature of Q i.e. Q is
(C) Of ray of longitudinal photons.
(D) Of ray of transverse photon. 1/ 4 1/ 4
 Q   P 
(A)   P (B)   P
 P   Q 
27. Following is not a property of radiation –
(A) It travels with velocity of light
1/ 4 4
(B) Medium is necessary for propagation  Q  1  Q 
(C)    (D)   P
(C) Its nature is electromagnetic  P  P  P 
(D) It has quantum nature
Page 86
33. The rate of emission of radiation of a black body at 37. The rate of cooling of a body by radiation depends
273ºC is E, then the rate of emission of radiation of on :
this body at 0ºC will be (A) area of body (B) mass of body
E E (C) specific heat of body (D) All of these

(A) (B)
16 4
38. Two metallic sphere A and B are made of same
E material and have got identical surface finish. The
(C) (D) 0
8 mass of sphere A is four times that of B. Both the
spheres are heated to the same temperature and
34. The power radiated by a black body is P and it placed in a room having lower temperature but
radiates maximum energy around the wavelength thermally insulated from each other.
0. If the temperature of the black body is now (A) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 24/3
changed so that it radiates maximum energy around (B) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 22/3
wavelength 3/40, the power radiated by it will (C) The ratio of the initial rate of cooling of A to
increase by a factor of that of B is 2–1/3
(A) 4/3 (B) 16/9 (D) The ratio of the initial rate of cooling of A to
(C) 64/27 (D) 256/81 that of B is 2–4/3
35. Spheres P and Q are uniformly constructed from 39. Star S1 emits maximum radiation of wavelength 420
the same material which is a good conductor of heat nm and the star S2 emits maximum radiation of
and the radius of Q is thrice the radius of P. The wavelength 560 nm, what is the ratio of the
rate of fall of temperature of P is x times that of Q temperature of S1 and S2 :
when both are at the same surface temperature. The (A) 4/3 (B) (4/3)1/4
value of x is :
(C) 3/4 (D) (3/4)1/2
(A) 1/4 (B) 1/3
(C) 3 (D) 4
40. The intensity of radiation emitted by the Sun has its
maximum value at a wavelength of 510 nm and that
36. A hollow and a solid sphere of same material and emitted by the North Star has the maximum value
identical outer surface are heated to the same at 350 nm. If these stars behave like black bodies
temperature : then the ratio of the surface temperature of the Sun
(A) in the beginning both will emit equal amount of and the North Star is
radiation per unit time. (A) 1.46 (B) 0.69
(B) in the beginning both will absorb unequal amount (C) 1.21 (D) 0.83
of radiation per unit time
(C) both spheres will have same rate of fall of
temperature (dT/dt)
(D) both spheres will have equal temperatures at
any moment.
Page 87
Heat-1 1.37
1. C 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. C
6. D 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. A
11. A 12. A 13. C 14. D 15. B
16. B 17. A 18. B 19. B 20. C
21. C 22. D 23. C 24. C 25. A
26. B 27. B 28. B 29. A 30. B
31. B 32. B 33. A 34. D 35. C
36. A 37. D 38. A 39. A 40. B

1. A 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C
6. C 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. A
11. A 12. A 13. D 14. C 15. D
16. B 17. C 18. A 19. B 20. C
21. D 22. B 23. C 24. B

1. B,D 2. A,C,D 3. C,D 4. B,C 5. A,B
6. A,B 7. A,B 8. A,C,D 9. A, B 10. A, B
11. A,B,C 12. A,C,D 13. A,C,D 14. A,C 15. A,B,C,D
16. B,C
Exercise - 3 (Level-I) Subjective | JEE Advanced
315
1. 8.6 × 10–3 °C 2.  =  C = 28.66°C 3. LB > LA = LC
11
4. H = 590 Kcal. 5. 136 km 6. S A = SB > SC > SD 7. 64 J
t1  t 2  t 3
8. 5 × 10–5 g/s 9. 4.0 W 10. 11. 65°C
t1 t 2 t
  3
k1 k 2 k 3
12. 5°C 13. ( 6 / )1/ 3 14. 8000 kJ 15. 10 min 16. 250W
17. 1700 K 18. 0.3 19. 10 sec 20. 3025 K
Page 88
Heat-2 2.31

Section A - KTG Pressure of Ideal Gas Section B - Barometer, Gas laws
1. A vessel is filled with a gas at a pressure of 76 cm 7. The temperature at which the r.m.s velocity of
of mercury at a certain temperature. The mass of oxygen molecules equal that of nitrogen molecules
the gas is increased by 50 % by introducing more at 100°C is nearly :
gas in the vessel at the same temperature. The (A) 426.3 K (B) 456.3 K
resultant pressure, in cm of Hg, is - (C) 436.3 K (D) 446.3 K
(A) 76 (B) 152
(C) 114 (D) 1117 8. The rms speed of oxygen molecules in a gas is . If
the temperature is doubled and the O2 molecule
2. A Hydrogen gas sample is contained in a cubical dissociated into oxygen atoms, the rms speed will
vessel of side 2m. A molecule of gas strike the wall become
of vessel at rate of 1000 collisions/sec. Sample (A) (B)  2
contains 0.2 gm of Hydrogen. Number of molecules (C) 2 (D) 4
striking a wall per second is –
(A) 5 × 1024 (B) 2 × 1025 9. Three closed vessels A, B and C are at the same
(C) 2 × 10 26 (D) 5 × 1026 temperature T and contain gases which obey the
Maxwellian distribution of velcoities. Vessel A
3. The pressure P of an ideal gas and its kinetic energy contains only O2, B only N2 and C a mixture of
E per unit volume are related as –
equal quantities of O2 and N2. If the average speed
1 of O2 molecules in vessel A is V1, that of the N2
(A) P = E (B) P = E
2 molecules in vessel B is V2, the average speed of
3 2 the O2 molecules in vessel C will be :
(C) P = E (D) P = E (A) (V1 + V2) / 2 (B) V1
5 3
(C) (V1V2)1/2 (D) 3kT / M
4. At 0°C, the value of the density of a fixed mass of
an ideal gas divided by its pressure is x. At 100°C, 10. N(< 100) molecules of a gas have velocities 1,2,3.....
this quotient is - N/km/s respectively. Then
100 273 (A) rms speed and average speed of molecules is same.
(A) x (B) x (B) ratio of rms speed to average speed is
273 100
(2N + 1) (N + 1) / 6N
273 373 (C) ratio of rms speed to average speed is
(C) x (D) x
373 273
(2N + 1) (N + 1) / 6 N
(D) ratio of rms speed to average speed of a
5. An ideal gas at 17ºC has a pressure of 760 mm of molecules is 2/ 6 x (2N + 1)/(N + 1)
Hg. The gas is compressed at constant temperature
until its volume becomes halved. The final pressure 11. In a cubical box of volume V, there are N molecules of
of the gas will be – a gas moving randomly. If m is mass of each molecule
(A) 2010 mm of Hg (B) 1890 mm of Hg and v2 is the mean square of x component of the velocity
(C) 1520 mm of Hg (D) 1650 mm of Hg of molecules, then the pressure of the gas is –
6. The number of molecules in 1 cm3 of an ideal gas at 1 mNv 2 mNv 2

(A) P = (B) P =
0ºC and at a pressure of 10–5 mm of mercury is – 3 V V
(A) 2.7 × 1011 (B) 3.5 × 1011
1
(C) 6.0 × 1023 (D) 6 × 1012 (C) P = mNv2 (D) P = mNv2
3
Page 89
12. Gas exerts pressure on the walls of the container 18. If the rms speed of the nitrogen molecules of the
because the molecules are – gas at room temperature is 500 m/s, then the rms
(A) Colliding with each other and exchanging speed of the hydrogen molecules at the same
momenta. temperature will be –
(B) Colliding with the walls of the container and (A) 1870 m/s (B) 1935 m/s
transferring energy to the walls. (C) 7000 m/s (D) 83.7 m/s
(C) Colliding with the walls and transferring
momentum to the walls of the container. Section D - First law of thermodynamics
(D) Accelerated towards the walls. 19. When unit mass of water boils to become steam at
100°C, it absorbs Q amount of heat. The densities
Section C - Degree of freedom, Internal of water and steam at 100°C are 1 and 2
energy + Speeds + Mean Free Path respectively and the atmospheric pressure is p0. The
increase in internal energy of the water is
13. Degree of freedom of hydrogen and ozone gases
will be respectively – 1 1 
(A) 3 and 5 (B) 5 and 6 (A) Q (B) Q + p0   –  
 1 2 
(C) 6 and 5 (D) 5 and 3
 1 1 1 1 
(C) Q + p0   –   (D) Q – p0     
14. A vessel contains a mixture of one mole of oxygen  2 1   1 2 
and two moles of nitrogen at 300 K. The ratio of
the average rotational kinetic energy per O 2
molecule to that per N2 molecule is : 20. 1 kg of a gas does 20 kJ of work and receives 16 kJ
of heat when it is expanded between two states. A
(A) 1 : 1
second kind of expansion can be found between
(B) 1 : 2
the initial and final state which requires a heat input
(C) 2 : 1
of 9 kJ. The work done by the gas in the second
(D) depends on the moments of inertia of the two expansion is :
molecules (A) 32 kJ (B) 5 kJ
(C) – 4 kJ (D) 13 kJ
15. The average momentum of a molecules in a sample
of an ideal gas depends on 21. An ideal system can be brought from stage A to B
(A) temperature (B) number of moles through four paths as shown in the figure. The heat
(C) volume (D) none of these energy given to the system is minimum in :
A C
16. If velocities of 5 molecules of certain gas are –7, 5, P
4, –3 and 1 m/sec respectively then mean speed of E D
molecules is (m/sec) - F B
O V
(A) Zero (B) 20
(A) path ACB (B) path ADB
(C) 4 (D) 20 (C) path AEB (D) path AFB
17. The molecular weight of O2 and H2 are 32 and 2 22. A system is given 400 calories of heat and 1000
respectively. Then the ratio of the rms velocities of Joule of work is done by the system, then the change
H2 and oxygen is at same temperature- in internal energy of the system will be -
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 3 (A) 680 Joule (B) 680 erg
(C) 1 : 4 (D) 16 : 1 (C) 860 Joule (D) – 860 Joule
Page 90
Heat-2 2.33
23. For a thermodynamic process Q = – 50 calorie 27. In the above question, if the work done on the system
and W = – 20 calorie. If the initial internal energy is along the curved path ‘ba’ is 52J, heat absorbed is
– 30 calorie then final internal energy will be - (A) – 140 J (B) – 172 J
(A) 191.20 Calorie (B) – 60 Calorie (C) 140 J (D) 172 J
(C) 100 Calorie (D) – 100 Calorie
28. In above question, if Ua = 40 J, value of Ub will be
Section E - Processes + Work done (A) –50 J (B) 100 J
(C) –120 J (D) 160 J
24. One mole of an ideal gas at temperature T1 expends
P Section F - Specific Heat (Cp & Cv)
according to the law  a (constant). The work
V2
29. A diatomic gas of moleculer weight 30 gm/mole is
done by the gas till temperature of gas becomes T2 is
filled in a container at 27°C. It is moving at a velocity
1 1 100 m/s. If it is suddenly stopped, the rise in
(A) R(T2 – T1) (B) R(T2 – T1 )
2 3 temperature of gas is :
600
1 1 (A) 60/R (B)
(C) R(T2 – T1 ) (D) R(T2 – T1 ) R
4 5
6  104 6  105
(C) (D)
25. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas is taken through R R
the cycle as shown in the figure.
30. An ideal gas undergoes the process 1  2 as shown in
P
2(V0,4P0) the figure, the heat supplied and work done in the process
is Q and W respectively. The ratio Q : W is
3(4V0, P0) V
1(V0, P0)
2
V
1  2 : isochoric process 1
2  3 : straight line on P - V diagram T

3  1 : isobaric process (A) : – 1 (B)
The average of molecular speed of the gas in the (C) – 1 (D) – 1/
states 1, 2 and 3 are in the ratio
(A) 1 : 2 : 2 (B) 1 : 2 : 2 31. If heat is added at constant volume, 6300 J of heat are
(C) 1 : 1 : 1 (D) 1 : 2 : 4 required to raise the temperature of an ideal gas by
150 K. If instead, heat is added at constant pressure,
26. When a system is taken from state ‘a’ to state ‘b’ 8800 joules are required for the same temperature
along the path ‘acb’, it is found that a quantity of change. When the temperature of the gas changes by
heat Q = 200 J is absorbed by the system and a 300K, the internal energy of the gas changes by
work W = 80 J is done by it. Along the path ‘adb’, (A) 5000 J (B) 12600 J
Q = 144J. The work done along the path ‘adb’ is (C) 17600 J (D) 22600 J
P
c b 32. A reversible adiabatic path on a P-V diagram for an
ideal gas passes through state A where
a d P = 0.7 × 105 N/m–2 and v = 0.0049 m3. The ratio of
V specific heat of the gas is 1.4. The slope of path at A is
(A) 6J (B) 12J (A) 2.0 × 107 Nm–5 (B) 1.0 × 107 Nm–5
(C) 18 J (D) 24 J (C) –2.0 × 10 Nm7 –5 (D) –1.0 × 107 Nm–5
Page 91
Section G - Graphs 38. A cylindrical tube of cross-sectional area A has two

air tight frictionless pistons at its two ends. The
33. Four curves A, B, C and D are drawn in the figure
pistons are tied with a straight two ends. The pistons
for a given amount of a gas. The curves representing
are tied with a straight piece of metallic wire. The
adiabatic and isothermal process are
tube contains a gas at atmospheric pressure P0 and
(A) C and D respectively
temperature T0. If temperature of the gas is doubled
(B) D and C respectively B C
then the tension inthe wire is -
(C) A and B respectively P A D
(D) B and A respectively V
A A
34. In reference of above figure, no heat exchange
between the gas and the surrounding will take place
if the gas is taken along -
(A) 4 P0A (B) P0A/2
(A) curve A (B) curve B
(C) curve C (D) curve D (C) P0A (D) 2P0A
35. During the adiabatic change of ideal gas, the relation 39. A carnot engine works between ice point and steam
between the pressure and the density will be - point. It is desired to increase efficiency by 20%,
by changing temperature of sink to –
P1 d2FG IJ 1/
(A) 253 K (B) 293 K
(A) P = d
2 1H K (B) P1d 1 = P2d2
(C) 303 K (D) 243 K
P1 FG d IJ
1
1/
(C) P1d1– = P2d2– (D) P =

2 Hd K
2
40 A cylindrical tube of uniform cross-sectional area
A is fitted with two air tight frictionless pistons. The
pistons are connected to each other by a metallic
36. The pressure of the gas filled in thermally insulated wire. Initially the pressure of the gas is P0 and
container is P and temperature is T. If the ratio of temperature is T0. Atmospheric pressure is also P0.
specific heats of the gas is , which of the following Now the temperature of the gas is increased to 2T0,
will be constant - the tension in the wire will be –
(A) PT –1 (B) P T1 –
(C) P 1 – T (D) P– T –1 wire
Section H - Piston Problems, Efficiency + II Law

of Thermodynamics + Entropy (A) 2P0A (B) P0A
P0 A
37. A thermodynamic cycle takes in heat energy at a (C) (D) 4P0A
2
high temperature and rejects energy at a lower
temperature. If the amount of energy rejected at
the low temperature is 3 times the amount of work
done by the cycle, the efficiency of the cycle is
(A) 0.25 (B) 0.33
(C) 0.67 (D) 0.9
Page 92
Heat-2 2.57

1. C 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. C
6. B 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. D
11. B 12. C 13. A 14. A 15. D
16. C 17. A 18. A 19. B 20. D
21. D 22. A 23. B 24. B 25. A
26. D 27. B 28. D 29. A 30. A
31. B 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. C
36. C 37. A 38. C 39. A 40. B

1. D 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. A
6. D 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. D
11. A 12. D 13. A 14. A 15. A
16. A 17. C 18. B 19. B 20. C
21. C 22. B 23. D 24. B

1. A,B 2. A,B 3. A,B,C,D 4. B,D 5. A,C
6. A,B 7. B 8. B,D 9. A,B 10. A,D
11. A,B,D 12. C 13. C 14. A,B 15. A,C
Mg(n  1)
1.  2. 2P 3. 7h 4. 2/3
nR
20012 . 428
5. 1. 28.7236 × 103 sec. 6.  10  25 kg  m / s 7. 1:2

7
8. 4 atmosphere 9. 14 10. 50 calorie 11.
5
3 –2  24
12. Monoatomic 13. RT  – 1  14. 15. T1 > T2
  5
16. P/n 17. 120 R 18. 1500 J 19. 3R
3
20. PROOF 21. – 22. 0 23. 1.25 × 104 N/m2
2
Wr
24. (i) QT = WT in cyclic process (ii)   100
Q (only the)
25. 1600 J
Page 93

Section A - Stress & types, Strain & types + (A) A is brittle but B ductile
Types of Modulus + Energy (B) A is ductile and B brittle
Problems + Graphs (C) Both A and B are ductile
1. For the following statement : (D) Both A and B are brittle
(a) Glass is more elastic than rubber
(b) Rubber is more elastic than glass 6. The potential energy U between two molecules as
(c) Steel is more elastic than rubber a function of the distance X between them has been
(d) Rubber is more elastic than steel shown in the figure. The two molecules are
(A) (a) and (b) are correct U
(B) (a) and (c) are correct
(C) (b) and (c) are correct
(D) (b) and (d) are correct
O x
2. Two smilar balls, one of which is made of ivory
while the other of clay, are dropped from the same
hight, then –
(A) the ivory ball will bounce to greater height A B C
(B) the clay ball will bounce to a greater height (A) Attracted when x lies between A and B and
(C) both the balls will bounce to the same height are repelled when x lies between B and C
(D) the ivory ball will not at all bounce
(B) Attracted when x lies between B and C and
are repelled when x lies between A and B
3. On stretching some substances, permanent
(C) Attracted when they reach B
elongation is caused, because– (D) Repelled when they reach B
(A) they are perfectly elastic
(B) they are perfectly plastic
Section B - Thermal Stress, Hooke's Law
(C) more stress acts on them
(D) their strain in infinite 7. A metal wire is clamped between two vertical walls.
At 20°C the unstrained length of the wire is exactly
4. Select the correst statement on the basis of the given equal to the separation between walls. If the tem-
graph : perature of the wire is decreased the graph between
elastic energy density (u) and temperature (T) of
breaking
point
the wire is
u u
Stress
(A) T (in °C)

(B) T (in °C)
Strain
20 20
(A) Young's modulus of A is greater but it is less ductile u u
(B) Young's modulus ofA is greater and it is more ductile
(C) Young's modulus of A is less and it it less ductile
(D) Young's modulus of a is less but it is more ductile (C) (D)
T (in °C) T (in °C)
5. The diagram shows stress v/s strain curve for the 20 20
material A and B from the curve we infer that
8. The bulk modulus of copper is 1.4 × 1011 Pa and
A the coefficient of linear expansion is 1.7 × 10–5 (C°)–
1
. What hydrostatic pressure is necessary to prevent
Stress
B
a copper block from expanding when its temperature
is increased from 20°C to 30°C ?
(A) 6.0 × 105 Pa (B) 7.1 × 107 Pa
6
(C) 5.2 × 10 Pa (D) 40 atm
Strain
Page 94
Elasticity and Thermal Expansion 3.13
9. Which of the following are correct? 16. One end of a long metallic wire of length L is tied to
(A) The shear modulus of a liquid infinite. the ceiling. The other end is tied to a massless spring
(B) Bulk modulus of a perfectly rigid body is infinite. of spring constant k. A mass m hangs freely from the
(C) According to Hook's law, the ratio of stress and free end of the spring. The area of cross-section and
strain remains constant. the Young modulus of the wire are A and Y respec-
(D) All of these tively. If the mass is slightly pulled down and released,
it will oscillate with a time period T equal to -
10. A metal wire of length l and area of cross-section A (A) 2 n / K
is fixed between rigid supports at negligible tension.
If this is cooled, the tension in the wire will be - (B) 2 m(YA  kL) / YAk
(A) Proportional to l (B) inversely proportional to l
(C) independent of l (D) independent of A (C) 2 mYA / kL
(D) 2 mL / YA
11. Two metal rods of the same length and area of cross-
section are fixed end to end between rigid supports.
The materials of the rods have Young modulii Y1 Section D - Thermal Expansion (Solid ,
and Y2, and coefficients of linear expansion 1 and Liquids & Gas) & types,
Applications (Ex Bimetallic strip
2. The junction between the rods does not shift if
etc)
the rods are cooled.
(A) Y11 = Y22 (B) Y12 = Y21 17. A steel tape gives correct measurement at 20°C. A
(C) Y112 = Y222 (D) Y121 = Y222 piece of wood is being measured with the steel tape
at 0°C. The reading is 25 cm on the tape, the real
12. Three rods of equal length are joined to form an length of the given piece of wood must be :
equilateral triangle ABC. D is the midpoint of AB. (A) 25 cm (B) < 25 cm
The coefficient of linear expansion is 1 for AB, (C) >25 cm (D) can not say
and 2 for AC and BC. If the distance DC remains
constant for small changes in temperature, 18. A rod of length 20 cm is made of metal. It expands
(A) 1 = 2 A D B by 0.075 cm when its temperature is raised from
(B) 1 = 22 0°C to 100°C. Another rod of a different metal B
(C) 1 = 42 having the same length expands by 0.045 cm for
the same change in temperature, a third rod of the
1 same length is composed of two parts one of metal
(D) 1 = 
2 2 A and the other of metal B. Thus rod expand by
C 0.06 cm for the same change in temperature. The
Section C - Young's Modulus, Poission's portion made of metal A has the length.
Ratio (A) 20 cm (B) 10 cm
13. A steel wire is stretched by 1 kg. wt. If the radius of (C) 15 cm (D) 18 cm
the wire is doubled, its Young's modulus will –
(A) remain unchanged (B) become half 19. A steel scale is to be prepared such that the millimeter
(C) become double (D) become for times intervals are to be accurate within 6 × 10–5 mm.
The maximum temperature variation from the
14. If a metal wire is stretched a little beyond its elastic temperature of calibration during the reading of the
limit (or yield) point), and released, it will millimeter marks is ( = 12 × 10–6 k–1)
(A) lose its elastic property completely (A) 4.0ºC (B) 4.5ºC
(B) not contract (C) 5.0ºC (D) 5.5ºC
(C) contract, but its final length will be greater than
its initial length 20. If I is the moment of inertia of a solid body having
(D) contract only up to its length at the elastic limit -coefficient of linear expansion then the change in
I corresponding to a small change in temperature
15. A metal wire of length L, area of cross-section A T is
and Young modulus Y behaves as a spring of spring 1
(A)  I T (B)  I T
constant k. 2
(A) k = YA/L (B) k = 2YA/L (C) 2  I T (D) 3  I T
(C) k = YA/2L (D) k = YL/A
Page 95

1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. B
6. B 7. B 8. B 9. D 10. C
11. A 12. C 13. A 14. C 15. A
16. B 17. B 18. B 19. C 20. C

1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. A
6. A 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. B

1. A,B 2. A, D 3. A,C,D 4. B, C 5. A, C
6. A,B,C 7. A,D 8. A,C,D 9. A, C, D 10. A, C, D

(l1T2  l2 T1 )
1. 0 2. 12 × 107 N/m2 3. 4. 7200
T2  T1
3K 2
5. 6. 7. W 8. 0 9. 2
2 1
10. 0.375 × 105 N 11. 5.28 × 108 Pa 12. 2
13. 10000 N 14. 5/3

1. 4 cm 2. 1:2 3. 9 × 107 N/m2
m g2  d2 m  g2  a2 l
4. 3.8 × 102 N 5. a. b.
r2 r  2
l1 1 F2l
6. 0.076 cm 7. 8.
2 2 6AY
 1  3 s  
9. (a) V0d0g  1     (b) (i) L < 3s (ii) L > 3s (iii) L = 3s. 10. 4.90 × 10–6 m
 L 
11. (i) hollow sphere > solid sphere,
(ii) hollow sphere = solid sphere 12. 100

1. D 2. D 3. B 4. A 5. D
6. C 7. A 8. D 9. D 10. C
11. C 12. D 13. B 14. B 15. B
16. C

1. A 2. l = 2s 3. (a) 50°C (b) 0.05 J (c) 19999.95 J
4. 4 5. D 6. 3 7. C 8. AB
9. A 10. 3.00
Page 96
Fluid 4.19
Section A - Pressure & its variation, 5. A light semi cylindrical gate of radius R is piovted at
Manometer, Pascal's law its mid point O, of the diameter as shown in the
figure holding liquid of density . The force F re-
1. A bucket contains water filled upto a height = 15 cm. quired to prevent the rotation of the gate is equal to
The bucket is tied to a rope which is passed over a
(A) 2R3g
frictionless light pulley and the other end of the rope (B) 2gR3l
is tied to a weight of mass which is half of that of the O
2
(bucket + water). The water pressure above 2R lρg
(C) R
atmosphere pressure at the bottom is : 3 F
(A) 0.5 kPa (B) 1 kPa (D) none of these
(C) 5 kPa (D) None
6. The pressure at the bottom of a tank of water is 3P
2. A uniformly tapering vessel shown in Fig. is
where P is the atmospheric pressure. If the water is
filled with liquid of density 900 kg/m3. The force
drawn out till the level of water is lowered by one
that acts on the base of the vessel due to liquid is
fifth., the pressure at the bottom of the tank will
(take g = 10 m/s2) -
now be
(A) 2P (B) (13/5) P
AREA = 10–3m2
(C) (8/5) P (D) (4/5) P
0.4 m
AREA = 2 × 10–3m2 7. An open-ended U-tube of uniform cross-sectional
area contains water (density 1.0 gram/centimeter3)
(A) 3.6 N (B) 7.2 N standing initially 20 centimeters from the bottom in
(C) 9.0 N (D) 12.6 N each arm. An immiscible liquid of density 4.0 grams/
centimeter3 is added to one arm until a layer 5 cen-
3. A liquid of mass 1 kg is filled in a flask as shown in timeters high forms, as shown in the figure above.
figure. The force exerted by the flask on the liquid is What is the ratio h2/h1 of the heights of the liquid in
(g = 10 m/s2) the two arms ?
[Neglect atmospheric pressure] (A) 3/1
5cm
(A) 10 N (B) 5/2
h2
(B) greater than 10 N (C) 2/1 h1
(C) less than 10 N (D) 3/2

(D) zero
8. The area of cross-section of the wider tube shown
4. A U-tube having horizontal arm of length 20 cm, in figure is 800 cm2. If a mass of 12 kg is placed on
has uniform cross-sectional area = 1 cm2. It is filled the massless piston, the difference in heights h in
with water of volume 60 cc. What volume of a liquid the level of water in the two tubes is :
of density 4 g/cc should be poured from one side
(A) 10 cm
into the U-tube so that no water is left in the 12kg
(B) 6 cm h
horizontal arm of the tube?
(C) 15 cm
(A) 60 cc (B) 45 cc
(D) 2 cm
(C) 50 cc (D) 35 cc
Page 97
Section B - Force on side wall, Archimedes 13. A piece of steel has a weight W in air, W1 when
Principle & Bouyancy completely immersed in water and W 2 when
completely immersed in an unknown liquid. The
relative density (specific gravity) of liquid is :
9. Two cubes of size 1.0 m sides, one of relative density
0.60 and another of relative density = 1.15 are W  W1 W  W2
(A) W  W (B) W  W
connected by weightless wire and placed in a large 2 1
tank of water. Under equilibrium the lighter cube

will project above the water surface to a height of W1  W2 W1  W2
(C) W  W (D) W  W
1 2
(A) 50 cm (B) 25 cm
(C) 10 cm (D) zero
14. A ball of relative density 0.8 falls into water from a
height of 2m. The depth to which the ball will sink
10. A cuboidal piece of wood has dimensions a, b and is (neglect viscous forces) :
c. Its relative density is d. It is floating in a larger (A) 8m (B) 2m
body of water such that side a is vertical. It is pushed (C) 6m (D) 4m
down a bit and released. The time period of SHM
executed by it is : 15. A cube of iron whose sides are of length L, is put
into mercury. The weight of iron cube is W. The
abc g density of iron is I, that of mercury is M. The
(A) 2π g
(B) 2
da depth to which the cube sinks is given by the
expression –
bc da (A) WL2I (B) WL2M
(C) 2 d g (D) 2 g
W W
(C) L2 (D) L2ρ g
I M
11. Two bodies having volumes V and 2V are suspended
from the two arms of a common balance and they
16. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to
are found to balance each other. If larger body is
have a large number of cavities. It weighs
immersed in oil (density d1 = 0.9 gm/cm3) and the
9.8 kg when weighed directly on a balance and 1.5
smaller body is immersed in an unknown liquid, then
kg less when immersed in water. The fraction by
the balance remain in equilibrium. The density of
volume of the cavities in the metal ball is
unknown liquid is given by :
approximately :
(A) 2.4 gm/cm3 (B) 1.8 gm/cm3 (A) 20% (B) 30%
(C) 0.45 gm/cm3 (D) 2.7 gm/cm3 (C) 16% (D) 11%
12. A boy carries a fish in one hand and a bucket (not 17. A sphere of radius R and made of material of relative
full) of water in the other hand. If the places the fish density  has a concentric cavity of radius r. It just
in the bucket, the weight now carried by him floats when placed in a tank full of water. The value
(assume that water does not spill) : of the ratio R/r will be
     1 
1/ 3 1/ 3
(A) is less than before
(A)   (B)  
(B) is more than before   1    
(C) is the same as before
  1   1 
1/ 3 1/ 3
(D) depends upon his speed (C)   (D)  

     1
Page 98
Fluid 4.21
18. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform 22. Two water pipes P and Q having diameters 2 × 10–2 m
of a spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A and 4×10–2 m, respectively, are joined in series with
stone of mass 0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m3 is the main supply line of water. The velocity of
immersed in water without touching the walls of water flowing in pipe P is
beaker. What will be the balance reading now ? (A) 4 times that of Q
(A) 2 kg (B) 2.5 kg (B) 2 times that of Q
(C) 1 kg (D) 3 kg (C) 1/2 times of that of Q
(D) 1/4 times that of Q
Section C - Equation of continuity +
accelerated fluid 23. A pipe ABCD of uniform cross-section is bent into
three sections, viz., a horizontal section AB, a vertical
19. A jet of water with cross section of 6 cm2 strikes a section BC with C below B, and a horizontal section
wall at an angle of 60º to the normal and rebounds CD. Liquid flowing through the pipe has speed v1
elastically from the wall without losing energy. If and pressure p1 in section AB, and speed v2 and
the velocity of the water in the jet is 12 m/s, the pressure p2 in section CD -
force acting on the wall is (A) v1 = v2, p1 = p2 (B) v1= v2, p2> p1
(A) 0.864 Nt (B) 86.4 Nt (C) v2 > v1, p2 > p1 (D) v2 > v1, p1 = p2
(C) 72 Nt (D) 7.2 Nt
24. A fluid container is containing a liquid of density  is
is accelerating upward with acceleration a along the
20. Water is flowing steadily through a horizontal tube
inclined place of inclination  as shwon. Then the
of non uniform cross-section. If the pressure of water
angle of inclination  of free surface is :
is 4 × 104 N/m2 at a point where cross-section is
0.02 m2 and velocity of flow is 2 m/s, what
a
is pressure at a point where cross-section reduces to
0.01 m2

(A) 1.4 × 104 N/m2 (B) 3.4 × 104 N/m2 
(C) 2.4 × 10–4 N/m2 (D) none of these


21. Statement - 1 : The free surface of a liquid at rest

with respect to stationary container is always  g 
(A) tan–1  
normal to the geff .  g cos  
Statement - 2 : Liquids at rest cannot have shear

–1  a  g sin  
stress. (B) tan  
 g cos  
(A) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1
–1  a – g sin  
(B) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is true and (C) tan  
 g(1  cos  ) 
statement - 2 is NOT the correct explanation for
statement - 1
–1  a – g sin  
(C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false. (D) tan  
 g(1 – cos  ) 
Page 99
25. Figure shows a three arm tube in which a liquid is

filled upto levels of height l. It is now rotated at an P P
angular frequency about an axis passing through (A) (B)

arm B. The angular frequency at which level of x x
liquid of arm B becomes zero.
P P
2g
(A)
3l (C) (D)
A B C x x
g
(B)
l
l l Section D,E - Bernoullis Equation, Toricelli's
Law, reynolds no.
3g
(C) l l
l 29. A tube is attached as shown in closed vessel
containing water. The velocity of water coming out
3g from a small hole is :
(D)
2l
26. Water is flowing in a horizontal pipe of

non-uniform cross - section. At the most contracted
20cm
place of the pipe –
(A) Velocity of water will be maximum and pressure
minimum
(A) 2 m/s (B) 2 m/s
(B) Pressure of water will be maximum and velocity
minimum (C) depends on pressure of air inside vessel
(C) Both pressure and velocity of water will be (D) None of these
maximum
30. In the case of a fluid, Bernoulli’s theorem expresses
(D) Both pressure and velocity of water will be
the application of the principle of conservation of
minimum
(A) linear momentum (B) energy
(C) mass (D) angular momentum
27. Water is flowing in a tube of non-uniform radius.
The ratio of the radii at entrance and exit ends of
31. A fire hydrant delivers water of density  at a
tube is 3 : 2. The ratio of the velocities of water
volume rate L. The water travels vertically upward
entering in and exiting from the tube will be –
through the hydrant and then does 90° turn to
(A) 8 : 27 (B) 4 : 9 emerge horizontally at speed V. The pipe and nozzle
(C) 1 : 1 (D) 9 : 4 have uniform cross-section throughout. The force
exerted by the water on the corner of the hydrant is :
28. The cross sectional area of a horizontal tube v
increases along its length linearly, as we move in the
direction of flow. The variation of pressure, as we v
move along its length in the direction of flow
(x-direction), is best depicted by which of the (A) VL (B) zero
following graphs
(C) 2VL (D) 2 VL
Page 100
Fluid 4.23
32. A water barrel stands on a table of height h. If a 37. A vertical tank, open at the top, is filled with a liquid
small hole is punched in the side of the barrel at its and rests on a smooth horizontal surface. A small
base, it is found that the resultant stream of water hole is opened at the centre of one side of the tank.
strikes the ground at a horizontal distance R from The area of cross-section of the tank is N times the
the barrel. The depth of water in the barrel is area of the hole, where N is a large number. Neglect
(A) R/2 (B) R2/4h mass of the tank itself. The initial acceleration of
the tank is
(C) R2/h (D) h/2
g g g g
33. A cyclindrical vessel of cross-sectional area 1000 (A) (B) (C) N (D)
2N 2N 2 N
cm2, is fitted with a frictionless piston of mass 10
kg, and filled with water completely. A small hole of
38. Water flows into a cylindrical vessel of large cross-
cross-sectional area 10 mm2 is opened at a point 50
sectional area at a rate of 10–4m3/s. It flows out
cm deep from the lower surface of the piston. The
from a hole of area 10–4 m2, which has been punched
velocity of efflux from the hole will be
through the base. How high does the water rise in
(A) 10.5 m/s (B) 3.4 m/s
the vessel ?
(C) 0.8 m/s (D) 0.2 m/s
(A) 0.075 m (B) 0.051 m
34. A horizontal right angle pipe bend has cross-sectional (C) 0.031 m (D) 0.025 m
area = 10 cm2 and water flows through it at
39. A tank has an orifice near its bottom. The volume
speed = 20 m/s. The force on the pipe bend due to
of the liquid flowing per second out of the orifice
the turning of water is :
does not depend upon –
(A) 565.7 N (B) 400 N
(A) Area of the orifice
(C) 20 N (D) 282.8 N
(B) Height of the liquid level above the orifice
(C) Density of liquid
35. Fountains usually seen in gardens are generated by
(D) Acceleration due to gravity
a wide pipe with an enclosure at one end having
many small holes. Consider one such fountain which 40. In a cylindrical vessel containing liquid of density ,
is produced by a pipe of internal diameter 2 cm in there are two holes in the side walls at heights of h1
which water flows at a rate 3ms–1. The enclosure has and h2 respectively such that the range of efflux at
100 holes each of diameter 0.05 cm. The velocity of the bottom of the vessel is same. The height of a
water coming out of the holes is (in ms–1) : hole, for which the range of efflux would be
(A) 0.48 (B) 96 maximum will be.
(C) 24 (D) 48
36. A cylindrical vessel open at the open at the top is 20

cm high and 10 cm in diameter. A circular hole whose
cross-sectional area 1 cm2 is cut at the centre of the
bottom of the vessel. Water flows from a tube above
it into the vessel at the rate 100 cm3s–1. The height
of water in the vessel under state is (Take g = 1000
(A) h2 – h1 (B) h2 + h1
cms–2)
(A) 20 cm (B) 15 cm h 2 – h1 h 2  h1
(C) (D)
(C) 10 cm (D) 5 cm 2 2
Page 101

1. B 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. D 6. B 7. C
8. C 9. B 10. D 11. B 12. C 13. B 14. A
15. D 16. C 17. A 18. B 19. B 20. B 21. A
22. A 23. B 24. B 25. C 26. A 27. B 28. A
29. B 30. B 31. D 32. B 33. B 34. A 35. D
36. D 37. C 38. B 39. C 40. D

1. D 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. A 7. D
8. D 9. A 10. B 11. C 12. A 13. A 14. B
15. B 16. B 17. B 18. B 19. A 20. B 21. C
22. A 23. C 24. D 25. C 26. D 27. C 28. D
29. D 30. A 31. D 32. B 33. D 34. A

1. B,C 2. B,C 3. A,C 4. A,C 5. A,C 6. B,D
2m 11
1. h ,H m 2. 101.8 Kgf–m 3. 54.4 cm 4. 37.5 N
 32
2( 3   ) 3 Y
5. h1 = = 0.26 ; h2 =  0.195 6. 7. 19.6 m, 4 sec
15  10  y–xz
8. 2.79 gm/cc 9. at the water surface, 10. h/2

2
11. 45°, 9600 2 (gauge) N/m 12. 100 kg
10 5 3a
rad / s , tan =
13. =
3 3
14. 5 15. 21.42 cm 16. 2g 
17. h 2 = 3 h1 18. (a) 6 2 m / s , (b) 9.6 2 × 10–3 M3 /sec, (c) 4.6 × 104 N/m2
19. 3: 2 20. 20 cm, 60 cm
Page 102
Section A - Surface Tension & Energy 6. Two glass plates are separated by water. If surface
tension of water is 75 dyn/cm and the area of each
1. There is a horizontal film of soap solution. On it a
plate wetted by water is 8 cm2 and the distance
thread is placed in the form of a loop. The film is
between the plates is 0.12 mm, then the force applied
pierced inside the loop and the thread becomes a cir-
to separate the two plates is
cular loop of radius R. If the surface tension of the
(A) 102 dyn (B) 104 dyn
loop be T, then what will be the tension in the thread? 5
(C) 10 dyn (D) 106 dyn
(A) R2/T (B) R2T
(C) 2RT (D) 2RT
Section B - Excess pressure in drop and
bubble
2. A container, whose bottom has round holes with
diameter 0.1 mm is filled with water. The maximum 7. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected
by a tube :
height in cm upto which water can be filled without
(A) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller
leakage will be what?
bubble till the sizes become equal
Surface tension=75×10–3 N/m and g=10 m/s2:
(B) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble
(A) 20 cm (B) 40 cm
till the sizes are interchanged
(C) 30 cm (D) 60 cm
(C) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger
(D) there is no flow of air.
3. A film of water is formed between two straight
parallel wires each 10 cm long and at separation 0.5
8. Two soap bubbles with radii r and (r1 > r2) come in
cm. Calculate the work required to increase 1 mm
contact. Their common surface has radius of
distance between wires. Surface tension of water =
curvature r.
72 × 10–3 Nm–1
(A) 1.44 × 10–3 J (B) 1.44 × 105 J r1  r2 r1r2
(A) r = (B) r  r – r
–5
(C) 1.2 × 10 J (D) 1.44 × 10–5 J 2 1 2
r1r2
4. A ring cut from a platinum tube, 8.5 cm internal (C) r  r  r (D) r  r1r2
1 2
diameter and 8.7 cm exernal diameter, is supported
horizonally from the pair of a balance so that it comes
in contact with the water in a vessel. If an extra 9. A soap bubble has radius R and thickness d(<< R)
weight of 3.97 g is required to pull it away from as shown. It colapses into a spherical drop. The
water, calculate the surface tension of water. ratio of excess pressure in the drop to the excess
(A) 7.2 × 10–2 Nm–1 (B) 3.6 × 10–2 Nm–1 pressure inside the bubble is.
–2 –1
(C) 1.8 × 10 Nm (D) 2.4 × 10–2 Nm–1 1
 R 3
(A)  
5. A straw 6 cm long floats on water. The water film on  3d  d
one side has surface tension of 50 dyn/cm. On the
1 R
other slide, camphor reduces the surface tension to R>>d
 R 3
40 dyn/cm. The resultant force acting on the straw is (B)  
 6d 
(A) (50 × 6 – 40 × 6) dyn (B) 10 dyn
1
 50 40   R 3
(C)    dyn (D) 90 dyn (C)   (D) None
 6 6   24d 
Page 103
Surface Tension 5.13
10. A number of droplet, each of radius r, combine to

form a drop of radius R. If T is the surface tension, R
R
the rise in temperature will be (A) (B) r
h h
2T 3T
(A) (B)
r r
R r
1 1  1 1  (C) (D) R
(C) 2T    (D) 3T   
r R r R  h h
11. Two soap bubbles of radii a and b combine to form 15. Water rises in a capillary upto a certain height such
that the upward force of surface tension balances the
a single bubble of radius c. If P is the external pres-
force of 75 × 10–4 N due to weight of the liquid. If
sure, then the surface tension of the soap solution is
the surface tension of water is 6 × 10–2 Nm–1, what
P  c 3  a 3  b3  P  c3  a 3  b 3  must be the internal circumfernece of the capillary ?
(A) (B)
4  a 2  b2  c2  4  a 2  b2  c2  (A) 1.25 × 10–3 m (B) 1.25 × 10–2 m
–2
(C) 2.5 × 10 m (D) 0.5 × 10–2 m
(C) Pc3 – 4a2 – 4b2 (D) Pc2 – 2a2 – 3b2
16. A long capillary tube of radius 2 mm open at both ends

12. The excess pressure inside an air bubble of radius r is filled with water and placed vertically. What will be
just below the surface of water is P1. The excess the height of the column of water left in the capillary ?
pressure inside a drop of the same radius just outside The thickness of the capillary walls is negligible. Surface
the surface is P2. If T is surface tension then - tension of water 73.5 × 10–3 Nm–1
(A) P1 = 2P2 (B) P1 = P2 (A) 0.75 cm (B) 2.5 cm
(C) P2 = 2P1 (D) P2 = 0, P1 0 (C) 2 cm (D) 1.5 cm
17. The limbs of a manometer consist of uniform

Section C - Contact Angle and Capillary capillary tubes of radii 1.44 × 10 –3 m and
7.2 × 10–4 m. Find out the correct pressure difference
13. A liquid is filled in a spherical container of radius R
if the level of the liquid (density 103 kgm–3, surface
till a height h. At this positions the liquid surface at
tension 72 × 10–3 Nm–1) in the narrower tube stands
the edges is also horizontal. The contact angle is
0.2 m above that in the broader tube.
(A) 0 (A) 930 Nm–2 (B) 1860 Nm–2
(C) 3660 Nm–2 (D) 1530 Nm–2
1  R  h 
(B) cos   h
 R 
18. A glass capillary sealed at the upper end is of length
0.11 m and internal diameter 2 × 10–5 m. The tube
1  h – R  1  R – h 
(C) cos   (D) sin   is immersed vertically into a liquid of surface tension
 R   R 
5.06 × 10–2 Nm–1. To what length the capillary has
to be immersed so that the liquid level inside and
14. A long capillary tyube of radius ‘r’ is initially just outside and capillary becomes the same ? What will
vertically completely imerged inside a liquid of angle happen to liquid level inside the capillary if the seal
of contact 0°. If the tube is slowly raised then rela- is now broken? Atmopsheric pressure is 1.012 ×
tion between radius of curvature of miniscus inside 105 Nm–2.
the capillary tube and displacement (h) of tube can (A) 2 cm (B) 1 cm
be represented by (C) 3 cm (D) 4 cm
Page 104
Section D - Viscosity and Stokes law, 23. Which of the following graphs best represents the
Terminal Velocity + Reynols motion of a raindrop?
Number (Streamline &
Turbulent flow v v
19. A Newtonian fluid fills the clearance between a shaft

(A) (B)
and a sleeve. When a force of 800N is applied to
the shaft, parallel to the sleeve, the shaft attains a t t
speed of 1.5 cm/sec. If a force of 2.4 kN is applied
instead, the shaft would move with a speed of v v
(A) 1.5 cm/sec (B) 13.5 cm/sec
(C) 4.5 cm/sec (D) None (C) (D)
t t
20. A solid metallic sphere of radius r is allowed to fall
freely through air. If the frictional resistance due to air
is proportional to the cross-sectional area and to the 24. A spherical ball of density  and radius 0.003m is
square of the velocity, then the terminal velocity of the dropped into a tube containing a viscous fluid filled
sphere is proportional to which of the following? up to the 0 cm mark as shown in the figure. Viscosity
(A) r2 (B) r of the fluid = 1.260 N.m–2 and its density L = /2 =
(C) r 3/2
(D) r1/2 1260 kg.m–3.
Assume the ball reaches a terminal speed by the
10 cm mark. The time taken by the ball to travel
21. Two drops of same radius are falling through air
the distance between the 10 cm and 20 cm mark is.
with steady velocity of v cm/s. If the two drops
collapses, what would be the terminal velocity?
(A) 4 v (B) (4)1/3v
0 cm
(C) 2 v (D) 64 v
10 cm
22. A cubical block of side ‘a’ and density ‘’ slides 20 cm

over a fixed inclined plane with constant velocity
‘v’. There is a thin film of viscous fluid of thickness (A) 500 s (B) 50 ms
‘t’ between the plane and the block. Then the (C) 0.5 s (D) 0.25 s
coefficient of viscosity of the thin film will be: (g = acceleration due to gravity = 10 ms–2)
3 a g t
(A)
5v 25. The terminal velocity of a spherical ball of radius r
falling through a viscous liquid is proportional to -
4 a g t
(B) (A) r (B) r2
5v =37°
(C) r3 (D) r–1
a g t
(C) (D) none of these
v
Page 105

1. D 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. A
6. C 7. C 8. B 9. C 10. D
11. B 12. B 13. B 14. B 15. B
16. D 17. B 18. B 19. C 20. D
21. B 22. A 23. C 24. D 25. B

1. B 2. D 3. C 4. C 5. A
6. D 7. B 8. D 9. A 10. C
11. A 12. B 13. C 14. A 15. A
16. B 17. A

1. C,D 2. A,B,C,D 3. A,D 4. A,B 5. A,C
6. C,D 7. A,C 8. BCD

1 1 
1. 6 × 10–3 J 2. 0.6 g 3. 4R3T   
r R
4. 1.274 × 105 N/m3 5. 0.004 cm 6. 4.76 mm
Velocity v0
7. v1 8. 2.5 cm 9. 20 cm 10. 20.4 m
Dist. moved H
11. 4.5 m 12. 3

2T 2 2T
1.  2. 8.1796 kg wt 3. 6 cm 4. h
g gd
5. 10.9 m/s 6. 1.52 × 103 poise

1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C
6. B 7. D 8. D 9. B 10. B
11. C 12. C

1. A,D 2. B 3. 6 4. D 5. C
6. A 7. B 8. 3 9. D 10. D
11. B, C 12. A,D 13. 3 14. 6 15. AC
16. ACD
Page 106
Section A - Plane Mirror 7. A point object is kept in front of a plane mirror. The
plane mirror is doing SHM of amplitude 2cm. The
1. A point source of light is placed in front of a plane mirror.
plane mirror moves along the x-axis and x-axis is
(A) Only the reflected rays close to the normal normal to the mirror. The amplitude of the mirror is
meet at a point when produced backward. such that the object is always infront of the mirror.
(B) All the reflected rays meet at a point when The amplitude of SHM of the image is
produced backward. (A) zero (B) 2 cm
(C) Only the reflected rays making a small angle
(C) 4 cm (D) 1 cm
with the mirror, meet at a point when produced
backward.
8. An insect of negligible mass is sitting on a block of
(D) Light of different colours make different images.
mass M tied with a spring of force constant k. The
block performs SHM with amplitude A infront of a
2. A watch shows the time as 3 : 25. What will be the
plane mirror placed as shown. The maximum speed
time that appears when seen through a plane mirror ?
of insect relative to its image will be
(A) 8 : 35 (B) 9 : 35
(C) 7 : 35 (D) 8 : 25 k
(A) A
M
3. If a ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an
angle 60° from the mirror surface, then deviation A 3 k
(B)
produced by mirror is : 2 M
(A) 30° (B) 60° insect 60°
k M
(C) 90° (D) 120° (C) A 3
M
4. When light is reflected from a mirror a change occurs A k

in its : (D)
2 M
(A) phase, (B) frequency,
(C) wavelength, (D) speed
9. An object is initially at a distance of 100 cm from a
plane mirror. If the mirror approaches the object at
5. The images of clouds and trees in water always less
a speed of 5 cm/s. Then after 6 s the distance
bright than in reality –
between the object and its image will be :
(A) because water is forming the image dirty
(A) 60 cm (B) 140 cm
(B) because there is an optical illusion due to which
the image appears to be less bright (C) 170 cm (D) 150 cm
(C) because only a portion of the incident light is
reflected and quite a large portion goes mid water 10. Two mirrors are placed perpendicular to each other.
(D) because air above the surface of water contains A ray strikes the first mirror and after reflection from
a lot of moisture the first mirror it falls on the second mirror. The ray
after reflection from second mirror will emerge:
6. A rays is incident at an angle 38º on a mirror. The (A) Perpendicular to the original ray
angle between normal and reflected ray is (B) Parallel to the original ray
(A) 38º (B) 52º (C) At 450 to the original ray
(C) 90º (D) 76º (D) At 600 to the original ray
Page 107
Geometrical Optics 1.65
11. If an object is placed unsymmetrically between two 17. The largest distance of the image of a real object
plane mirrors, inclined at the angle of 600, then the from a convex mirror of focal length 20 cm can be :
total number of images formed is (A) 20 cm
(A) 5 (B) 4 (B) infinite
(C) 2 (D) infinite
(C) 10 cm
12. When a plane mirror AB is placed horizontally on (D) depends on the position of the object.
level ground at a distance of 60 metres from the
foot of a tower, the top of the tower and its image 18. A concave mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm
in the mirror subtends, an angle of 90° at B. The forms image of the sun. The diameter of the sun
height of the tower is : subtends an angle 1° on the earth. Then the diameter
(A) 30 metre of the image is (in cm) :
(A) 2/9 (B) /9
(B) 60 metre (C) 20 (D) /18
(C) 90 metre
(D) 120 metre.
A B 19. A convex mirror has a focal length = 20 cm. A
convergent beam tending to converge to a point 20
Section B, C, D, E - Mirror formula and cm behind convex mirror on principal axis falls on
Magnification, Veloci ty in it. The image if formed at
Spherical Mirror, Cutting of
(A) infinity (B) 40 cm
Mirrors, Combination of Mirrors,
Intensity of light (C) 20 cm (D) 10 cm
13. In image formation from spherical mirrors, only

paraxial rays are considered because they : 20. A candle is kept at a distance equal to double the
focal length from the pole of a convex mirror. its
(A) are easy to handle geometrically
magnification will be :
(B) contain most of the intensity of the incident light
(C) form nearly a point image of a point source 1 1
(A) – (B)
(D) show minimum dispersion effect. 3 3
14. A convex mirror has a focal length f. A real object, 2 2

(C) (D) –
placed at a distance f in front of it from the pole, 3 3
produces an image at
(A) 2 f (B) f/2 21. A concave mirror gives an image three times as large
(C) f (D)  as the object placed at a distance of 20 cm from it.
For the image to be real, the focal length should be :
15. If an object is 30 cm away from a concave mirror
of focal length 15 cm, the image will be (A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm
(A) erect (B) virtual (C) 20 cm (D) 30 cm

(C) diminished (D) of same size
22. The focal length of spherical mirror is
16. A concave mirror cannot form :
(A) Maximum for red light
(A) virtual image of virtual object
(B) Maximum for blue light
(B) virtual image of a real object
(C) real image of a real object (C) Maximum for white light
(D) real image of a virutal object (D) Same for all lights
Page 108
Section F - Snell's Law, Apparent depth and 28. A ray of light travelling in glass (g = 3/2) is incident
Normal shift, Refraction through on a glass air surface at the critical angle. If a thin
a Glass slab, Lateral shift layer of water (w = 4/3) is now poured on the glass
air surface, at what angle will the ray of light emerge
23. When a wave is refracted : into air at the water air surface?
(A) its path must change (A) 60° (B) 30°
(B) its amplitude must change (C) 45° (D) 90o
(C) its velocity must change

29. Light traveling through three transparent
(D) its frequency must change substances follows the path shown in figure.
Arrange the indices of refraction in order from
24. A ray incident at a point at an angle of incidence of smallest to largest. Note that total internal reflection
60° enters a glass sphere of  = 3 and it is reflected does occur on the bottom surface of medium 2.
and refracted at the farther surface of the sphere. n1
The angle between reflected and refracted rays at n2
this surface is
(A) 50° (B) 90° n3
(C) 60° (D) 40°
(A) n1 < n2 < n3 (B) n2 < n1 < n3
(C) n1 < n3 < n2 (D) n3 < n1 < n2
25. A ray of light passes through a plane glass slab of
thickness t and refractive index  = 1.5. The angle 30. The critical angle of light going from medium A to
between incident ray and emergent ray will be medium B is . The speed of light in medium A is v.
(A) 0° (B) 30° The speed of light in medium B is :
(C) 45° (D) 60° v

(A) (B) v sin 
sin 
(C) v cot  (D) v tan 
26. A ray of light is incident on one face of a transparent
slab of thickness 15 cm. The angle of incidence is
31. Two transparent media A and B are separated by a
60°. If the lateral displacement of the ray on
plane boundary. The speed of light in medium A is
emerging from the parallel plane is 5 3 cm, the 2.0 × 108 m s–1 and in medium B is 2.5 × 108 ms–1.
refractive index of the material of the slab is The critical angle for which a ray of light going from
(A) 1.414 (B) 1.532 A to B is totally internally reflected is
(C) 1.732 (D) none –1  1  –1  2 

(A) sin   (B) sin  
2  5
Section G - Critical Angle and Total Internal –1  4  –1  1 

(C) sin   (D) sin  
Reflection (T.I.R.)  5  3
27. For two given statements : 32. A light ray is incident on a transparent sphere of
I. Critical angle is greater for violet light than for index = 2 , at an angle of incidence = 45°. What
red light. is the deviation of a tiny fraction of the ray, which
II. Diamonds shine in the dark. enters the sphere, undergoes two internal reflections,
(A) I true, II false (B) I false, II true and then refracts out into air?
(C) both true (D) both false (A) 270° (B) 240°
(C) 120° (D) 180°
Page 109
Section H - Prism 37. A certain prism is found to produce a minimum

deviation of 38°. It produces a deviation of 44° when
33. A prism having refractive index 2 and refracting the angle of incidence is either 42° or 62°. What is
angle 30°, has one of the refracting surface polished. the angle of incidence when it is undergoing minimum
A beam of light incident on the other refracting surface deviation?
will retrace its path if the angle of incidence is : (A) 45° (B) 49°
(C) 40° (D) 55°
(A) 0° (B) 30°
(C) 45° (D) 60°
38. A beam of monochromatic light is incident at i =
50° on one face of an equilateral prism, the angle of
34. A triangular prism of glass is shown in figure. A ray emergence is 40°, then the angle of minimum
incident normally on one face is totally reflected. If deviation is :
 is 45°, the index of refraction of glass is : (A) 30° (B) < 30°
(C)  30° (D)  30°
I
Section I - Dispersion of Light
 39. The dispersion of light in a medium implies that:
O
(A) lights of different wavelengths travels with
different speeds in the medium
(B) lights of different frequencies travel with different
(A) Less than 2 (B) Equal to 2 speeds in the medium
(C) Greater than (D) None of the above. (C) the refractive index of medium is different for
2
different wavelengths
(D) all of the above.
35. An equilateral prism deviates a ray through 23º for
two angles of incidence differing by 23º. Find  of 40. Critical angle of light passing from glass to air is
the prism ? minimum for
(A) red (B) green
33 43
(A) (B) (C) yellow (D) violet
5 3
43 62 41. A medium has n v = 1.56, n r = 1.44. Then its

(C) (D) dispersive power is :
5 2
3 6
(A) (B)
50 25
36. A ray of light is incident at angle i on a surface of a
prism of small angle A & emerges normally from (C) 0.03 (D) none
the opposite surface. If the refractive index of the
material of the prism is , the angle of incidence i is 42. Indicate the correct statement in the following
nearly equal to : (A) The dispersive power depends upon the angle
of prism
A A (B) The angular dispersion depends upon the angle
(A) (B)
 (2 ) of the prism
(C) The angular dispersion does not depend upon
A
(C) A (D)  the dispersive power
2
(D) The dispersive power in vacuum is one
Page 110
Section J - Refraction from a Spherical 46. A planoconcave lens is placed on a paper on which
Surface a flower is drawn. How far above its actual position
does the flower
43. The image for the converging beam after refraction Radius of
through the curved surface is formed at : appear to be ? curvature = 20 cm
(A) 10 cm air 3

(B) 15 cm t=20cm 2
n=3/2 n=1
(C) 50 cm
O
(D) none Paper
P x
30
R=20cm 47. A fish is near the centre of a spherical water filled
fish bowl. A child stands in air at a distance 2 R (R
40 is radius of curvature of the sphere) from the centre
(A) x = 40 cm (B) x = cm
3 of the bowl. At what distance from the centre would
the child's nose appear to the fish situated at the
40 180
(C) x = – cm (D) x = cm centre (R.I. of water = 4/3)
3 7
(A) 4R (B) 2R
(C) 3R (D) R
44. A narrow parallel beam of light is incident on a
transparent sphere of refractive index ‘n’. If the beam
48. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature
finally gets focussed at a point situated at a distance
10 cm separates two medium x & y of refractive
= 2 × (radius of sphere) from the centre of the
index 4/3 & 3/2 respectively. If the object is placed
sphere, then find n?
along principal axis in medium X then
(A) 4/3 (B) 3/2
(A) image is always real
(C) 5/4 (D) 5/3
(B) image is real if the object
distance is greater than 90cm
45 An extended object of size 2 cm is placed at a distance
of 10 cm in air (n = 1) from pole, on the principal (C) image is always virtual
axis of a spherical curved surface. The medium on (D) image is virtual if the object distance is less than
the other side of refracting surface has refractive 90 cm
index n = 2. Find the position, nature and size of
image formed after single refraction through the Section K - Lens Maker formula and
curved surface. Magnification, Image formation
by convex and concave lens,
Combination of lens, Cutting of
n=1
2cm
n=2
lens
49. A thin lens of focal length f and its aperture diameter
10cm
d, forms a real image of intensity I. Now the central
ROC = 20cm d
part of the aperture upto diameter ( ) is blocked
2
(A) 30 cm from pole in the medium of refractive
index 1, virtual, erect and 4 cm in size. by an opaque paper. The focal length and image
(B) 40 cm from pole in the medium of refractive intensity would change to
index 1, virtual, erect and 4 cm in size. f I I
(C) 40 cm from pole in the medium of refractive (A) , (B) f ,
2 2 4
index 1, real, inverted and 4 cm in size.
(D)30 cm from pole in the medium of refractive 3f I 3I
(C) , (D) f,
index 1, virtual, erect and 6 cm in size. 4 2 4
Page 111
50. When the object is at distances u1 and u2 the images 56. Two symmetric double convex lenses A and B have
formed by the same lens are real and virtual same focal length, but the radii of curvature differ
respectively and of the same size. Then focal length so that RA = 0.9 RB. If nA = 1.63, find nB.
of the lens is ; (A) 1.7 (B) 1.6
1 1 (C) 1.5 (D) 4/3
(A) u1u 2 (B) (u1  u 2 )
2 2
Section L - Power of lens and Mirror,
(C) u1 u 2 (D) 2(u1  u 2 )
Silverging of lens, Displacement
Method
51. Which of the following cannot form real image of a
real object ? 57. A lens of power + 2.0 D is placed in contact with
another lens of power – 1.0 D. The combination
(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
will behave like
(C) both mirror (D) none of these
(A) a converging lens of focal length 100 cm
52. A double convex lens has focal length 50 cm. The (B) a diverging lens of focal length 100 cm
radius of curvature of one of the surfaces is double (C) a converging lens of focal length 50 cm
of the other. Find the radii, if the refractive index of (D) a diverging lens of focal length 50 cm.
the material of the lens is 2.
(A) 150 cm, 75 cm (B) 125 cm, 150 cm 58. In the adjoining ray-diagram are given the
(C) 75 cm, 150 cm (D) 25 cm, 75 cm positions of an object O, image I and two lenses L1
and L2. The focal length of L1 is also given. Find
53. A thin symmetrical double convex the focal length of the lens L2.
lens of power P is cut into three A
part, as shown in the figure. Power
B
of A is :
C
P
(A) 2 P (B)
2
L1 L2
P
(C) (D) P
3 (A) 30 cm (B) – 30 cm
(C) –15 cm (D) None of these
54. A plano convex lens has a curved surface of radius
100 cm. If  = 1.5, then the focal length of the lens is
59. A thin equi-convex
(A) 50 cm (B) 100 cm  = 5/3
lens having radius
(C) 200 cm (D) 500 cm of curvature 10 cm is  = 5/4  = 3/2
placed as shown in
55. A biconvex lens has a focal
figure. Calculate focal length of the lens,
length of 10 cm. It is cut in half
if parallel rays are incident as shown.
and two pieces are placed as
shown. The focal length of the 120 160
(A) cm (B) cm
final combination is 7 7
(A) 10 (B) 20 180

(C) cm (D) None
(C) 40 (D) Not a lens 7
Page 112
60. A convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed 30 65. A compound microscope has a magnification power
cm in front of a second conves lens also of the of 100 when the image is formed at infinity. the
same focal length. A plane mirror is placed after objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube
the two lenses. Where should a point object be
length is 6.5 cm. Find the focal length of eyepiece.
placed in front of the first lens so that it images on
to itself ? (A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm
(A) 20 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 40 cm
(C) 30 cm (D) 25 cm
61. A concave mirror of focal length 30 cm is placed on 66. A telescope has an objective of focal length
the flat horizontal surface with its concave side up. 30 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 3.0 cm. It is
Water with refractive index 1.33 is poured into the focussed on an object of distance 2.0 meter. For
lens. Where should an object be placed if its image is seeing with relaxed eye, calculate the separation
to be captured on a screen with a magnification of between the objective and the eyepiece.
2?
(A) 33 cm (B) 27 cm
(A) 44.25 cm (B) 40.60 cm
(C) 33.75 cm (D) 38.50 cm (C) 38.3 cm (D) None of these
62. A convex lens is cut in half along its principal axis 67. A liquid of refractive index 1.6 is contained in the
and the two halves are separated by a distance of cavity of a glass specimen of refractive index 1.5 as
12 cm. An object is placed 6 cm in front of the lens shown in figure. If each of the curved surfaces has
as shown in Figure. Two sharp images are formed a radius of curvature of 0.20 m, the arrangement
on the screen placed 80 cm from the object. What behaves as a
is the focal length of the lens ?
(A) 12.50 cm
(B) 23.45 cm Glass
(C) 17.30 cm
(D) 19.55 cm
Liquid
63. A telephoto combination consists of convex lens of

focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of focal length (A) converging lens of focal length 0.25 m
15 cm, the separation between two lens is 27.5 cm. (B) diverging lens of focal length 0.25 m
Where should be the photographic plate placed in order (C) diverging lens of focal length 0.17 m
to photograph an object 10 m in front of the first lens? (D) converging lens of focal length 0.72 m
(A) 5 cm (B) 3 cm
(C) 4 cm (D) 6 cm 68. The focal lengths of the objective and
the eyepiece of a compound microscope are 2.0 cm
64. The source is placed 30 cm from a convex lens which and 3.0 cm, respectively. The distance between the
has a focal length of 20 cm. The source is initially objective and the eyepiece is 15.0 cm,. The final
located on the axis of the lens. The lens is then cut image formed by the eyepiece is at infiinity. The
into two halves in a plane along the principal axis. two lenses are thin. The distance, in cm, of the object
The two halves are separated by a distance of 4 and the image produced by the objective, measured
mm. What will be the locations of the image of the from the objective lens, are respectively
source? (A) 2.4 and 12.0 (B) 2.4 and 15.0
(A) 7 cm (B) 3 cm (C) 2.0 and 12.0 (D) 2.0 and 3.0
(C) 4 cm (D) 6 cm
Page 113
69. An eye specialist prescribes spectacles having 72. In a simple microscope, if the final image is located
combination of convex lens of focal length 40 cm in at infinity then its magnifying power-
contact with a concave lens of focal length 25 cm. (A) 25/F (B) 25/D
The power of this lens combination in diopters is
(C) F/25 (D) (1+ 25/F)
(A) +1.5 (B) –1.5
(C) +6.67 (D) –6.67
73. An astronomical telescope has a magnifying power
10. The focal length of the eye piece is 20 cm. the
Section M - Chromatic Aberration and focal length of the objective is -
Achromatism, Optical (A) 2 cm (B) 200 cm
Instrument + Eye + Luminous
(C) (1/2) cm (D) (1/200) cm
Intensity
70. A real image of a distant object is formed by a 74. If F0 and Fe are the focal lengths of the objective
planoconvex lens on its principal axis. Spherical and eye-piece respectively for a Galilean telescope,
aberration its magnifying power is about
(A) is absent (A) F0 + Fe (B) F0 × Fe
(B) is smaller if the curved surface of the lens faces 1

(C) F0/Fe (D) F + Fe
the object 2 0
(C) is smaller if the plane surface of the lens faces
the object
75. A myopic person can not see objects lying beyond 2
(D) is the same whichever side of the lens faces the m. The focal length and power of the lens required
object. to remove this defect will be
(A) 1 m & 0.5 D (B) – 2m & – 0.5 D
71. The focal length of the objective of a microscope is- (C) 0.5 m & 0.5 D (D) – 0.5 m & 0.5 D
(A) Greater than the focal length of eye piece
(B) Lesser than the focal length of the eye piece
(C) Equal to the focal length of the eye piece
(D) Any of (A) (B) and (C)
Page 114
1. B 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C
8. C 9. B 10. B 11. A 12. B 13. C 14. B
15. D 16. A 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. B 21. B
22. D 23. C 24. B 25. A 26. C 27. D 28. D
29. D 30. A 31. C 32. A 33. C 34. C 35. C
36. C 37. B 38. B 39. D 40. D 41. B 42. B
43. A 44. A 45 B 46. A 47. C 48. C 49. D
50. B 51. B 52. C 53. D 54. C 55. A 56. A
57. A 58. C 59. C 60. A 61. C 62. D 63. B
64. C 65. B 66. C 67. B 68. A 69. B 70. B
71. B 72. A 73. B 74. C 75. B

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. C
6. A 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. C
11. D 12. B 13. B 14. B 15. D
16. C 17. A 18. D 19. D 20. A
21. C 22. C 23. C 24. B 25. A
26. D 27. A 28. A 29. D 30. C
31. D 32. C 33. B 34. B 35. B
36. C 37. B 38. C 39. A 40. B
41. A 42. A 43. B 44. B 45. A

1. B,C 2. B,D 3. A,B,D 4. A,B 5. B,C
6. B,C 7. A,B,D 8. A,D 9. A,B,C 10. B,C,D
11. B,C,D 12. A,C 13. A,C 14. B,C,D 15. A,B,C
16. A,B 17. A,C 18. A,C 19. A,C 20. B,C,D
21. ABCD 22. A,C,D 23. B,C 24. A,B 25. A,C
26. A,B 27. A,B,C,D 28. A,B,C,D

1. 4nR 2. 3d 3. first mirror 4.  = 30° 5. circle
6. 120° anticlockwise and 240° clockwise. 7. 30° clockwise
8. Positioin of image = (1 cos 60°, –1 sin 60°), Velocity of image=1 cos 60° i , +1 sin 60° j m / s
4
9. (4, 0, 0) 10. 20 m 11. ms-1 12. 0 13. 10 cm
9
14. 20 cm 15. +2 16. towards right 17. Real, inverted, height = 4 cm
2
18. 3m 19. 12 × 3 / 7 20.  10 –8 sec 21. 30 cm 22. sin   n12  n22
3
 3 1 41  1  8
sin1   24. sin–1 
23.  2 
25.  26. 27. 38° 28. 30°
 4  3 5 2
29. 90° 30. red 31. (a) 1/5 = 0.2° (b) 0.72° 32. 7.2° 33. 3
Page 115

Section A - Interference Problems + 7. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of
Wavefronts & Hugen’s Principle intensities I and 4I are superposed. The maximum
and minimum possible intensities in the resulting
1. Monochromatic light is that light in which beam are:
(A) Single wavelength is present (A) 5I and I (B) 5I and 3I
(B) Various wavelengths are present (C) 9I and I (D) 9I and 3I
(C) Red and violet light is present
(D) Yellow and red light is present 8. When light is refracted into a denser medium,
(A) Its wavelength and frequency both increases
(B) Its wavelength increase but frequency remains
2. The resultant amplitude in interference with two
unchanged
coherent source depends upon – (C) Its wavelength decrease but frequency remains
(A) Intensity unchanged
(B) Only phase difference (D) Its wavelength and frequency both decrease
(C) On both the above
(D) None of the above 9. If the yellow light is replaced by the violet light then
the interference fringes-
3. Interference event is observed in (A) Will become fainter
(B) Will become brighter
(A) Only transverse waves
(C) The fringe width will increase
(B) Only longitudinal waves
(D) The fringe width will decrease
(C) Both types of waves
(D) Not observed in both type of waves 10. Figure, shows wave fronts in still water, moving in
the direction of the arrow towards the interface PQ
4. The path difference between two wavefronts between a shallow region and a deep (denser) region.
emitted by coherent sources of wavelength 5460 Å Which of the lines shown may represent one of the
is 2.1 micron . The phase difference between the wave fronts in the deep region ?
P
wavefronts at that point is – (A) I deep IV
(A) 7.692 (B) 7.692  (B) II shallow III
(C) III II
7.692 7.692 (D) IV I
(C) (D)
 3
Q
Section B - YDSE Experiment
5. The path difference between two waves
11. In Young's double slit experiment 62 fringes are
y1= A1 sin t and y2= A2 cos (t + ) will be
visible in the field of view with sodium light ( =
(A) (/2)  (B) (/2) (+/2) 5893Å). If green light ( = 5461Å) is used then the
(C) (2/) (–2) (D) (2/)  number of visible fringes will be –
(A) 62 (B) 67
6. The necessary condition for phenomenon of (C) 85 (D) 58
interference to occur is
(A) There should be two coherent sources. 12. In Young's double slit experiment, the distance of
(B) The frequency and amplitude of both the waves the n-th dark fringe from the centre is –
should be same  D   2d 
(A) n   (B) n  
(C) The propagation of waves should be  2d   D 
simultaneously and in same direction
D 4d
(D) All of the above (C)  2n  1 (D) (2n-1)
2d D
Page 116
Wave Optics 2.25
13. In young's double slit experiment, interference pattern 18. In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with
is observed on the screen L distance apart from slits, thin sheets having thickness t & 2t and refractive
average distance between adjacent fringes is x and index 2 and . Find the position (y) of central
slits separation is d, then the wavelength of light will maxima
be – (A) zero t,2
(B) tD/d y
(A) xd/ L (B) xL/d d
(C) Ld/x (D) Ldx (C) – tD/d
,2t
(D) None
D
14. Plane microwaves from a transmitter are directed
normally towards a plane reflector. A detector moves
Section C - Other Experiment (Fresnell’s
bilets, etc.)
along the normal to the reflector. Between positions
of 14 successive maxima, the detector travels a 19. The ratio of the intensity at the centre of a bright
distance 0.13 m. If the velocity of light is fringe to the intensity at a point one-quarter of the
fringwidth from the centre is
3 × 108 m/s, find the frequency of the transmitter.
(A) 2 (B) 1/2 (C) 4 (D) 16
(A) 1.5 × 1010 Hz (B) 1010 Hz
10
(C) 3 × 10 Hz (D) 6 × 1010 Hz 20. In a biprism experiment the distance of source from
biprism is 1 m and the distance of screen from
15. In a young double slit experiment D equals the biprism is 4 meters. The angle of refraction of
distance of screen and d is the separation between biprism is 2 × 10–3 radians. of biprism is 1.5 and
the slit. The distance of the nearest point to the the wavelength of light used is 6000 Å. How many
central maximum where the intensity is same as that fringes will be seen on the screen?
due to a single slit, is equal to (A) 4 (B) 5
(C) 3 (D) 6
D D
(A) (B) 2d
d 21. In a fresnel biprism experiment, the two positions
of lens give separation between the slits as 16 cm
D 2 D and 9 cm respectively. What is the actual distance
(C) 3d (D)
d of separation?
(A) 12.5 cm (B) 12cm
16. A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 6300 (C) 13 cm (D) 14 cm
Å and  Å is used to obtain interference fringes in a
Young’s double slit experiment. If 4th bright fringe 22. Huygen’s concept of secondary waves
(A) allows us to find the focal length of a thick
of 6300 Å coincides with 5th dark fringe of  Å, the
lens.
value of  (in Å) is
(B) is a geometrical method to find a wave front.
(A) 5200 (B) 4800 (C) is used to explain polarisation.
(C) 6200 (D) 5600 (D) is used to determine the velolcity of light.
17. In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with 23. A thin slice is cut out of a glass cylinder along a plane
respect to the slit is now moved parallel to the plane parallel to its axis. The slice is placed on a flat glass
of the slits so that it is closer to plate with the curved surface downwards.
the upper slit, as shown. Then, S Monochromatic light is incident normally from the top.
S1
(A) the fringe width will The observed interference fringes from this combination
S2 do not follow one of the following statements.
increase and fringe pattern will
(A) the fringes are straight and parallel to the length
shift down.
of the piece.
(B) the fringe width will remain same but fringe (B) the line of contact of the cylindrical glass piece
pattern will shift up. and the glass plate appears dark.
(C) the fringe width will decrease and fringe pattern (C) the fringe spacing increases as we go outwards.
will shift down. (D) the fringes are formed due to the interference of
(D) the fringe width will remain same but fringe light rays reflected from the curved surface of the
pattern will shift down. cylindrical piece and the top surface of the glass plate.
Page 117
24. In a biprism experiment, coherent sources are (A) If both Statement - I and Statement - II are
obtained by which of the following phenomenon : true, and Statement - II is the correct explanation of
(A) refraction (B) reflection Statement- I.
(C) interference (D) diffraction (B) If both Statement-I and Statement - II are true
but Statement - II is not the correct
Section D - YDSE thin Film explanation of Statement-I.
(C) If Statement-I is true but Statement - II is false.
25. A circular planar wire loop is dipped in a soap (D) If Statement-I is false but Statement-II is true.
solution and after taking it out, held with its plane
vertical in air. Assuming thickness of film at the top 30. A diffraction pattern is produced by a single slit of
very small, as sunlight falls on the soap film, & width 0.5mm with the help of a convex lens of focal
observer receive reflected light. length 40cm. If the wave length of light used is
(A) the top portion appears dark while the first 5896Å. then the distance of first dark fringe from
colour to be observed as one moves down is red. the axis will be-
(B) the top portion appears violet while the first (A) 0.047 cm (B) 0.047 m
colour to be observed as one moves down is indigo. (C) 0.047 mm (D) 47 cm
(C) the top portion appears dark while the first colour
to be observed as one move down is violet. 31. Two polaroids as oriented with their planes
(D) the top portion appears dark while the first colour perpendicular to incident light and transmission axis
to be observed as one move down depends on the making an angle of 30º with each other. What fraction
refractive index of the soap solution. of incident unpolarised light is transmitted ?
26. When exposed to sunlight, thin films of oil on water (A) 20% (B) 45%
often exhibit brilliant colours due to the phenom- (C) 37.5% (D) 75%
enon of :
(A) interference (B) diffraction 32. The angle of incidence at which reflected light is
(C) dispersion (D) polarisation totally polarised for reflection from air to glass
(refractive index n) is -
(A) sin–1 (n) (B) sin–1 (1/n)
27. If white light is used in the Newton’s rings
(C) tan–1 (1/n) (D) tan–1 (n)
experiment, the colour observed in the reflected light
is complementary to that observed in the transmit- 33. A ray of unpolarised light is incident on a glass plate
ted light through the same point. This is due to at the polarising angle 57º. Then -
(A) 45° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. (A) the reflected ray and the transmitted ray both
(B) 90° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. will be completely polarised
(C) 135° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. (B) the reflected ray will be completely polarised
(D) 180° change of phase in one of the reflected waves. and the transmitted ray will be partially polarised
(C) the reflected ray will be partially polarised and
the transmitted ray will be completely polarised
28. A very thin transparent film of soap solution
(D) the reflected and transmitted both rays will be
(thickness  0) is seen under reflection of white
partially polarised
light. Then the colour of the film appear to be :
(A) blue (B) black 34. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass
(C) red (D) yellow plate at an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s
angle . If  represents the refractive index of glass
Section E,F - Diffraction Single Slit + with respect to air, the angle between the reflected
Polarisation and refracted rays is -
(A) (90 + ) (B) sin–1 (m cos )
29. Statement-I : Light waves can be polarised.
 sin  
Statement-II: It is because light waves are (C) 90º (D) sin–1   
 
transverse in nature.
Page 118

1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. C
8. C 9. C 10. A 11. B 12. C 13. A 14. A
15. C 16. D 17. D 18. B 19. A 20. B 21. B
22. B 23. C 24 A 25. C 26. A 27. D 28. B
29. A 30. A 31. C 32. D 33. B 34. C

1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. A 7. B
8. B 9. B 10. D 11. B 12. B 13. C 14. D
15. C 16. C 17. A 18. D 19. C 20. C 21. C
22. C 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. B 27. A 28. D
29. A 30. B 31. C 32. D 33. A 34. A 35. A
36. A

1. BD 2. BCD 3. AD

1. 81:1 2. Bright A, C and Dark B, D 3. 60 4. 141
5. I 6. 9 7. 0.225 mm 8. 18 9. 8mm
10. 0.2mm 11. 35.35cm
12. 0.15 mm 13. 1.98×10 -2 mm 14. 5000 Å
15. 0.12 cm, 1.8 × 10-2 cm 16. 5400 Å 17. (i) 1 mm (ii) increase

18. 19. b/d 20. 10-7 m 21. d/6
2(  1)

 4 2  x
1. 2. 1:1 3. cos 1 4.
6 d 
5. 6000 Å 6. 0, 1.5mm 7. 0.63 mm, 1.575 mm
8. y = 0.085 D; D = distance between screen & slits 9. l = 5850 Å 10. /4

1. A 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. C
6. D 7. B 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. A 12. B 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. B 17. B 18. C 19. D 20. B

1. B 2. 60° 3. B 4. A 5. C
6. B 7. A,B 8. (A)  (ps), (B) (q), (C) (t), (D)  (rst)
9. C 10. D 11. B 12. D 13. A,B,C
14. 3 15. B, D 16. B, D
Page 119
Electrostatics-1 1.41

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic 5. When the distance between two charged particle is
Equillibrium + Properties of halved, the force between them becomes -
Charge
1. One quantum of charge should be at least be equal (A) One fourth (B) One half
to the charge in coloumb: (C) Double (D) Four times
(A) 1.6 × 10–17 c. (B) 1.6 × 10–19 c.
(C) 1.6 × 10 –10 c. (D). 4.8 × 10–10 c. 6. Two small balls having equal positive charge Q
(Coulomb) on each are suspended by two insulating
2. An electron at rest has a charge of 1.6 × 10–19 C. It strings of equal length 'L' metre, from a hook fixed to a
starts moving with a velocity v = c/2, where c is the stand. The whole set up is taken in a satellite in to space
speed of light, then the new charge on it is -
where there is no gravity (state of weight lessness) Then
(A) 1.6 × 10–19 Coulomb
the angle () between the two strings is -
2 (A) 0º (B) 90º
1
(B) 1.6 × 10–19 1    Coulomb
2 (C) 180º (D) 0º <  < 180º
2
 2 7. Two point charges in air at a distance of 20 cm.
(C) 1.6 × 10–19    1 Coulomb
1 from each other interact with a certain force. At
what distance from each other should these charges
1.6 1019 be placed in oil of relative permittivity 5 to obtain
(D) Coulomb the same force of interaction –
2
1
1  (A) 8.94 × 10–2 m (B) 0.894 × 10–2 m
2 –2
(C) 89.4 × 10 m (D) 8.94 × 102 m
3. Which one of the following statement regarding 8. A certain charge Q is divided at first into two parts,
electrostatics is wrong ? (q) and (Q-q). Later on the charges are placed at a
(A) Charge is quantized certain distance. If the force of interaction between
(B) Charge is conserved
the two charges is maximum then-
(C) There is an electric field near an isolated charge
(A) (Q/q) = (4/1) (B) (Q/q) = (2/1)
at rest
(D) A stationary charge produces both electric and (C)(Q/q) = (3/1) (D) (Q/q) = (5/1)
magnetic fields
9. Three equal charges (q) are placed at corners of a
4. Two similar charge of +Q , as shown in figure are equilateral triangle. The force on any charge is-
placed at A and B. –q charge is placed at point C Kq 2
midway between A and B. –q charge will oscillate if (A) Zero (B) 3
a2
Kq 2 Kq 2
(C) 2 (D) 3 3
3a a2
10. Four charges are arranged at the corners of a square

ABCD, as shown. The force on +ve charge kept
at the centre of the square is B +q –q C
(A) zero
(A) It is moved towards A.
(B) It is moved towards B. (B) along diagonal AC
(C) along diagonal BD –2q +2q
(C) It is moved upwards AB. A D
(D) Distance between A and B is reduced. (D) perpendicular to the side AB
Page 120
Section B - Electric field, Questions on 15. A particle of mass m and charge Q is placed in an
constant electric field, Electric electric field E which varies with time t ass E = E0
field due to uniformly charged
Rod, Time period of SHM + sint. It will undergo simple harmonic motion of
Electrostatics, Electric field due amplitude
to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
sheet QE 02 QE 0
(A) (B)
11. Two charges 4q and q are placed 30 cm. apart. At m2 m2
what point the value of electric field will be zero
(A) 10 cm. away from q and between the charge QE 0 QE 0
(B) 20 cm. away from q and between the charge (C) (D)
m2 m
(C) 10 cm. away from q and out side the line joining
the charge.
(D) 10 cm. away from 4q and out side the line joining 16. A small circular ring has a uniform charge distribution.
them. On a far-off axial point distance x from the centre of
the ring, the electric field is proportional to-
12. A point charge 50C is located in the XY plane at (A) x–1 (B) x–3/2

the point of position vector r0  2iˆ  3jˆ . What is (C) x–2 (D) x5/4
the electric field at the point of position vector
 17. A nonconducting ring of radius R has uniformly
r  8iˆ  5j
ˆ
distributed positive charge Q. A small part of the
(A) 1200 V/m (B) 0.04 V/m
ring, of length d, is removed (d<<R). The electric
(C) 900 V/m (D) 4500 V/m
field at the centre of the ring will now be -
  (A) directed towards the gap, inversely proportional
13. A point charge q is placed at origin. Let E A , E B and
to R3.

E C be the electric field at three points A(1, 2, 3), (B) directed towards the gap, inversely proportional
B(1, 1, –1) and C(2, 2, 2) due to charge q. Then to R2.
    (C) directed away from the gap, inversely proportional
[i] E A E B [ii] | E B |  4 |E C |
to R3.
select the correct alternative
(A) only [i] is correct (B) only [ii] is correct (D) directed away from the gap, inversely proportional
(C) both [i] and [ii] are correct to R2.
(D) both [i] and [ii] are wrong
18. Six charges three positive and three negative of equal
14. Two identical point charges are placed at a separation magnitude are to be placed at the vertices of a regular
of l.P is a point on the line joining the charges, at a hexagon such that the electric field at O is double
distance x from any one charge. The field at P is E. the electric field when only one positive charge of
E is plotted against x for values of x from close to
same magnitude is placed at R. Which of the
zero to slightly less than l. Which of the following
following arrangements of charges is possible for
best represents the resulting curve ?
P,Q,R,S,T and U respectively?
E E
P Q
(A) (B) U R
x x O
O L O L
E E
T S
(A) +, –,+, –,–, +, (B) +, –,+, –,+, –,
L L x (C) +, +,–, +,–, –, (D) –, +,+, –,+, –,
(C) O x (D) O
Page 121
19. The charge per unit length of the four quadrant of 23. Three charges are placed as shown in fig if the electric
the ring is 2, –2,  and – respectively. The electric potential energy of system is zero, then Q : q-
field at the centre is -

(A) – 2 R î
0
 ˆ
(B) 2 R j Q 2 Q 2
0 (A) q  1 (B) q  1
2 Q 1 Q 1 1
(C)
2 0 R
î (C) q  2 (D) q  2
4
(D) None
24. Four equal charges +q are placed at four corners
20. A uniform horizontal electric field E is established in of a square with its centre of origin and lying in yz
the space between two large vertical parallel plates. plane. The electrostatic potential energy of a fifth
A small conducting sphere of mass m is suspended charge +q varies or x-axis as
in the field from a string of lengt L. If the sphere is
U U
given charge + q, then te period of oscillation of the
pendulum is (A) (B)
–x x –x x
L
(A) 2 L / g (B) 2 g  qE / m U U
(C) (D)
L –x x –x x
(C) 2 g  qE / m
25. Two particles X and Y, of equal mass and with
L unequal positive charges, are free to move and are
(D) 2 initially far away from each other. With Y at rest, X
g  (qE / m)2
2
begins to move towards it with initial velocity u.
After a long time, finally.
Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, (A) X will stop, Y will move with velocity u
Question Based on energy (B) X and Y will both move with velocities u/2 each
conservation and Angular
Momentum conservation,
(C) X will stop, Y will move with velocity < u
Potential energy for a system (D) both will move with velocities <u/2
of charged particles
21. When a negative charge is released and moves in 26. Three charges Q, + q and + q are placed at the
electric field, it moves toward a position of vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle as shown
(A) lower electric potential and lower potential energy in figure. The net electrostatic energy of the
(B) lower electric potential and higher potential energy configuartion is zero if Q equal to
(C) higher electric potential and lower potential energy
(D) higher electric potential and higher potential energy Q
22. Two identical particles of mass m carry a charge Q

each. Initially one is at rest on a smooth horizontal
plane and the other is projected along the plane
directly towards first particle from a large distance
+q +q
with speed v. The closed distance of approach be
a
1 Q2 1 4Q 2
(A) (B)
4 0 mv 4 0 mv 2 q 2q
(A) (B)
1 2 2 2
1 2Q 2 1 3Q 2
(C) (D) (C) –2q (D) +q
4 0 mv 2 4 0 mv 2
Page 122
27. Three point charges q, –2 q and –2 q are placed at 31. If mass of the electron = 9.1 × 10–31 Kg. Charge on the
the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The electron = 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb and g = 9.8 m/s2. Then
work done by some external force to increase their the intensity of the electric field required to balance
separation to 2 a will be the weight of an electron is-
1 2q 2 (A) 5.6 × 10-9 N/C (B) 5.6 × 10–11 N/C
(A) . (B) negative –8
(C) 5.6 × 10 N/C (D) 5.6 × 10–7 N/C
4 0 a
1 3q 2 32. When charge of 3 coulomb is placed in a Uniform

(C) zero (D) .
4 0 a electric field, it experiences a force of 3000 newton,
within this field, potential difference between two
28. A particle of mass m and charge q is projected points separated by a distance of 1 cm is-
 (A) 10 Volt (B) 90 Volt
vertically upwards. A uniform electric field E is acted
(C) 1000 Volt (D) 3000 Volt.
vertically downwards. The most appropriate graph
between potential energy U (gravitational plus
electrostatic) and height h (<< radius of earth) is 33. Three equal charges are placed at the three corners
(assume U to be zero on surface of earth.) of an isosceles triangle as shown in the figure. The
U U statement which is true for electric potential V and
the field intensity E at the centre of the triangle is-
(A) (B)
h h
U U
(A) V = 0, E = 0 (B) V = 0, E  0
(C) (D) (C) V  0 , E =0 (D) V  0, E  0
h h
34. Electric potential is a -
(A) Vector quantity
Section D - Electric Potential, Relation
(B) Scalar quantity
between E and V., Potential due
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc, (C) Neither vector Nor scalar
Question Based on Electric field (D) Fictious quantity
intensity, and electric potential,
Questions Based on electric
field lines 35. ABC is equilateral triangle of side 1m. Charges are
29. If Q =2 coloumb and force on it is F=100 newtons, placed at its corners as shown in fig. O is the mid-
Then the value of field intensity will be - point of side BC the potential at point (O) is-
(A) 100 N/C (B) 50 N/C
(C) 200 N/C (D) 10 N/C
30. Four equal but like charge are placed at four corners of
a square. The electric field intensity at the center of the
square due to any one charge is E, then the resultant
electric field intensity at centre of square will be :
(A) Zero (B) 4E
(C) E (D) 1/2E (A) 2.7 × 103 V (B) 1.52 × 105 V
(C) 1.3 × 103 V (D) – 1.52 × 105 V
Page 123
36. Uniform electric field of magnitude 100 V/m in space 41. If the given figure shows equipotential surfaces, then
is directed along the line y = 3 + x. Find the potential the magnitude of electric field is
difference between point A(3, 1) & B(1, 3) 80V
60V
(A) 100 V (B) 200 2 V 40V
20V
(C) 200 V (D) 0
30°
Section E - Equipotential surface 10cm
37. An equipotential surface and a line of force :

(A) never intersect each other
(A) 50 N/C (B) 100 N/C
(B) intersect at 45°
(C) 200 M/C (D) 400 N/C
(C) intersect at 60°
(D) intersect at 90° 42. An equipotential surface is that surface -
(A) On which each and every point has the same
38. The equation of an equipotential line in an electric potential
field is y = 2x, then the electric field strength vector (B) Which has negative potential
at (1, 2) may be (C) Which has positive potential
(D) Which has zero potential
(A) 4iˆ  3ˆj (B) 4iˆ  8ˆj
(C) 8iˆ  4ˆj (D) –8iˆ  4ˆj Section F - Electric field and electric
potential due to electric dipole,
Dipole in electric field (Torque,
39. The electric field in region is given by : potential energy), Angular SHM
for dipole, Force on electric
E = (4axy z ) i + (2ax2 z ) j + (ax2y / z ) k , dipole in Non-uniform electric
field
where a is a positive constant. The equation of an 43. A and B are two points on the axis and the perpendicular
equipotential surface will be of the form - bisector respectively of an electric dipole. A and B are
(A) z = constant / [x3y2] far away from the dipole and at equal distance from it.
(B) z = constant / [xy2]  
The field at A and B are E A and E B .
(C) z = constant / [x4y2]
(D) None  
(A) E A  E B
 
40. Figure shows three spherical and equipotential (B) E A  2 E B
surfaces 1, 2 and 3 around a point charge q. The  
(C) E A  –2 E B
potential difference V! – V2 = V2 – V3. If t1 and t2
be the distance between them, then 1  
(D) | E B | = |EA|, and E B is perpendicular to E A
3 2
2
1
q 44. If an electric dipole is kept in a unifrom electric field,
t2 t1
Then it will experience
(A) a force
(B) a couple and mover
(C) a couple and rotates
(A) t1 = t2 (B) t1>t2 (D) a force and moves.
(C) t1 < t2 (D) t1 t2
Page 124
45. An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges each 49. The electric potential at a point due to an electric
of magnitude 1 × 10–6 C separated by a distance 2cm. dipole will be.
The dipole is placed in an external field of    
10 × 105N/C. The maximum torque on the dipole is - p.r p.r
(A) k (B) k
(A) 0.2 × 10–3 N-m (B) 1.0 × 10–3 N-m r3 r2
(C) 2 × 10-2 N-m (D) 4 × 10–3 N-m
   
k(p r ) k(p r )
(C) (D)
46. The ratio of the electric field due to an electric dipole r r2
on its axis and on the perpendicular bisector of the
50. A dipole consists of two particles one with charge
dipole is-
+1 C and mass 1kg and the other with charge
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
–1C and mass 2kg separated by a distance of 3m.
(C) 1 : 4 (D) 4 : 1
For small oscillations about its equilibrium position,
the angular frequency, when placed in a uniform
47. 4 charges are placed each at a distance ‘a’ from
electric field of 20kV/m is
origin. The dipole moment of configuration is
(A) 0.1 rad/s (B) 1.1 rad/s
y
3q
(C) 10 rad/s (D) 2.5 rad/s
x
–2q –2q 51. Two short electric dipoles are placed as shown. The
q
energy of electric interaction between these dipoles
(A) 2qajˆ (B) 3qajˆ will be
P1
(C) 2aq[iˆ  ˆj] (D) none
r
48. The region surrounding a stationary electric dipole has- P2
(A) electric field only 2 kP1P2 cos  2 kP1P2 cos 

(A) (B)
(B) magnetic field only r3 r3
(C) both electric and magnetic fields
2 kP1P2 sin  4 kP1P2 cos 
(D) neither electric nor magnetic field (C) (D)
r3 r3
Page 125

1. B 2. A 3. D 4. C 5. D 6. C 7. A
8. B 9. B 10. D 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. D
15. B 16. C 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. D 21. C
22. B 23. D 24. B 25. A 26. B 27. C 28. A
29. B 30. A 31. B 32. A 33. C 34. B 35. B
36. D 37. D 38. D 39. C 40. C 41. D 42. A
43. C 44. C 45. C 46. B 47. A 48. A 49. A
50. A 51. B

1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. B
8. A 9. B 10. D 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. B
15. B 16. B 17. B 18. D 19. C 20. D 21. A
22. B 23. C 24. D 25. A 26. B 27. C 28. D
29. A 30. A 31. B 32. C 33. A 34. B 35. B
36. D

1. C,D 2. A,B,C 3. C,D 4. B,C 5. A,B,D
6. A,C 7. B,C,D 8. A,D 9. A,C 10. B,D
11. A,C 12. B,C,D 13. A,C,D 14. A,C 15. A, B,C
16. B,C
1. a = l (1 + 2 ), the equilibrium will be stable

2
2. from charge 4e (If q is positive stable, If q is negative unstable)
3
d 4 Qq qQ
3. , , 4. 5. 1 6. 2 7. 9 8. 0
2 2 3 3 πε0d2 8  2 0r 2
3
3/2
1 1
9. – 3 × 10–9C 10. W = Kqq0  –  = 1.2 J 11. K/2qD 12. 4d
11  rB rA 
13. Following two arguments shall lead us to the right choice.
i. Electric field at the center of the ring is zero.
ii. Electric field is directed away from the ring.
2kQ 2 Qq K Q2
14. 6 15. 5 16. 17. (a) 4  K (b) 18.
mR 0 m m 0V
2
kq2 4Kq2 3 1
19. 1.8 × 105 sec 20. – (3 – 2 ) 21. (i) 3 
a a 2 3
2Kq2 3 1 Kq2 3 1 2Kq2 3 1 Kq2 3 1

(ii) Wel  a
3  (iii) 2ma
3  (iv) ma
3  (v) ma
3 
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Page 126

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux 5. A cylinder of radius (R) and length (L) is placed
for various configuration, in a uniform electrical field (E) parallel to the axis
Question on solid angle of the cyclinder . the total flux for the surface of
concept, Gauss law Based the cylinder is given by-
Questions
(A) 2R2E (B) R2 E
1. Statement - 1 : The flux crossing through a closed
surface is independent of the location of encloses R 2  R 2
charge. (C) (D) zero
E
Statement - 2 : Upon the displacement of charges

within a closed surface, the E at any point on surface 6. The volume charge density as a function of distance
does not change. X from one face inside a unit cube is varying as
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and shown in the figure. Then the total flux (in S.I. units)
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1. through the cube if (0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C/m3) is :
(B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for density
statement - 1.
0
x
1/4 3/4 1 (in m)
2. Statement - 1 : Electric field of a dipole can't be
found using only Gauss law. (i.e. without using (A) 1/4 (B) 1/2
superposition principle) (C) 3/4 (D) 1
Statement - 2 : Gauss law is valid only for
symmetrical charge distribution 7. A hemisphere (radius R) is placed in electric field
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and as shown in fig. Total outgoing flux is -
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
statement - 1.
3. In a region of space, the electric field is in the x

 (A) R2 E (B) 2R2 E
direction and is given as E  E0 x i . Consider an
(C) 4R2 E (D) (R2 E)/2
imaginary cubical volume of edge a, with its edges
parallel to the axes of coordinates. The charge inside 8. A surface enclosed an electric dipole, the flux
this volume is through the surface is-
(A) zero (B)  0E0 a3 (A) Infinite (B) Positive
(C) Negative (D) Zero
1 3 1
(C)  E0 a (D)  0E0 a 2
0 6 9. Electric charges are distributed in a small volume.
The flux of the electric field through a spherical
4. Electric flux through a surface of area 100 m2 lying surface of radius 20 cm surrounding the total charge
 is 50 V-m. The flux over a concentric sphere of
in the xy plane is (in V-m) if E  i  2 j  3 k
radius 40 cm will be –
(A) 100 (B) 141.4 (A) 25 V-m (B) 50 V-m
(C) 173.2 (D) 200 (C) 100 V-m (D) 200 V-m
Page 127
A uniform electric field  ˆ a

10. E = a î + b j , intersects a 15. A point charge q is placed at a distance directly
2
surface of area A. What is the flux through this area above the centre of a horizontal square of side ‘a’
if the surface lies in the yz plane –
and another point charge q is placed at a distance
(A) aA (B) 0
‘a’ directly below one of its (the square’s) corners.
(C) bA (D) A a 2  b 2 The electric flux through the square is :
q q
11. A uniformly charged and infinitely long line having (A) 6  (B) 8 
a linear charge density ‘’ is placed at a normal 0 0
distance y from a point O. Consider a sphere of q 5q

radius R with O as centre and R > y. Electric flux (C) 24  ((D) 24 
0 0
through the surface of the sphere is-
2 R
(A) zero (B)  16. The electric field intensity at the centre of a
0 uniformly charged hemispherical shell is E0. Now
two portions of the hemisphere are cut from either
2 R 2  y 2  R 2  y2
(C) (D) side and remaining portion is shown in figure. If
0 0

a=b= , then electric field intensity at centre due
12. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 3
1 mm and 2 mm are separated by a distance of 5 to remaining portion is :
cm and are uniformly charged. If the spheres are
connected by a conducting wire, then in equilibrium
condition, the ratio of the magnitude of the electric
fields at the surfaces of spheres A and B is
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 2  
(C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 4
13. A point charge q is placed at the center of a

E0 E0
 1  (A) (B)
spherical shell of radius R =   m. Electric 3 6
 
E0
flux through a position of sphere having surface (C) (D) Information insufficient
area = 0.2 m2 is : 2
q q Section B - Properties of conductors

(A) (B)
o 20 o 17. Statement - 1 : If a concentric spherical Gaussian
surface is drawn inside thin spheical shell of charge,
q 0.2 q
(C) (D) electric field (E) at each point of surface must be
10 o o zero.
Statement - 2 : In accordance with Gauss's law
14. A wire of linear charge  passes through a cuboids
  Qnet enclosed
of length l, breadth b and height h in such a manner E  ฀ E.dA  0
that flux through the cuboids is maximum. The
position of wire is now changed so that the flux Q net enclosed  0 implies E  0
through the cuboids is minimum. If l > b > h then
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
the ratio of maximum flux to minimum flux will be :
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
l 2  b2  h2 l 2  b2 (B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
(A) (B) statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
h h
statement - 1.
h l (C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
(C) (D)
l 2  b2 l 2  b2  h2 (D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.
Page 128
18. Statement - 1 : In a given situation of arrangement 21. Figure shows two large cylindrical shells having
of charges, an extra charge is placed outside the uniform linear charge densities + and –. Radius
Gaussian surface. In the Gauss Theorem of inner cylinder is 'a' and that of outer cylinder is
  Qin 'b'. A charged particle of mass m, charge q revolves
฀ E.dA  0 in a circle of radius r, Then its speed 'v' is : (Neglect
 gravity and assume the radii of both the cylinders
Qin remains unchanged whereas electric field E at
the site of the element is changed. to be very small in comparison to their length.)

Statement - 2 : Electric field E at any point on the
Gaussian surface is due to inside charge only.
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1. – 
r
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
statement - 1. v
a
b
19. An infinite, uniformly charged sheet with surface

charge density  cuts through a spherical Gaussian
surface of radius R at a distance x from its center, q 2q
as shown in the figure. The electric flux  through (A) 2 0 m (B)  0 m
the Gaussian surface is
 R2  q q
(A) (C)  0 m (D) 4  0 m
0
2 (R 2  x 2 )
(B) 0
R 22. The net charge given to an isolated conducting solid
x
sphere :
(R  x ) 2  (A) must be distributed uniformly on the surface
(C)
0 (B) may be distributed uniformly on the surface
(C) must be distributed uniformly in the volume
 (R2  x2 ) (D) may be distributed uniformly in the volume.
(D) 0
23. The net charge given to a solid insulating sphere:

20. Three charges q1 = 1 c , q2 =2 c and q3 = –3 c and (A) must be distributed uniformly in its volume
four surfaces S1, S2, S3 and S4 are shown. The flux (B) may by distributed uniformly in its volume.
emerging through surface S2 in N-m2 / C is - (C) must be distributed uniformly on its surface.
(D) the distribution will depend upon whether other
charges are present or not.
24. You are travelling in a car during a thunder storm.

In order to protect yoursefl from lightening, would
you prefer to :
(A) Remain in the car
(B) Take shelter under a tree
(A) 36  × 103 (B) –36  × 103
(C) Get out and be flat on the ground
(C) 36  × 109 (D) –36  × 109
(D) Touch the nearest electrical pole
Page 129
25. A spherical conductor A contains two spherical 29. Two sperical conductors B and C having equal radii
cavities. The total charge on the conductor itself is and carrying equal charges in them repel each other
zero. However, there is a point charge q b at the with a force F when kept apart at some distance. A
centre of one cavity and qc at the centre of the
third spherical conductor having same radius as that
other. At an equal distance r away from the centre
of the spherical conductor, there is another charge of B but uncharged, is brought in contact with B,
qd. Force acting on qb, qc and qd are F1, F2 and F3 then brought in contact with C and finally removed
respectively. [Assume all charges are positive] away from both. The new force of repulsion
qd between B and C is
F 3F
(A) (B)
4 4
qb
qc
F 3F
(C) (D)
8 8
(A) F1 < F2 < F3 (B) F1 = F2 < F3
(C) F1 = F2 > F3 (D) F1 > F2 > F3
30. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S. which
26. Electric lines of force are as shown in the figure. makes an angle  with a large charged conducting
Then potential at point P : sheet P, as shown in the figure. The surface charge
density  of the sheet is proportional to
+
P +
P +
+ S
+
(A) is zero (B) is not zero +
+ B
(C) may be zero also (D) is not defined
27. The figure shows a charge q placed inside a cavity (A) cos (B) cot 
in an uncharged conductor. Now if an external (C) sin  (D) tan 
electric field is switched on then :
31. A conducting liquid bubble of radius a and thickness
C t (t<<a) is charged to potential V. If the bubble
q
collapses to a droplet, find the potential on the droplet.
1/ 3 2
 a  2a 
(A) only induced charge on outer surface will (A)   V (B)   V
 3t   t 
redistribute.
(B) only induced charge on inner surface will 3 1/ 3
a  2t 
redistribute (C)   V (D)   V
(C) Both induced charge on outer and inner surface t  a
will redistribute.
32. In the given fig. the charge appears on the sphere is
(D) force on charge q placed inside the cavity will
change
28. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a
charge q. Another charge Q is placed at the centre q
of the shell. The electrostatic potential at a point P r
at a distance R/2 from the centre fo the shell is
2Q 2Q 2q d
(A) (B) 
4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R qd
(A) q (B)
2Q q (q  Q) 2 r
(C)  (D) qr
4 0 R 4  0 R 4 0 R (C) – (D) zero
d
Page 130
Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics 37. Statement - 1 : A point charge q is placed inside a
pressure cavity of conductor as shown. Another point charge
(Questions 33 to 34) Q is placed outside the conductor as shown. Now as
Both question (33) and (34) refer to the system of the point charge Q pushed away from conductor,
charges as shown in the figure. A spherical shell the potential difference (VA – VB) between two point
with an inner radius ‘a’ and an outer radius ‘b’ is A and B within the cavity of sphere remains constant.
Statement - 2 : The electric field due to charges
made of conducting material. A point charge +Q is
on outer surface of conductor and outside the
placed at the centre of the spherical shell and a conductor is zero at all points inside the conductor.
total charge –q is placed on the shell.
Q a
A B Q
–q
q
33. charge –q is distributed on the surfaces as
(A) –Q on the inner surface, – q on outer surface
(B) –Q on the inner surface, – q + Q on the outer surface
(C) +Q on the inner surface, – q – Q on the outer surface
(D) The charge –q is spread uniformly between (A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
the inner and outer surface statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
34. Assume that the electrostatic potential is zero at an statement-2 is NOT correct explanation for
infinite distance from the spherical shell. The statement-1.
electrostatic potential at a distance R(a < R < b) (C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
from the centre of the shell is (D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.
(A) 0
KQ Qq 38. A solid sphere of radius R is charged uniformly. At
(B) (C) K what distance from its surface is the electrostatic
a R
Qq potential half of the potential at the centre ?
1
(D) K (where K  ) (A) R (B) R/2
b 4  0
35. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged (C) R/3 (D) 2R
such that the potential on its surface is 10 V. The
39. Two similar conducting spherical shells having
potential at the centre of the sphere is
charges 40 C and –20C are some distance apart.
(A) 0 V (B) 10 V
Now they are touched and kept at same distance.
(C) same as at point 5 cm away from the surface
The ratio of the initial to the final force between
out side sphere
them is :
(D) same as a point 25 cm away from the surface
(A) 8 : 1 (B) 4 : 1
36. A positively charged body ‘A’ has been brought near (C) 1 : 8 (D) 1 : 1
a neutral brass sphere B mounted on a glass stand
as shown in the figure. The potetial of B will be: 40. n small drops of same size are charged to V volts
each. If they coalesce to form a signal large drop,
B then its potential will be -
+ ++ (A) V/n (B) Vn
++ ++ (C) Vn1/3 (D) Vn2/3
++ ++
+
A ++
41. 1000 identical drops of mercury are charged to a
potential of 1 V each. They join to form a single
(A) Zero (B) Negative drop. The potential of this drop will be -
(C) Positive (D) Infinite (A) 0.01 V (B) 0.1 V
(C) 10 V (D) 100 V
Page 131
42. A solid conducting sphere having a charge Q is Q

surrounded by an uncharged concentric conducting
hollow spherical shell Let the potential difference C
A
between the surface of the solid sphere and that of q1
the outer surface of the hollow shell be V. If the B
q2
shell is now given a charge of 3Q the new potential
difference between the same two surfaces is
(A) V (B) 2V q1  q2 q1  q2
(A) , ,Q
(C) 4V (D) –2V 2 2
Q  q1  q3 Q  q1  q2 Q  q1  q2
43. A positive charge q is placed in a spherical cavity (B) , ,
made in a positively charged sphere. The centres 3 3 3
of sphere and cavity are displaced by a small q1  q2  Q q1  q2  Q
 (C) , ,0
distance l . Force on charge q is : 2 3
 (D) 0, 0, Q + q1 + q2
(A) in the direction parallel to vector l
(B) in radial direction 48. There are four concentric shells A, B, C and D of
(C) in a direction which depends on the magnitude radii a, 2a, 3a and 4a respectively. Shells B and D
of charge density in sphere are given charges +q and –q respectively. Shell C is
(D) direction can not be determined now earthed. The potential difference VA – VC is :
44. If the electric potential of the inner metal sphere is Kq Kq Kq Kq

(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 volt & that of the outer shell is 5 volt, then the 2a 3a 4a 6a
potential at the centre will be -
Section D - Plates
a 49. An uncharged sphere of metal is placed in a uniform
b electric field produced by two large conducting
parallel plates having equal and opposite charges,
(A) 10 volt (B) 5 volt then lines of force look like :
(C) 15 volt (D) 0 + + + + ++ + + + + ++
45. Two identical conducting spheres, having charges of

opposite sign, attract each other with a force of 0.108 (A) (B)
N when separated by 0.5 m. The spheres are connected ––––––– – – – ––
by a conducting wire, which is then removed, and + + + + + + + + +
+
thereafter, they repel each other with a force of 0.036
N. The initial charges on the spheres are
(A) ± 5 × 10–6 C and  15 × 10–6 C (C) (D)
(B) ± 1.0 × 10–6 C and  3.0 × 10–6 C – – – – –
– – – – –
(C) ± 2.0 × 10–6 C and  6.0 × 10–6 C
50. Between two infinitely long wires having linear
(D) ± 0.5 × 10–6 C and  1.5 × 10–6 C charge densities  and – there are two points A
and B as shown in the figure. The amount of work
46. Three concentric metallic spherical shell A, B and
done by the electric field in moving a point charge
C or radii a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge
q0 from A to B is equal to
densities –, +, and – respectively. The potential
of shell A is -
(A) (/0)[a + b – c] (B) (/0)[a – b + c]
(C) (/0)[b – a – c] (D) none
47. Two small conductors A and B are given charges

q1 and q2 respectively. Now they are placed inside q
0 2q 0
a hollow metallic conductor (C) carrying a charge (A) 2 ln 2 (B) – ln 2
Q. If all the three conductors A, B and C are 0  0
connected by a conducting wire as shown, the 2q 0 q 0
charges on A, B and C will be respectively. (C) ln 2 (D)  ln 2
 0 0
Page 132

1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. C 7. A
8. D 9. B 10. A 11. C 12. C 13. B 14. A
15. D 16. C 17. D 18. C 19. D 20. B 21. A
22. A 23. B 24. A 25. B 26. C 27. A 28. C
29. D 30. D 31. A 32. C 33. B 34. D 35. B
36. C 37. A 38. C 39. A 40. D 41. D 42. A
43. A 44. A 45. B 46. C 47. D 48. D 49. C
50. D

1. C 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. D 7. C
8. A 9. B 10. A 11. A 12. A 13. C 14. D
15. D 16. C 17. B 18. D 19. D 20. B 21. B
22. D 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. A 27. B 28. A
29. D 30. A 31. B 32. B 33. A 34. C 35. B

1. A,B,C 2. A,B,C 3. A, C 4. ABCD 5. C,D
6. A,B 7. ABC 8. BC 9. ACD 10. A,B,C
11. C,D 12. AD 13. A,C,D 14. A,C,D 15. A,C,D

1. There is a positive charge in the close surface.
q R R
2. 24 0 3. a= 4. 2 0 5. –8.85 × 10–7C
3
6. 40 V-m 7. /2 8. 3 /0 9. q / 20 10. q / 20 11. E
qR 1 Q
12. – Q, non-uniformly distributed 13.  14.
 4 0 r
Q Q Q  Q
15. charge on one side is – EA0 and other side + EA0 16. K  R 17.
2 2 R 4 0 4 0 R
q Qq  q2  1 1 
A   
18. –2C 19. 4R12 (Non Uniform), 4R 22 (Uniform) 20.  8  a b 
 0 
Q 1 qQ
21. 2 0 22. 2 4 0mR 3
23. 9V 0
r  r 
(i)  r q
1
24. (ii) Charge on inner shell = –  1  q and charge on the outer shell = q
 2  r2 
r  kq
(iii) Charge flown in to the earth = –q  1  25. v
 r2  r
Page 133

Section A - Definition of Current, Current 7. A wire has a non-uniform cross-section as shown in
Density, Drift Velocity figure. A steady current flows through it. The drift
1. The electric current in a discharge tube containing a speed of electrons at points P and q is vp and vQ.
gas is due to
(A) electron only
(B) positive ions only
(C) negative ion and positive ions both
P Q
(D) electrons and positive ions both
2. When a potential difference (V) is applied across a

conductor , the thermal speed of electrons is (A) vp = vQ (B) vp < vQ
(A) zero (C) vp > vQ (D) Data insufficient
(B) proportional to T
(C) proportional to (T) 8. A current (I) flows through a uniform wire of
(D) proportional to V diameter (d) when the mean drift velocity is V. The
same current will flow through a wire of diameter
3. A steady current is passing through a linear
d/2 made of the same material if the mean drift
conductor of non-uniform cross-section. The
current density in the conductor is velocity of the electron is
(A) independent of area of cross-section (A) V/4 (B) V/2
(B) directly proportional to area of cross-section (C) 4V (D) 2V
(C) inversely proportional to area of cross-section
(D) inversely proportional to the square root of
Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's
area of cross-section
law + VI (Volt - Curr.)
4. Two wires each of radius of cross section r but of Characteristics + Colour Code
different materials are connected together end to + Temp. Dependence
end (in series). If the densities of charge carriers in
the two wires are in the ratio 1 : 4, the drift velocity
9. A carbon resistor is marked with the rings coloured brown,
of electrons in the two wires will be in the ratio.
black, green and gold. The resistance (in ohm) is -
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
(A) 3.2 × 105 ± 5 % (B) 1 × 106 ± 10 %
(C) 4 : 1 (D) 1 : 4 7
(C) 1 × 10 ± 5 % (D) 1 × 106 ± 5 %
5. In a wire of cross-section radius r, free electrons
travel with drift velocity v when a current flows 10. The resistance of a semi-conductors
through the wire. What is the current in another (A) increases with increase of temperature
wire of half the radius and of the same material
(B) decreases with increase of temperature
when the drift velocity is 2v ?
(A) 2I (B) I (C) does not charge with charge of temperature
(C) I/2 (D) I/4 (D) first decreases and then increases with increase
of temperature
6. An insulating pipe of cross-section area ‘A’ contains
an electrolyte which has two types of ions  their
11. A hollow copper tube of 5 m length has got
charges being –e and +2e. A potential difference
applied between the ends of the pipe result in the external diameter equal to 10 cm and the walls are
drifting of the two types of ions, having drift speed = v 5 mm thick. If specific resistance of copper is
(–ve ion) and v/4 (+ ve ion). Both ions have the same 1.7 × 10-8 ohm × metre. calculate the resistance of
number per unit volume = n. The current flowing the tube.
through the pipe is (A) 5.77 × 105 (B) 5.77 × 10-5
(A) nev A/2 (B) nev A/4
(C) 5.77 × 10-7 (D) 5.77 × 107
(C) 5nev A/2 (D) 3nev A/2
Page 134
CURRENT 3.35
12. In order to increase the resistance of a given wire 16. A rectangular carbon block has dimensions
of uniform cross section to four times its value, a 1.0 cm × 1.0 cm × 50 cm. Resistances are
fraction of its length is stretched uniformly till the measured, first across two square ends and then
across two rectangular ends, respectively. If
3
full length of the wire becomes times the original resistivity of carbon is 3.5 × 10–5 -m, then values
2
of measured resistances respectively are :
length what is the value of this fraction ?
1 1
(A) (B)
4 8
1 1
(C) (D)
16 6 50 cm
1cm
13. A conductor with rectangular cross section has
dimensions (a × 2a × 4a) as shown in figure. 1cm
Resistance across AB is x, across CD is y and
across EF is z. Then 35
(A) 10 2 , 7 10  5
2
C F 5 15
(B) 7 10 , 10  2
2
2a 35
A
B (C) 10  4 , 7 10  7
4a a 2
15
(D) , 7 10 2
E D 2
(A) x = y = z (B) x > y > z Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,
(C) y > z > x (D) x > z > y Battery, Grouping of cells
17. In the circuit shown, what is the potential
14. A piece of copper and another of germanium are difference VPQ ?
cooled from room temperature to 80K. The resistance of
Q
(A) each of them increases
(B) each of them decreases 2V 4V
(C) copper increases and germanium decreases 1V
(D) copper decreases and germanium increases P
(A) + 3V (B) + 2V
15. The current in a metallic conductor is plotted (C) – 2V (D) none
against voltage at two different temperatures T1
and T2. Which is correct 18. The equivalent resistance between points A and B is :
65 A
2 15
(A) B
T1 2
Current
T2 45
(B) 8 10
2
5
Voltage (C)
2
20 10
(A) T1 > T2 (B) T1 < T2 91
(C) T1 = T2 (D) none (D) 30 40
2
Page 135
19. Consider an infinte ladder network shown in figure. 24. In the figure shown, battery 1 has emf = 6V and
A voltage V is applied between the points A and B. internal resistance = 1 . Battery 2 has emf = 2V
This applied value of voltage is halved after each and internal resistance = 3 . The wires have
section. negligible resistance. What is the potential
difference across the terminals of battery 2?
R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
A
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 1
1
R
(A) R1/R2 = 1 (B) R1/R2 = 1/2 3
(C) R1/R2 = 2 (D) R1/R2 = 3
2
20. In the diagram resistance between any two
junctions is R. Equivalent resistance across terminals (A) 4V (B) 1.5V
A and B is (C) 5V (D) 0.5V
r r
25.  i i 
(a) (b)
A B r r
 
11R 18R (No current) (d)
(A) (B)
7 11 (c)
7R 11R In which of the above cells, the potential difference

(C) (D)
11 18 between the terminals of a cell exceeds its emf.
(A) a (B) b
21. A storage battery is connected to a charger for (C) c (D) d
charging with a voltage of 12.5 Volts. The internal
resistance of the storage battery is 1 . When the 26. The diagram besides shows a circuit used in an
charging current is 0.5 A, the emf of the storage experiment to determine the emf and internal
battery is : resistance of the cell C. A graph was plotted of the
(A) 13 Volts (B) 12.5 Volts potential difference V between the terminals of the
(C) 12 Volts (D)11.5 Volts cell against the current I, which was varied by
adjusting the rheostat. The graph is shown on the right;
22. The terminal voltage across a battery of emf E can be x and y are the intercepts of the graph with the axes
(A) 0 (B) > E as shown. What is the internal resistance of the cell ?
(C) < E (D) all of above
V(V)
23. One end of a Nichrome wire of length 2L and cross- C
sectional area A is attatched to an end of
another Nichrome wire of length L and cross-sectional V
area 2A. If the free end of the longer wire is at an
electric potential of 8.0 volts, and the free end of the A
shorter wire is at an electric potential of 1.0 volt, the I(A)
potential at the junction of the two wires is equal to
(A) 2.4 V (B) 3.2 V (A) x (B) y
(C) 4.5 V (D) 5.6 V (C) x/y (D) y/x
Page 136
CURRENT 3.37
27. A cell of emf E has an internal resistance r & is P R Q
connected to rheostat. When resistance R of R

rheostat is changed correct graph of potential
difference across it is R R
R
V V
(A) 7 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 5
(A) (B)
R R 31. For the following circuits, the potential
difference between X and Y in volt is –
V V
(C) (D)
R R
28. A circuit is comprised of eight identical batteries

and a resistor R = 0.8 . Each battery has an emf 2 4 8 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
of 1.0 V and internal resistance of 0.2 . The voltage 3 3 9 3
difference across any of the battery is
32. In a closed circuit the sum of total emf is
equal to the sum of the –
(A) currents
(B) resistances
(C) products of current and the resistances
(A) 0.5 V (B) 1.0 V

(C) 0 V (D) 2 V Section E - Electrical Power & Energy
33. A line having a total resistance of 0.5 deliver 15kW
29. Two batteries one of the emf 3V, internal at 240 V to a small factory. The efficiency of
resistance 1 ohm and the other of emf 15 V, internal transmission is:
resistance 2 ohm are connected in series with a (A) 60% (B) 79%
resistance R as shown. If the potential difference (C) 89 % (D) 97%
between a and b is zero the resistance of R in ohm is
34. The battery in the diagram is to be charged by the
a b generator G. The generator has a terminal
voltage of 120 volts when the charging current is
3V,1 15V,2
10 amperes. The battery has an emf of 100 volts
and an internal resistance of 1 ohm. In order to
R charge the battery at 10 amperes charging current,
the resistance R should be set at
(A) 5 (B) 7
R
(C) 3 (D) 1
+
G
30. The equivalent resistance between the –
– +
terminal point P and Q is 4 in the given
100 V,1
circuit, then find out the resistance of R in
ohms – (A) 0.1 (B) 0.5
(C) 1.0 (D) 5.0
Page 137
35. A resistor of resistance R is connected to a cell of 41. If the length of the filament of a heater is reduced
internal resistane 5 . The value of R is varied from by 10%, the power of the heater will
1 to 5 . The power consumed by R : (A) increase by about 9%
(A) increases continuously (B) increase by about 11%
(B) decreases continuously (C) increase by about 19%
(C) first decreases then increases (D) decrease by about 10%
(D) first increases then decreases.
42. A heater A gives out 300 W of heat when connected
36. Power generated across a uniform wire connected to a 200 V d.c. supply. A second heater B gives out
across a supply is H. If the wire is cut into n equal 600 W when connected to a 200 v d.c. supply. If a
parts and all the parts are connected in parallel series combination of the two heaters is connected
across the same supply, the total power generated to a 200 V d.c. supply the heat output will be
in the wire is (A) 100 W (B) 450 W
H (C) 300 W (D) 200 W
(A) (B) n2H
n2
(C) nH (D)
H Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
n Verifying ohm's law & Specific
Resistance Using Meter Brige &
37. A constant voltage is applied between the two ends Post Office + Potentiometer
of a uniform metallic wire. Some heat is developed (EMF & Int. Res.)
in it. The heat developed is doubled if 43. If an ammeter is to be used in place of a voltmeter
(A) both the length and the radius of the wire are halved then we must connect with the ammeter a
(B) both the length and the radius of the wire are doubled (A) Low resistance in parallel
(C) the radius of the wire is doubled (B) High resistance in parallel
(D) the length of the wire is doubled (C) High resistance in series
(D) Low resistance in series
38. When electric bulbs of same power, but different
marked voltage are connected in series across the
44. When an ammeter of negligible internal resistance is
power line, their brightness will be
inserted in series with circuit it reads 1A. When the
(A) proportional to their marked voltage
voltmeter of very large resistance is connected across
(B) inversely proportional to their marked voltage
X it reads 1V. When the point A and B are shorted
(C) proportional to the square of their marked voltage
by a conducting wire, the voltmeter measures 10 V
(D) inversely proportional to the square of their
across the battery. The internal resistance of the
marked voltage
battery is equal to
(A) zero x
39. Rate of dissipation of Joule’s heat in resistance per
(B) 0.5 y
unit volume is (symbols have usual meaning)
(C) 0.2
(A) E (B) J
(D) 0.1
(C) JE (D) None 12V
45. Resistances R1 and R2 each 60 are connected in
40. The charge flowing through a resistance R varies series as shown in figure. The Potential difference
with time as Q = 2t – 8t2. The total heat produced between A and B is kept 120 volt. Then what will
1 be the reading of voltmeter connected between the
in the resistance is (for 0  t  ) point C & D if resistance A B
8
of voltmeter is 120 .
R R (A) 48 V
(A) joules (B) joules
6 3 (B) 24 V R1 C R2
(C) 40 V
R D
(C) joules (D) R joules (D) None V
2
Page 138
CURRENT 3.39
46. By error, a student places moving-coil voltmeter V 50. An ammeter A of finite resistance, and a
(nearly ideal) in series with the resistance in a resistor R are joined in series to an ideal cell C. A
circuit in order to read the current, as shown. The potentiometer P is joined in parallel to R. The
voltmeter reading will be ammeter reading is I0 and the potentiometer reading
(A) 0 E=12V, r  2 is V0. P is now replaced by a voltmeter of finite
(B) 4V resistance.The ammeter reading
(C) 6V C
4 now is I and the voltmeter
(D) 12V V eading is V.
(A) I > I0, V < V0 R
47. In the figure shown for gives values of R1 and R2 A
the balance point for Jockey is at 40 cm from A. (B) I > I0, V = V0
When R2 is shunted by a resistance of 10 , balance (C) I = I0, V < V0
(D) I < I0, V = V0 P
shifts to 50 cm. R1 and R2 are (AB = 1m)
R1 R2
10
(A) ,5 51. A battery of emf E0 = 12 V is connected across a
3 G
(B) 20 , 30 4m long uniform wire having resistance 4 /m. The
(C) 10 , 15 cells of small emfs 1 = 2V and 2 = 4V having
A B
internal resistance 2 and 6 respectively, are
15
(D) 5 , connected as shown in the figure. If galvanometer
2
shows no deflection at the point N, the distance of
48. A 6V battery of negligible internal resistance is point N from the point A is equal to
0 R8
connected across a uniform wire of length 1m. The 1
(A) m
positive terminal of another battery of emf 4V and 6
internal resistance 1 is joined to the point A as N
shown in figure. The ammeter shows zero deflection 1 A
(B) m B
when the jockey touches 6V 3 1 r1 G
the wire at the point C. (C) 25 cm
The AC is equal to 2 r2
(D) 50 cm
(A) 2/3 m C
A B
(B) 1/3 m 52. A potentiometer wire has length 10 m and resistance
(C) 3/5 m 10 . It is connected to a battery of EMF 11 volt
A
(D) 1/2 m and internal resistance 1 , then the potential gradient
4 V,1
in the wire is
49. The figure shows a metre- bridge circuit, with
(A) 10 V/m (B) 1 V/m
AB = 100 cm, X = 12 and R = 18 , and the
jockey J in the position of balance. If R is now made (C) 0.1 V/m (D) none
8 , through what distance will J have to be moved
to obtain balance ? 53. In the circuit shown in figure reading of voltmeter is
– +
(A) 10 cm V1 when only S1 is closed, reading of voltmeter is
(B) 20 cm V2 when only S2 is closed. The reading of voltmeter
X R
(C) 30 cm is V3 when both S1 and 3R
A J B R
(D) 40 cm S2 are closed then
6R S1
(A) V2 > V1 > V3
S2
(B) V3 > V2 > V1 V
(C) V3 > V1 > V2
(D) V1 > V2 > V3 E
Page 139
CURRENT 3.61

1. D 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. D 7. C
8. C 9. D 10. B 11. B 12. B 13. D 14. D
15. B 16. A 17. B 18. B 19. B 20. D 21. C
22. D 23. A 24. C 25. B 26. D 27. D 28. C
29. C 30. A 31. A 32. C 33. C 34. C 35. A
36. B 37. B 38. C 39. C 40. A 41. B 42. D
43. C 44. C 45. A 46. D 47. A 48. A 49. B
50. A 51. C 52. B 53. A

1. C 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. B
8. C 9. C 10. A 11. D 12. D 13. D 14. D
15. A 16. C 17. C 18. D 19. B 20. B 21. A
22. C 23. A 24. B 25. B 26. D 27. B 28. C
29. B 30. A 31. C 32. A 33. A 34. A 35. A
36. D 37. A 38. B 39. B 40. A 41. D 42. C
43. B 44. D 45. C 46. A 47. A

1. A,D 2. A,B,C,D 3. A,B,C 4. A,C,D 5. A,B,C,D
6. A,C 7. A,C 8. A,D 9. B,C 10. A,B

2
1. 1.5625 × 1019 2. 1.56×10-2m/s 3. 1.25 × 1017, (b) × 106 A/m2

4. 25 V/m 5. R/9 6. 27:6:1 7. 544
8. 84.5°C 9. 0 I | 1 – 2 | 10 1127K 11. 1
12. (a) 7.5 V, (b) 24 mA(c) greater than 12 V Discharging condition
22 3r
13.  14. 15. zero 16. 19 V 17. (a) 3.7 V (b) 3.7 V
35 5
18. 1 19. 1V 20. (a) 12 W (b) 4W (c) 8 W (d) 4 (e) 4W
21. R1 R 2 22. 90 watt 23. 12A, – 20 W
50 22  11
24. (a)  4.55 A (b)  48 .4  (c) 1000 W (d) 240 cal s–1 (e) 80/3 gm min-1
11 5
25. 90%
26. (a) E = 10 V each (b) (A) act as a source and (B) act as load
(c) VA = 9V, VB = 11 V (d) PA = 9 W, PB = 11 W (e) Heat rate = 1 W each
(f) 10 watt. (g) 9V, 11 V (h) –9W, 11 W
Page 140
Capacitance 1.33

Section A - Capacitance Calculation (Sphere, 8. What is the equivalent capacitance of the system
Cylinderical, Parallel plate), Sharing of Charge, of capacitors between A & B
Combination of Capacitor
A
1. The capacitance of a metallic sphere will be 1F, if
its radius is nearly C C
(A) 9 km (B) 10 m C C C
(C) 1.11 m (D) 1.11 cm
B
2. No current flows between two charged bodies
7
connected together when they have the same (A) C (B) 1.6 C
6
(A) capacitance or Q/V ratio
(C) C (D) None
(B) charge
(C) resistance
(D) potential or Q/C ratio Section B - Circuit Problems (Switch, Energy etc.)
9. If the p.d. across the ends of a capacitor 4F is 1.0
3. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii R and kilovolt. Then its electrical potential energy will be
2R respectively are each given a charge Q. When (A) 4 × 10–3ergs (B) 2 ergs
they are connected by a metallic wire. The charge (C) 2 joules (D) 4 joules
will
(A) flow from A to B 10. A conductor of capacitance 0.5 F has been
(B) flow from B to A charged to 100volts. It is now connected to
(C) remain stationary on conductor uncharged conductor of capacitance 0.2F. The
(D) none of these loss in potential energy is nearly -
(A) 7 × 10–4 J (B) 3.5 × 10–4 J
4. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is C. –4
(C) 14 × 10 J (D) 7 × 10–3 J
Its capacity when the separation between the
plates is halved will be 11. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is
(A) 4C (B) 2C connected to a battery and is charged to a potential
(C) C/2 (D) C/4 difference V. Another capacitor of capacitance 2C
is similarly charged to a potential difference 2V.
5. Two spherical conductors of capacitance 3.0F and The charging battery is now disconnected and the
5.0F are charged to potentials of 300volt and capacitors are connect in parallel to each other in
500volt. The two are connected resulting in such a way that the positive terminal of one is
redistribution of charges. Then the final potential is - connected to the negative terminal of the other. The
(A) 300 volt (B) 500 volt final energy of the configuration is
(C) 425 volt (D) 400 volt 3
(A) zero (B) CV2
2
6. N drops of mercury of equal radii and possessing
25 9
equal charges combine to form a big spherical drop. (C) CV2 (D) CV2
6 2
Then the capacitance of the bigger drop compared
to each individual drop is 12. A 2  F capacitor is charged to a potential
(A) N times (B) N2/3 times = 10 V. Another 4  F capacitor is charged to a
1/3
(C) N times (D) N5/3 times potential = 20V. The two capacitors are then
connected in a single loop, with the positive plate of
7. From a supply of identical capacitors rated 8  F
one connected with negative plate of the other. What
,250 V, the minimum number of capacitors required
heat is evolved in the circuit?
to form a composite 16  F,1000 V is :
(A) 300  J (B) 600  J
(A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 900  J (D) 450  J
(C) 16 (D) 32
Page 141
13. In the circuit shown in figure charge stored in the 16. Find the potential difference Va – Vb between the
capacitor of capacity 5  f is points a and b shows in each parts of the figure.
2V a 2V
2f 2f 2f 5f 3f 4f
100 V
2F b 2F
(a)
(A) 60  C (B) 20  C
6V
(C) 30  C (D) zero 4F
a 12V 2F b
14. Three uncharged capacitors of capacitane C1 = 1F,
24V
C2 = 2F and C3 = 3F are connected as shown in (b) 1F
figure to one another and to points A, B and D

potential A = 10V, B = 25V and D = 20 V, 7
(A) zero, – V = –10.3 V
72
Determine the potential ( 0) at point O.
72
(B) one, – V = –10.3 V
7
A
7
(C) one, – V = –10.3 V
C1 72
72
C2 O C3 (D) zero, – V = –10.3 V
7
D
B 17. Each plate of a parallel plate air capacitor has an
area S. What amount of work has to be performed
(A) 20 V (B) 30 V to slowly increase the distance between the plates
(C) 40 V (D) 10 V from x1 to x2 If :
(i) the charge of the capacitor, which is equal to q or
15. Five capacitors are connected as shown in the q 2 (x 2  x1 ) q 2 (x 2 – x1 )

(A) 2 0S
(B) 2 0S
figure. Initially S is opened and all capacitors are
uncharged. When S is closed, steady state is
q 2 (x 2 – x1 ) q 2 (x1 – x 2 )
obtained. Then find out potential difference between (C) (D)
0 S 2 0S
the points M and N.
(ii) the voltage across the capacitor, which is equal to

S
M V, is kept constant in the process.
4F 2F 4F

31V  1 1   1 1 
0 SV 2  –  0 SV 2  – 
7V  x1 x 2   x 2 x1 
\ (A) (B)
6F 1.2F 2 4
N
 1 1   1 1 
0 SV 2  –  0 SV 2   
(C)  x 2 x1  (D)  x 2 x1 
(A) 14 (B) 12
2 2
(C) 10 (D) 15
Page 142
Capacitance 1.35
18. If charge on left plane of the 5  F capacitor in the 22. In the circuit shown, a potential difference of 60V
circuit segment shown in the figure is-20  C, the is applied across AB. The potential difference
between the point M and N is
charge on the right plate of 3  F capacitor is
2C
A M
3F
5F 2F 60V C C
4F B N
2C
(A) +8.57  C (B) -8.57  C (A) 10 V (B) 15 V

(C) 20 V (D) 30 V
(C) + 11.42  C (D) -11.42  C
23. Find the equivalent capacitance across A & B
19. In the circuit shown, the energy stored in 1  F
23F 7F
capacitor is
A 13F 1F B
3F 5F
12F
1F
10 F 1F
4 F
28 15
(A) F (B) F
24V 3 2
(C) 15  F (D) none
(A) 40  J (B) 64  J
24. An infinite number of identical capacitors each of
(C) 32  J (D) none
capacitance 1 F are connected as in adjoining
figure. Then the equivalent capacitance between
20. A capacitor C1 = 4F is connected in series with A and B is
another capacitor C2 = 1 F. The combination is
connected across a d.c. source of voltage 200V.
The ratio of potential across C1 and C2 is -
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 4 : 1
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
(A) 1F (B) 2F

21. In the circuit shown in figure, the ratio of charges (C) 1/2F (D) 
on 5  F and 4  F capacitor is :
25. Three large plates are arranged as shown. How much
charge will flow through the key k if it is closed?
2F
3 F Q 2Q
5 F d 2d
4 F
6V K
5Q 4Q
(A) (B)
6 3
(A) 4/5 (B) 3/5
3Q
(C) 3/8 (D) 1/2 (C) (D) none
2
Page 143
26. Five conducting parallel plates having area A and 29. The diagram shows four capacitors with capacitances
separation between them d, are placed as shown in and break down voltages as mentioned. What should
the figure. Plate number 2 and 4 are connected wire be the maximum value of the external emf source
and between point A and B, a cell of emf E is such that no capacitor breaks down?[Hint: First of
connected. The charge flown through the cell is all find out the break down voltages of each branch.
3  0 AE After that compare them.]
(A) E
4 d 2C;2kV
3C;1kV
A B
2  0 AE
(B) 1 2 3 4 5
3 d
4  0 AE 7C;1kV 3C;2kV
(C)
d
 0 AE
(D) (A) 2.5 KV (B) 10/3 KV
2d
(C) 3 KV (D) 1 KV
27. Five identical capacitor plates are arranged such
that they make capacitors each of 2  F. The plates 30. Three capacitors 2  F, 3  F and 5  F can
are connected to a source of emf 10 V. The charge withstand voltages to 3 V, 2V and 1V respectively.
on plate C is Their series combination can withstand a maximum
10V voltage equal to
(A) 5 Volts (B) (31/6) Volts
A
(C) (26/5) Volts (D) None
B
C
Section C - Dielectric
D 31. A metallic plate of thickness (t) and face area of
E
one side (A) is inserted between the plates of a
(A) +20  C (B) +40  C parallel plate air capacitor with a separation (d) and
(C) +60  C (D) +80  C face are (A). Then the equivalent capacitance is :
28. Consider the situatino shown in the figure. The 0 A 0 A

(A) (B) (d x t )
switch S is open for a long time and then closed. d
C C
0 A 0 A
(C) (d  t) (D) (d  t )
s
32. Two metal plates form a parallel plate condenser.


The distance between the plates in d. Now a metal
(i) Find the charge flown through the battery when plate of thickness d/2 and of same area is inserted
the switch S is closed.
completely between the plates, the capacitance -
(A) C/2 (B) C/4
(A) remains unchanged
(C) C (D) none of these
(B) is doubled
(ii) Find the work done by the battery. (C) is halved
(A) C2 (B) C2/2 (D) reduced to one fourth
(C) C /4
2 (D) none of these
33. The distance between plates of a parallel plate
(iii) Find the change in energy stored in the capacitors.
capacitor is 5d. Let the positively charged plate
(A) C2 (B) C2/2
is at x=0 and negatively charged plate is at
(C) C /4
2 (D) none of these
x=5d.Two slabs one of conductor and other of a
(iv) Find the heat developed in the system. dielectric of equal thickness d are inserted
(A) C2 (B) C2/2 between the plates as shown in figure. potential
(C) C2/4 (D) none of these versus distance graph will look like:
Page 144
Capacitance 1.37
35. The parallel plates of a capacitor have an area 0.2

Cond. Diele. m2 and are 10–2 m apart. The original potential
difference between them is 3000 V, and it decreases
to 1000 V when a sheet of dielectric is inserted
between the plates filling the full space. Compute :
\
( 0 9  10 –12 S.I. units )
(i) Permittivity of the dielectric.
x=0 x=d x=2d x=3d x=4d x=5d
(A) 25 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
(B) 37 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
v v (C) 27 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
(D) 28 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
(A) (B) 36. A parallel plate isolated condenser consists of two

metal plates of area A and separation ‘d’. A slab of
x x
thickness ‘t’ and dielectric constant K is inserted
between the plates with its faces parallel to the
v v
plates and having the same surface area as that of
the plates. Find the capacitance of the system. If
K = 2, for what value of t/d will the capacitance of
(C) (D)
the system be 3/2 times that of the condenser with
x x air filling the full space ?
1 2
(A) (B)
34. A parallel plate capacitor has two layers of dielectric 3 3
as shown in figure. This capacitor is connected across
3
a battery. The graph which shows the variation of (C) (D) 3
2
electric field (E) and distance (x) from left plate.
y 37. Hard rubber has a dielectric constant of 2.8 and a

k=2 k=4 dielectric strength of 18 × 106 volts/meter. If it is used
as the dielectric material filling the full space in a parallel
x plate capacitor. What minimum area may the plates
(d,0) (3d,0) of the capacitor have in order that the capacitance be
7.0 × 10–2 f and that the capacitor be able to withstand
y y
a potential difference of 4000 volts.
(A) 0.62 m–2 (B) 0.32 m–2
(C) 0.42 m –2 (D) 0.52 m–2
(A) (B)
38. Two parallel plate air capacitors each of capacitance
(d,0) (3d,0) x (d,0) (3d,0) x C were connected in series to a battery with e.m.f .
Then one of the capacitors was filled up with uniform
dielectric with relative permittivity k. What amount
y y
of charge flows through the battery ?
1 k +1 1 k –1
(A) Δq = CE (B) Δq = CE
(C) (D) 2 k –1 2 k +1
(d,0) (3d,0) x (d,0) (3d,0) x 1 k -1

(C) Δq = CE (D) none of these
2 k +1
Page 145
39. A parallel-plate capacitor of plate area A and plate 42. The capacity and the energy stored in a parallel plate
separation d is charged to a potential difference V condenser with air between its plates are respect
ively C0 and W0. If the air is replaced by glass
and then the battery is disconnected. A slab of
(dielectric constant = 5) between the plates at
dielectric constant K is then inserted between the constant charge, the capacity of the plates and the
plates of the capacitor so as to fill the whole space energy stored in it will respectively be -
between the plates. Find the work done on the W0
(A) 5C0 , 5W0 (B) 5C0 ,
system in the process of inserting the slab. 5
C0 C 0 W0
0 AV 2  1 0 AV 2  1
(C) , 5W 0 (D) ,
  5 5 5
(A)  –1 (B)  –1
2d  K  d K 
43. By inserting a plate of dielectric material between
0 AV 2  1 0 AV 2  1 the plates of a parallel plate capacitor at constant
 
(C)   1 (D)   1 potential, the energy is increased five times. The
2d  K  d K 
dielectric constant of the material is
(A) 1/25 (B) 1/5
40. In the adjoining figure, capacitor (1) and (2) have a (C) 5 (D) 25
capacitance ‘C’ each When the dielectric of 44. A glass slab is put with in the plates of a charged
dielectric constant K is inserted between the plates parallel plate condenser. Which of the following
of one of the capacitor, the total charge flowing quantities does not change?
through battery is : (A) energy of the condenser
(B) capacity
E
(C) intensity of electric field
B C (D) charge
C C C
Section D - R-C Circuit
A D
2
45. Find the potential difference between the points A
1
and B and between the points B and C figure in steady
KCE 3F B 1F

(A) from B to C
K+1
3F 1F
KCE
(B) from C to B 1F
K+1
A 20 10 C
(K-1) CE
(C) 2(K+1) from B to C 100V
(A) 75 V and 25 V (B) 35 V and 65 V
(K-1) CE (C) 25 V and 75 V (D) 65 V and 35 V
(D) 2(K+1) from C to B
46. Find heat produced in the capacitors after long time
on closing the switch S
41. The distance between the plates of a charged
4F 5F
parallel plate capacitor is 5 cm and electric field
inside the plates is 200 Vcm-1 . An uncharged metal
20 V 2
bar of width 2 cm is fully immersed into the R 2
capacitor. The length of the metal bar is same as S
that of plate of capacitor. The voltage across
4
capacitor after the immersion of the bar is :
(A) 0.0002 J (B).0005 J
(A) zero (B) 400 V
(C) 0.00075 J (D) zero
(C) 600 V (D) 100 V
Page 146
Capacitance 1.39
47. In the circuit shown, the cell is ideal, with emf=15 50. In the transient shown the time constant of the
V. Each resistance is of 3  . The potential circuit is :
difference across the capacitor is (after long time) R C
V1 V2
R  3 C  3F R
2R R
R R
R R
5 5
(A) RC (B) RC
+ – 15 V 3 2
7 7
(A) zero (B) 9 V (C) RC (D) RC
4 3
(C) 12 V (D) 15 V
51. In the circuit shown in figure C1 =2C2 . Switch S is

i1 6F
closed at time t=0. Let i1 and i2 be the currents
i2 flowing through C1 and C2 at any time t, then the
48. 10 20 ratio i1 / i2

R
i3 C1
2V R
C2
(i) In steady state, find the charge on the capacitor S
shown in figure. V
(A) 4 C (B) 5 C (A) is constant
(C) 6 C (D) 7 C
(B) increases with increase in time t
(C) decreases with increase in time t.
(ii) Find out values of i1, i2 and i3
(D) first increases then decreases
(A) 0, 1/15A, 1/15A (B) 1/15A, 0, 1/15A
(C) 0, 1/15A, 0 (D) 1/15A, 1/15A, 0
52. In the circuit shown, when the key k is pressed at
49. A capacitor C =100  F is connected to three resistor time t =0, which of the following statements about
each of resistance 1 k and a battery of emf 9V. current I in the resistor AB is true
The switch S has been closed for long time so as
to charge the capacitor. When switch S is opened,
K A B
the capacitor. Discharges with time constant
C 2V 1000
1000
1k 
1k 
S (A) I = 2mA at all t
1k 
(B) I oscillates between 1 mA and 2mA
9V
(A) 33 ms (B) 5 ms (C) I = I mA at all t
(C) 3.3 ms (D) 50 ms (D) At t=0, I=2mA and with time it goes to 1 mA
Page 147
53. In the R-C circuit shown in the figure the total 55. In the given figure the steady state current is
energy of 3.6 x 10-3 J is dissipated in the 10 
resistor when the switch S is closed. The initial
charge on the capacitor is
S
2F 10
(A) 60  C (B) 120  C

60
(C) 60 2  C (D) C (A) zero (B) 0.6 A
2
(C) 0.9 A (D) 1.5 A
54. A capacitor of capacitance 5 F is connected as
shown in the fig. The internal resistance of the cell
is 0.5 . The amount of charge on the capacitor
plate is :-
(A) 0 C (B) 5 C
(C) 10 C (D) 25 C
Page 148
1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. D
8. B 9. C 10. A 11. B 12. B 13. D 14. A
15. B 16. D 17. (i) B (ii) A 18. A 19. C 20. A
21. C 22. D 23. B 24. B 25. A 26. B 27. B
28. (i) A (ii) B (iii) C (iv) C 29. A 30. B 31. C 32. B
33. B 34. A 35. C 36. B 37. A 38. B 39. A
40. D 41. C 42. B 43. C 44. D 45. C 46. D
47. C 48. (i) A (ii) A 49. D 50. C 51. B 52. D
53. B 54. C 55. D
1. D 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. D 7. B
8. (i) A (ii) B (iii) C 9. B 10. B 11. B 12. D 13. C
14. B 15. D 16. B 17. B 18. B 19. C 20. C
21. C 22. C 23. C 24. C 25. C 26. B 27. A
28. D 29. B 30. A 31. A 32. B 33. A 34. A
1. BD 2. ABCD 3. BCD 4. ABC 5. ABCD

6. AD 7. BCD 8. BC 9. ABCD 10. BC
11. C 12. AC 13. AD 14. AC 15. BCD
16. ABD 17. ACD 18. BC 19. ABCD 20. BD
21. AC 22. D
8
1. F 2. 3Q/2C 3. 0.05 Nt 4. (a) 20 C, (b) 0.3 mJ, (c) 0.6 mJ. (d) 60 C
3
5. 60 c, A to B 6. 150 J 7. 10 C
100
8. (a) volts ; (b) 28.56 C, 42.84 C, 71.4 C, 22.88 C 9. 30 V 10. C
7
32 A V 2A V 1 q2 d
11. F 12. 0
, – 0
13. 14. 9J 15. proof
23 d d 2 0A
Page 149
Magnetism 2.41
Section A - Magnetic field due to a straight

wire, Circular Loop, Circular Arc
I P(2,3)
1. A point charge is moving in a circle with constant

speed. Consider the magnetic field produced by the O I
charge at a fixed point P (not centre of the circle)

on the axis of the circle.
(A) it is constant in magnitude only
0I 50 I
(B) it is constant in direction only (A) (B)
5a 2
(C) it is constant in direction and magnitude both
(D) it is not constant in magnitude and direction 0 I
both. (C) I2 (D) 0
5. Two very long straight parallel wires, parallel to

2. Four infinitely long ‘L’ shaped wires, each
y-axis, carry currents 4I and I, along +y direction
carrying a current i have been arranged as shown
and – y direction respectively. The wires are passes
in the figure. Obtain the magnetic field intensity at
the point ‘O’ equidistant from all the four through the x-axis at the points (d, 0, 0) and (–d, 0,
corners. 0) respectively. The graph of magnetic field
z-component as one moves along the x-axis from
x = – d to x = +d, is best given by
i a i
a O
0°
(A) O (B) x
x
(A) 1 wb/m2 (B) 0 wb/m2

(C) 2 wb/m2 (D) none of these
(C) x (D) x
O O
3. Two parallel, long wires carry currents i1 and i2 with
i1 > i2. When the current are in the same direction,
the magnetic field at a point midway between the
wire is 10 mT. If the direction of i2 is reversed, the 6. If the ratio of magnetic fields at two point in a
field becomes 30mT. The ratio i1/i2 is
definite direction due to a long current carrying
(A) 4 (B) 3 wire is 3/4, then the ratio of the distances of these
(C) 2 (D) 1 points from the wire will be :
2 4
4. Two mutually perpendicular insulated long (A) (B)
3 3
conducting wires carrying equal currents I, intersect
at origin. Then the resultant magnetic induction at
point P (2m, 3m) will be - 3 3
(C) (D)
4 2
Page 150
7. Two parallel straight long conducting wires, which 10. A uniform beam of positively charged particles is
are placed at a distance r from each other, are moving with a constant velocity parallel to another
carrying equal currents i in opposite directions. The beam of negatively charged particles moving with
value of magnetic induction at a point situated at a the same velocity in opposite direction separated
point situated x from one wire in between the wires by a distance d. The variation of magnetic field B
will be : along a perpendicular line draw between the two
beams is best represented by
0i  1 1 0 i  1 1
(A)    (B)   
2  r  x x  2  r  x x  B
B
 0i 0 i (A) d/2 d (B)

(C) (D)
2(r  x) 2x d/2 d
8. A battery is connected between two points A and B B
B the circumference of a uniform conducting ring

of radius r and resistance R. One o the arcs AB of (C) (D)
d/2 d d/2 d
the ring subtends an angle  at the centre. The value
of the magnetic induction at the centre due to the
current in the ring is :
11. Infinite number of straight wires each carrying
current I are equally placed as shown in the figure.
Adjacent wires have current in opposite direction.
 Net magnetic field at point P is
A B
(A) zero, only if  = 180°

a y
(B) zero for all values of 
a
z x
(C) proportional to 2(180° – ) 30°
P 30° 1 2 3 4 5
(D) inversely proportional to r
9. Determine the magniutde of magnetic field at the

centre of the current carrying wire arrangement
shown in the figure. The arrangement extends to  0I  n 2 0I  n 4
(A) k̂ (B) k̂
4 3a 4 3a
infinity. (The wires joining the successive square
are along the line passing through the centre)
0I  n 4 ˆ
(C) (–k) (D) Zero
 4 3a
0i
(A)
2 a 4a
3a
2a 12. A long straight wire, carrying current I, is bent at its
a
(B) 0 midpoint to form an angle of 45°. Induction of
 i O i 
magnetic field at point P, distant R from point of
2 2 0 i
(C) ln 2 bending is equal to :
a
 P
I
(D) none of these R 45°
Page 151
Magnetism 2.43
16. A hollow cylinder having infinite length and carrying

(A)
 
2 – 1 0I
(B)
 
2  1 0I uniform current per unit length  along the
4R 4R
circumference as shown. Magnetic
(C)
 
2 –1 0I
(D)
 
2  1 0 I
field inside the cylinder is
4 2R 4 2R  0
(A) (B) 0
2
(C) 20 (D) none

Section B - Magnetic Field due to Cylinder,
Large Sheet, Solenoid, Toriod
17. Axis of a solid cylinder of infinite length and radius
13. In a coaxial, straight cable, the central conductor R lies along y-axis it carries a uniformly distributed
and the outer conductor carry equal currents in current ‘i’ along +y direction. Magnetic field at a
opposite directions. The magnetic field is zero.
R R
point  ,y,  is :
2 2
 0I ˆ ˆ  0i ˆ ˆ
(A) (i – k) (B) ( j – k)
4 R 2 R
0i ˆ  0i ˆ ˆ
(C) j (D) (i  k)
4 R 4 R
(A) outside the cable
(B) inside the inner conductor 18. The dimensional formula for the physical quantity
(C) inside the outer conductor
E 2 0  0
(D) in between the two conductors. is
B2
(E = electric field and B = magnetic field)

14. The magnetic field B inside a long solenoid, carrying
acurrent of 10A, is3.14 × 10–2 T. Find the number (A) L0M0T0 (B) L1M 0T–1
of turns per unit length of the solenoid. (C) L–1M0T1 (D)L 1/2M 0T –1/2
(A) 1500 turns/m. (B) 3500 turns/m.
(C) 2000 turns/m. (D) 2500 turns/m. 19. Two circular coils A and B of radius
5
cm and 5 cm respectively carry current 5 Amp
15. A rod AB moves with a uniform velocity v in a 2
uniform magnetic field as shown in figure.
5
and Amp respectively. The plane of B is
× × × A× × × 2
× × × × × ×
× × × v× × × perpendicular to plane of A and their centres
× × × × × × coincide. Find the magnetic field at the centre.
× × × × × ×
B
× × × × × × 5 5
(A) 4   10 –5 T (B) 4π × 10 –5 T
2 2 3 2
(A) The rod becomes electrically charged.
(B) The end A becomes positively charged.
5 5
(C) The end B becomes positively charged. (C) 2π × 10 –5 T (D) 4π × 10 –5 T
2 2 2 3
(D) The rod becomes hot because of Joule heating.
Page 152
20. Find the magnetic induction at the origin in the 23. A current carrying wire (current = i) perpendicular
figure shown. to the plane of the paper produces a magnetic field,
as shown in the figure. A square of side a is drawn
μ0I  3 1 
(A) 2R  4 ˆk + ˆj  Y with one of its vertices on the wire. The integral
 π   
฀ B.dr
R
R alog PQR has the value lines of B
R R
μ0 I  3 ˆ 1 ˆ  R (A) +0i
(B)  k + j X Oi
R
4R  4 π  I μi
Z (B) 0 a
8
μ0I  3 1 
(C) 3R  4 ˆk + ˆj 
π  μ 0i μ 0i

P Q
(C) (D)
4 2
μ0I  1 1 
(D) 4R  2 ˆk + ˆj 
π  24. An electron moving in a circular orbit of

radius r makes n rotations per second. The magnetic
field produced at the centre has magnitude.
Section C - Ampere Law μ 0 ne
(A) zero (B)
2πr
21. A thin, straight conductor lies along the axis of a μ 0 ne μ 0 n 2e
hollow conductor of radius R. The two carry equal (C) (D)
2r 2r
currents in the same direction. The magnetic field B
is plotted against the distance r from the axis. Which 25. Net magnetic field at the .centre of the circle O
of the following best represents the resulting curve ? due to a current carrying
loop as shown in figure is
i i  O
( < 180°)
(A) B (B) B (A) zero
R R (B) perpendicular to paper inwards
r r (C) perpendicular to paper outwards
(D) is perpendicular to paper inwards if  90° and
perpendicular to paper outwards if 90°   < 180°
(C) B (D) B
R 26. Find the magnetic induction of the field at the point
R
r r O of a loop with current I, whose shape is
illustrated
A current I flows along a thin wire shaped as shown
in figure. The radius of a curved part of the wire is
22. A current I flows along the length of an
equal to R the angle is 2. Find the magnetic
infinitely long, straight, thin-walled pipe. Then
induction of the field at the point O.
(A) the magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is
the same, but not zero. (A) B = (π -  + sin)μ 0 I
2πR
(B) the magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is
zero. I O
(B) B = (π -  + tan )μ 0 R
(C) the magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the 2R 2
pipe.
I
(D) the magnetic field is different points (C) B = (π -  + tan)μ 0
2πR
inside the pipe.
(D) none of these
Page 153
Magnetism 2.45
27. A current I flows around a closed path in the Section D - Magnetic Force on Charge and
horizontal plane of the circle as shown in the figure. Current Carrying Wire
The path consists of eight arcs with alternating radii
r and 2r. Each segment of arc subtends equal 29. Magnetic lines of force are -
angle at the commom centre P. The magnetic field (A) continuous
produced by current path at point P is (B) discontinuous
3  0I (C) sometimes continuous and sometimes

2r
(A) ; perpendicular to discontinuous
8 r
the plane of the paper P (D) nothing can be said
r
and directed inward
30. A charged particle is accelerated through a potential
3  0I difference of 12 kV and acquires a speed of 1.0 ×
(B) ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper
8 r 106 m/s. It is then injected perpendicularly into a
and directed outward magnetic field of strength 0.2 T. Find the radius of
the circle described by it.
1  0I
(C) ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper (A) 12 cm (B) 14 cm
8 r
and directed inward. (C) 10 cm (D) none of these
1  0I 31. A neutron, a proton, an electron and an

(D) ; perpendicular to the plane of the paper
8 r a-particle enters a uniform magnetic field with equal
and directed outward. velocities. The field is directed along the inward
normal to the plane of the paper. Which of these
28. A coaxial cable is made up of two conductors. The tracks followed are by a - particle.
inner conductor is solid and is of radius R1 & the (A) A × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ×
C
outer conductor is hollow of inner radius R2 and (B) B × × B × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
outer radius R3. The space between the conductors (C) C D
A × × × ×
× × ×
is filled with air. The inner (D) D × × × × × × ×
and outer conductors are
carrying currents of equal
magnitudes and in 32. A charged particle moves in a magnetic field
 
opposite directions. Then
R
B = 10 iˆ with initial velocity u = 5 î+ 4 ˆj . The path
the variation of magnetic of the particle will be
R2
field with distance from
(A) straight line (B) circle
the axis R3
(C) helical (D) none
is best plotted as :
33. Electrons moving with different speeds enter a

B B
uniform magnetic field in a direction perpendicular
(A) (B)
to the field. They will move along circular paths.
R1 R2 R3 r R1 R2 R3 r
(A) of same radius

(B) with larger radii for the faster electrons.
B B
(C) with smaller radii for the faster electrons.
(C) (D)
(D) either (B) or (C) depending on the magnitude
R1 R2 R3 r R1 R2 R3 r
of the magnetic field
Page 154
34. A proton of mass 1.67 × 10–27 kg and charge 1.6 × 38. A particle having charge q enters a region of uniform
10–19C is projected with a speed of 2 × 106 m/s at 
magnetic field B (directed inwards) and is deflected
an angle of 60° to the x-axis. If a uniform magnetic
a distance x after travelling a distance y. The
field of 0.104 T is applied along the y-axis, the path
magnitude of the momentum of the particle is
of te proton is :
(A) A circle of radius 0.2 m and time period qBy
 ×10–7s
(A) x
2
(B) A circle of radius 0.1 m and time period
2×10–7s (B)
qBy
y
(C) A helix of radius 0.1 m and time period of x
2 × 10–7 s
(D) A helix of radius of 0.2 m and time period qB  y2  qBy 2
(C) 2  x + x  (D)
4 × 10–7s   2x
35. Three ions H+, He+ and O+2 having same kinetic
energy pass through a region in whcih there is a Section E -Torque on a Current Carrying Loop
uniform magnetic field perpendicular to their and Magnetic Dipole Moment,
velocity, then : Moving Coil Galvanometer
(A) H+ will be least deflected
(B) He+ and O+2 will be deflected equally. 39. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform
(C) O+2 will be deflected most magnetic field. The torque acting on it does not
(D) all will be deflected equally. depend upon -
(A) area of loop (B) shape of loop
36. A particle having charge of 1 C, mass 1 kg and
speed 1 m/s enters a uniform magnetic field, having (C) value of current (D) magnetic field
magnetic induction of 1 T, at an angle q = 30°
between velocity vector and magnetic induction. 40. The time period of vibration of two magnets in same
The pitch of its helical path is (in meters) position is 3 sec. When polarity of weaker magnet
3 is reversed, the combination makes 12 oscillations
(A) (B) 3 per minute. Compare the magnetic moments of two
2
magnets.

(C) (D) 
2 17
(A) 4 (B)
8
37. A square loop ABCD, carrying a current i, is placed
13 1
near and coplanar with a long straight conductor (C) (D)
8 4
XY carrying a current I, the net force on the loop
will be
2μ 0 Ii Y
41. A toroid of mean radius ‘a’, cross section radius ‘r’
(A) C
3π B and total number of turns N. It carries a current ‘i’.
i L The torque experienced by the toroid if a uniform
μ 0 Ii I
(B) A magnetic field of strength B is applied :
2π D
L/2 L (A) is zero
2μ IiL X
(C) 0 (B) is Bi N  r2
3π
(C) is B i N  a2
μ IiL
(D) 0 (D) depends on the direction of magnetic field.
2π
Page 155
Magnetism 2.47
42. A conducting ring of mass 2kg and radius 0.5 m is Section F - Magnetic Field due to Bar magnet
placed on a smooth horizontal plane. The ring carries and Earth Magnet, Para-Dia-Ferro
a current i = 4A. A horizontal magnetic field B =
10 T is switched on at time t = 0 as shown in figure. 46. The points A and B are situated perpendicular to
The initial angular acceleration of the ring will be the axis of 2 cm long bar magnet at large distances
(A) 40  rad/s2 x and 3 x from the centre on opposite sides. The
(B) 20  rad/s2 B ratio of magnetic fields at A and B will be
(C) 5  rad/s 2 ////////////// approximately equal to -
(D) 15  rad/s2 (A) 27 : 1 (B) 1 : 27
(C) 9 : 1 (D) 1 : 9
43. In the figure shown a coil of single turn is wound on
a sphere of radius R and mass m. The plane of the 47. A conductor of length l and mass m is placed along
coil is parallel to the plane and lies in the equatorial the east-west line on a table. Suddenly a certain
plane of the sphere. Current in the coil is i. The
amount of charge is passed through it and it is found
value of B if the sphere is in equilibrium is
to jump to a hight h. The earth’s magnetic induction
mg cos  is B. The charge passed through the conductor is
(A) iR B
1 2 gh
mg (A) Bmgh (B) B  m
(B)  iR
gh m 2gh
mg tan  mg sin  (C) B m (D)
(C)  i R (D)  i R B
44. A thin non conducting disc of radius R is rotating 48. The most suitable metal for permanent magnets
clockwise (see figure) with an angular velocity  is -
about its central axis, which is perpendicular to its (A) steel (B) iron
plane. Both its surfaces carry +ve charges of (C) copper (D) aluminium
uniform surface density. Half the disc is in a region
of a 49. When a ferromagnetic material is heated above its
uniform, unidirectional Curie temperature,
magnetic field B parallel to (A) it gets demagnetised
the plane of the disc, as
(B) it becomes diamagnetic
shown. Then,
B (C) behaves like a paramagnetic substance
(A) The net torque on the disc is zero
(D) remains unaffected
(B) The net torque vector on the disc is directed
leftwards
(C) The net torque vector on the disc is directed 50. A straight current carrying conductor is placed in
(D) The net torque vector on the disc is parallel to B such a way that the current in the conductor flows
in the direction out of the plane of the paper. The
45. A rectangular coil PQ has 2n turns, an area 2a and conductor is placed between two poles of two
carries a current 2I, (refer figure). The plane of the magnets, as shown. The conductor will exerience
coil is at 60º to a horizontal uniform magnetic field a force in the direction towards
of flux density B. The torque on the coil due to
P
magnetic force is 2n,2a,2I
S R S N
(A) BanI sin 60º
Q
(B) 8 BanI cos 60º Coil 60º
(C) 4 anI Bsin 60º B (A) P (B) Q
(D) none (C) R (D) S
Page 156
Section A - Magnetic field due to a straight 5. Find the ratio of magnetic field magnitudes at a
wire, Circular Loop, Circular Arc distance 10 m along the axis and at 60° from the
axis, from the centre of a coil of radius 1 cm,
1. In the following hexagons, made up of two different carrying a current 1 amp.
material P and Q, current enters and leaves from
3 2
points X and Y respectively. In which case the (A) (B)
7 7
magnetic field at its centre is not zero.
4 1
Q Q (C) (D)
Y Y 7 7
Q P P
P
(A) (B)
P Q Q Q
X X 6. Two long parallel wires situated at a distance 2a
P P
are carrying equal current ‘i’ in opposite direction
as shown in figure. The value of magnetic field at a
Q P
Y Y point P situated at equal distances from both the
P Q
Q Q
wires will be : i
(C) (D)
P Q P Q r
X
P
X  0i a
P
(A)  r 2a 

2. Three rings, each having equal radius R, are placed  0i a 2 r
(B) ×
mutually perpendicular to each other and each r i
having its centre at the origin of co-ordinate system.
If current I is flowing through each ring then the  0i a 2  0i a
(C) (D)  r 2
magnitude of the magnetic field at the common  r2
centre is y
7. Two mutually perpendicular conductors carrying
0I currents I1 and I2 lie in one plane. Locus of the
(A) 3
2R point at which the magnetic induction is zero, is a
x (A) circle with centre as the point of intersection of
(B) zero
the conductor.
z
0 I 0 I (B) parabola with vertex as the point of intersection
(C) ( 2 – 1) (D) ( 3 – 2)
2R 2R of the conductors
(C) straight line passing through the point of
3. Magnetic monopoles cannot exist - intersection of the conductors
(A) true (B) false (D) rectangular hyperbola
(C) may be true or false (D) nothing can be said
8. Current flows through uniform, square frames as
shown. In which case is the magnetic field at the
4. Figure shows a straight wire of length l carrying a
centre of the frame not zero ?
current i. Find the magnitude of magnetic field
produced by the current at point P.
2μ 0i l
(A) P (A) (B)
3πl
l i
2μ 0i
(B)
8πl
(C) (D)
μ 0i 2μ 0i
(C) (D)
2πl πl
Page 157
Magnetism 2.49
Section B - Magnetic Field due to Cylinder, 12. Consider a long cylindrical shell of
Large Sheet, Solenoid, Toriod non-conducting material which carries a surface
charge fixed in place (glued down) of  C/m2 , as
9. A long cylindrical conductor of radius R shown in Figure. The cylinder is suspended in a
carries current i as shown. The current manner such that it is free to revolve about its axis,
density j is a function of radius r as j = br, where b is a without friction. Initially it is at rest,
constant. The magnetic field at a distance r1(r1<R) is Axis
then it is spinned until the speed of
i the surface of the cylinder is v0.
What is magnetic field inside the
R
cylinder?
(A) v0dx
μ 0 br12 μ 0 br13
(A) (B) (B) 0v0
2 2
(C) 0
μ br 2 (D) none of these
(C) 0 1 (D) zero
3
13. A long straight wire carries a current of 10 A directed

10. An infinite long solenoid having n turns per unit along the negative y-axis as shown in figure. A
length is shown in figure. The magnetic filed at P, uniform magnetic field B0 of magnitude 10–6 T is
when a current I is flowing through it would be directed parallel to the x-axis. What is the resultant
magnetic field at the following points?
R (a) x = 0, z = 2m ;
P
R
(b) x = 2m, z = 0 ; z
I
(c) x = 0, z = – 0.5 m B0
y
(A) 0nI (B) zero (A) 0, 0.4×10-6T, 2×10-6T
(B) 0, 1.41×10-6T, 5×10-6T
μ 0 nI μ 0 nI  1  i
x
(C) (D) 2 1 -  (C) 3.2×10-6T, 2.4×10-6T, 0
2 2  2
(D) 5×10-6T, 0, 1.2×10-6T
11. Calculate the magnetic moment of a thin wire with

14. A uniform current density j flows inside an infinite
a current I = 0.8 A, wound tightly on half a toroid.
plate of thickness 2d parallel to its surface. The
The diameter of the cross-section of the toroid is
magnetic field induction is
equal to d = 5.0 cm, the number of turns is N =
500. (A) 0jx inside the plate at a distance of x from
median plane.
μ0 j
(B) inside the plate at a distance of x from
2x
median plane.
(C) 0jd outside the plate.
(A) 0.6 Am2 (B) 1 Am2
(D) 20jd out side the plate.
(C) 0.5 Am2 (D) 1.5 Am2
Page 158
Section C - Ampere Law 18. Eight wires cut the page perpendicularly at the points
shown in figure. A wire labeled with the integer k
15. A long thin walled pipe of radius R carries a current
(k=1.2,....8) bears the current ki0. For those with
I along its length. The current density is uniform
odd k, the current flows up out of the page; for
over the circumference of the pipe. The magnetic
field at the center of the pipe due those with even k it flows down into the page. The
 
to quarter portion of the pipe value of ฀ B.dr along the close path (as shown in
shown, is
the figure) in the direction indicated by the arrow is
μ I 2 μ0I
(A) 0 2 (B)
4π R π2R
2μ 0 I 2
3
4
(C) (D) None 2
π2 R 1
5
7
6
8
16. A long straight metal rod has a very long hole of

radius ‘a’ drilled parallel to the rod axis as shown in
the figure. If the rod carries a current ‘i’ find the
value of magnetic induction on the axis of the hole,
where OC = c (A) 100i0 (B) –100i0
 0 ic a (C) –40i0 (D) 40i0
(A)
 (b 2 – a 2 ) C
19. Let B P , B Q and B R be the magnetic field
 0 ic produced by the three infinite long wires P,Q and R
(B) 2 (b 2 – a 2 )
respectively. The three wires are placed
symmetrically inside an equilateral triangular loop
 0 i(b 2 – a 2 )  0 ic
(C) (D) as shown in figure. Current in 3 wires are shown in
2c 2 a 2 b 2
figure.
17. A cylindrical conductor of radius R carries a current
its length. The current density J, however, it is not
uniform over the cross section of the conductor but
is a function of the radius according to J = br, where
b is a constant.
i
Find an
R
expression for the
magnetic field B.
(a) at r1 < R &
(b) at distance r2 > R, measured from the axis
μ 0 br12 μ 0 bR 3
(A) B1 = , B2 =
3r2
3
B  
μ br 2 μ 0 bR 3
If 
A
BP .dl = 40 T–m and
(B) B1 = 0 1 , B2 = 3r
2 2 B  
A
BP .dl = – 150 T–m, then the value of i is
μ 0 br12 μ 0 bR 3
(C) B1 = , B2 =
2r2
(A) 15 A
3
(B) 5a
μ 0 br12 μ 0 bR 3 (C) 13A
(D) B1 = , B2 =
2r2
2 (D) information is insufficient
Page 159
Magnetism 2.51
20. A charged particle of specific charge  is released 23. A particle moving with velocity v having specific
 charge (q/m) enters a region of magnetic field B
from origin at time t = 0 with velocity V = V0î+ V0ˆj
 3mv
in magnetic field B = B0î . The coordinates of the having width d = 5qB at angle 53º to the boundary

particle at time t = B  are (specific charge  = q/m) of magnetic field. Find the
B
0
angle  in the diagram.
 V0 π 2V0   2V π 2V  (A) 37º 53º
(A)  B α , 0, - B α  (B)  0, B α , B α 
0 0
 0 0   0 0  (B) 60º
(C) 90º
 3V π 2V  (D) none
d
(C)  B α , - B α , 0 
0 0
 0 0 
24. A particle of specific charge (charge/mass)  starts
 2 2V0 π V0 π 2V0  moving from the origin under the action of an
(D)  B α , B α , B α   
 0 0 0  electric field E = E0î and magnetic field B = B0kˆ .
ˆ 3 ˆj) . The value
Its velocity at (x0, y0, 0) is (4 i–
21. In the diagram shown, a wire carries
of x0 is
 
current I. What is the value of the ฀ B. d l (as in 13  E 0 16  B 0
(A) 2 B (B) E0
Ampere’s law) on the helical loop shown in the 0
figure. The integration is done in the sense shown.

25 5
The loop has N turns and part of helical loop on (C) 2 E (D) 2B
0 0
which arrows are drawn
outside the plane of paper.
25. A particle of charge q and mass m starts moving
(A) –0(NI) I from the origin under the action of an electric field
(B) 0(I)   
E  E0 i and B  B 0 i with velocity    0 j . The
(C) 0(NI)
speed of the particle will become 20 after a time
(D) zero
2m  0 2Bq
(A) t = (B) t = m
qE 0
Section D - Magnetic Force on Charge and
Current Carrying Wire 3Bq 3m  0
(C) t  m (D) t 
22. A block of mass m & charge q is released on a long 0 qE
smooth inclined plane magnetic field B is constant,
uniform, horizontal and parallel to surface as shown. 26. A charged particle enters a unifrom magnetic field
Find the time from start when block loses contact perpendicular to its initial direction travelling in air.
with the surface. The path of the particle is seen to follow the path in
q
m figure. Which of statements 1-3 is/are correct ?
m cos  B
(A) qB (1) The magnetic field strength may have been
increased while the particle was travelling in air
(2) The particle lost energy by ionising the air
m cosec 
(B) (3) The particle lost charge by ionising the air
qB
(A) 1,2,3 are correct
(B) 1,2 only are correct entry
m cot 
(C) (D) none (C) 2,3 only are correct
qB
(D) 1 only
Page 160
27. A charged particle (charge q, mass m) has velocity 30. A square current carrying loop made of thin wire
v0 at origin in +x direction. In space there is a and having a mass m = 10g can rotate without
uniform magnetic field B in –z direction. Find the y friction with respect to the vertical axis OO1, passing
coordinate of particle when is crosses y axis. through the centre of the loop at right angles to two
opposite sides of the loop. The loop is placed in a
2mv 0 mv 0
(A) (B) homogeneous magnetic field with an induction B =
qB qB
10–1T directed at right angles to the plane of the
drawing. A current I = 2A is flowing in the loop.
4m v 0
(C) (D) None of these Find the period of small oscillations that the loop
qB
performs about its position
of stable equilibrium.
OB
28. A conducting circular loop of radius r carries a
(A) 0.40s
constant current I. It is placed in a uniform magnetic
  (B) 0.57 s I
field B0 such that B0 is perpendicular to the plane
(C) 1.14s
of the loop. Find the magnetic force acting on the (D) 1 s O1
loop is
(A) 4rIB (B) zero 31. Q charge is uniformly distributed over the same
(C) 2rIB (D) none surface of a right circular cone of semi-vertical
angle  and height h. The cone is uniformly rotated
about its axis at angular velocity . Calculated
29. A rectangular loop of wire is oriented with the left associated magnetic dipole moment.
corner at the origin, one edge along X-axis and the 
other edge along Y-axis as shown in the figure. A Qω 2
(A) h tan2 
magnetic field is into the the page and has a 2
h
magnitude that is given by  = y
Q 2
(B) h tan2
4
Y
a
Q 2 Q 2
a (C) h cos2  (D) h sin2
×B 2 4
X 32. Find the work and power required to move the

conductor of length l shown in the fig. one full turn
where  is constant. Find the total magnetic force in the anticlockwise direction at a
on the loop if it carries carrent i.
rotationl frequency of n
  z
(A) F = α a 2 i î (B) F = α a 2 i ˆj revolutions per second if the r A
  magnetic field is of magnitude
(C) F = 2α a2 iî (D) F = 2α a2 iˆj I I
B0 everywhere and points
radially outwards from Z- y
B
Section E - Torque on a Current Carrying axis. The figure shows the x

Loop and Magnetic Dipole surface traced by the wire AB.
Moment, Moving Coil (A) – 2  r B0 i l, – 2  r B0 i l n
Galvanometer
(B) 4  r B0 i l, 4  r B0 i l n
(C) 2  r B0 i l, 2  r B0 i l n
(D) – 4  r B0 i l, 4  r B0 i l n
Page 161
Magnetism 2.53
33. The magnetic needle of a tangent galvanometer is 37. A magnet of moment 4.0 A m2 is held in a uniform
deflected at an angle 30° due to a magnet. The magnetic field 5.0×10 -4 T with the magnetic
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field moment vector making an angle of 30° with the
0.34×10-4 T is along the plane of the coil. The field. The work done in increasing the angle from
magnetic intensity is : 30° to 45° is nearly :
(A) 1.96×10-4 T (B) 1.96×10-5 T (A) 3.18×10-4J (B) 4.3×10-4J
(C) 1.96×104 T (D) 1.96×105 T (C) 7.3×10-4J (D) Zero
34. In a deflection magnetometer, the external magnet

Section F - Magnetic Field due to Bar magnet
should be replaced :
and Earth Magnet, Para-Dia-
(A) always in the direction resultant field of earth Ferro
(B) always with its axis along E-W.
(C) along N-S in tan A position. 38. The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is
zero at –
(D) always along N-S.
(A) magnetic equator (B) magnetic pole
35. A short magnet produces a deflection of 45° along (C) geographic poles (D) at 90° latitude
the east of deflection magnetometer, at a certain
distance. When kept at the same distance in the 39. On placing a piece of ferromagnetic material of
south, the deflection will be : cross-sectional area 1cm2 in magnetic field of 200
(A) tan-1 (1/2) (B) tan-1 (2) oersted, flux density of 3000 Gauss is produced in
it. The values of relative permeability and magnetic
(C) 45° (D) 60°
susceptibility of the material will respectively be -
36. A coil in the shape of an equilateral triangle of side (A) 11.9 and 150 (B) 150 and 11.9
 is suspended between the pole places of a (C) 50 and 11.9 (D) 15 and 14
permanent magnet, Such that B fixed is in plae of
the coil. If due to a current I in the triangle, a torque 40. Each atom of every matter is a complete magnet
 acts on it, then side  of the triangle is : itself :
1/ 2
(A) True (B) False
1      
(A)   (B) 2 
 3BI 
(C) May be true or not (D) Can't say anything
3  BI 
1/ 2
2     
1/ 2

(C)   (D) 2 
 
3  BI  3BI 
Page 162
Magnetism 2.77

1. A 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. B
8. B 9. C 10. D 11. B 12. A 13. A 14. D
15. B 16. B 17. A 18. A 19. A 20. B 21. B
22. B 23. C 24. C 25. C 26. C 27. A 28. C
29. A 30. A 31. B 32. C 33. B 34. C 35. B
36. B 37. A 38. C 39. B 40. B 41. A 42. A
43. B 44. B 45. B 46. A 47. D 48. A 49. A
50. B

1. A 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. D 7. C
8. C 9. C 10. D 11. C 12. B 13. B 14. C
15. A 16. B 17. A 18. B 19. C 20. A 21. B
22. C 23. C 24. C 25. D 26. B 27. A 28. B
29. B 30. B 31. B 32. A 33. B 34. B 35. A
36. B 37. A 38. A 39. D 40. B

1. A,B,C 2. B,D 3. A,B,C 4. A,B,C,D 5. A,D 6. B,D 7. A,B,C
8. A,B,C 9. B,C,D 10. B,D 11. A,D 12. A,D 13. C,D 14. B,C,D
15. A,B
0I  1 
1. four time as the first value. 2. Zero 3. 4 105 T 4.   1
2r   
 0 I   2   
B 
4  b a 
5. 0.10 mT 6. 2B 7. Downwards at 45° 8.
0i  1 3  0 I  1 1 
9. 5 × 10–4 T towards west 10. 0 11. 1:4 12. 8  R  R '  13. 4  R  R 
   1 2
0I
14. 15. 1 × 10–4 wb/m2, towards the reader. 16. B1 = B2 = B3 = B4 17. m0 weber.m-1
4 R 3
μ 0i i iB
18. 19. 1.3 ×10-4T 20. B = 2(2π 2 - 2π + 1) 21. 22.
4πR Ane An
iB i Bd
23. 24. 25. (m0/2p) pdJ, in the +y direction 26. 15C
Ane Ane
μ 0 iJ 0  d  ˆ
27. tan -1   (-k) 28. (a) 1.4×10 -4 m/s (b) 4.5 × 10-23 N (down)
π  2h 
(c) 2.8 × 10-4 V/m (down) (d) 5.7 × 10-6 V (top+, bottom–) (e) same as (c)
W μ ll r μ 0 iqv 3mv 2 mEl
29. l = 2π ln r = 27.6μ J/m
0 1 2 2
30. 31. 10 k̂ 32. 33.
1 2πa 4qa Be
Page 163
Section A - Flux, Faraday’s law, Lenz’s law 5. An electron is moving in a circular orbit of radius R
with an angular acceleration . At the centre of the
1. A flux of 1m Wb passes through a strip having an
orbit is kept a conducting loop of radius r, (r < < R).
area A = 0.02 m2. The plane of the strip is at an
The e.m.f induced in the smaller loop due to the
angle of 60º to the direction of a uniform field B.
motion of the electron is
The value of B is-
(A) 0.1 T (B) 0.058 T (A) zero, since charge on electron in constant
(C) 4.0 mT (D) none of the above.  0 er 2  0er 2

(B)  (C) 
4R 4R
2. The number of turns in a long solenoid is 500. The
(D) none of these
area of cross-section of solenoid is 2 × 10–3 m2. If
the value of magnetic induction, on passing a 6. A vertical bar magnet is dropped from position on
current of 2 amp, through it is 5 × 10–3 tesla, the the axis of a fixed metallic coil as shown in fig-I. In
magnitude of magnetic flux connected with it in fig-II the magnet is fixed and horizontal coil is
webers will be dropped. The acceleration of the magnet and coil
–3 –2
(A) 5 × 10 (B) 10 are a1 and a2 respectively then
–5
(C) 10 (D) 2.5 S
S
3. A conducting loop of radius R is present in a uniform N
magnetic field B perpendicular the plane of the ring. fixed fixed N
If radius R varies as a function of time ‘t’, as R = R0 + fig-1 fig-II
t. The e.m.f induced in the loop is (A) a1 > g, a2 > g (B) a1 > g, a2 < g
(C) a1 < g, a2 < g (D) a1 < g, a2 > g
× × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × 7. A negative charge is given to a nonconducting loop
× × × × × × × × ×
× × B× × × R × × and the loop is rotated in the plane of paper about
× × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × its centre as shown in figure. The magnetic field
× × × × × × × × ×
produced by the ring affects a small magnet placed
above the ring in the same plane :
(A) 2 (R0 + t) B clockwise
(B) (R0 + t)B clockwise
(C) 2(R0 + t)B anticlockwise
S N
(D) zero
4. The instantaneous flux associated with a closed

circuit of 10  resistance is indicated by the (A) the magnet does not rotate
following reaction  = 6t2 – 5t + 1, then the value (B) the magnet rotates clockwise as seen from
in amperes of the induced current at below.
t = 0.25 sec will be: (C) the magnet rotates anticlockwise as seen from
(A) 1.2 (B) 0.8 below
(C) 6 (D) 0.2 (D) no effect on magnet is there.
Page 164
Electromagnetic Induction 3.27
8. Two conducting rings P and Q of radii r and 2r rotate 11. A conducting square loop of side I and resistance
uniformly in opposite directions with centre of mass R moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v
velocities 2v and v respectively on a conducting perpendicular to one of its sides. A uniform and
surface S. There is a uniform magnetic field of
constant magnetic field B exists along the
magnitude B perpendicular to the plane of the rings.
perpendicular to the plane of the loop in fig. The
The potential difference between the highest points
current induced in the loop is
of the two rings is
× × × × × ×
2v B v
r 2r × × × × × ×
v
P S Q × × × × × ×
(A) zero (B) 4 Bvr × × × × × ×
(C) 8 Bvr (D) 16 Bvr (A) BI /R clockwise
(B) BI /R anticlockwise
Section B - EMF induced in Moving Rod, (C) 2BI /R anticlockwise
Rotating Ring, Disc.
(D) zero
9. A small conducting rod of length l, moves with a
uniform velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B as 12. Two identical conductors P and Q are placed on
shown in fig- two frictionless fixed conducting rails R and S in a
× ×
Y× × × × uniform magnetic field directed into the plane. If P
× × × × × ×
× × × × × × is moved in the direction shown in figure with a
 V
× × × × × ×
constant speed, then rod Q
× × × × × ×
X P Q B
(A)Then the end X of the rod becomes positively
× × ×
charged R
V
× × ×
(B) the end Y of the rod becomes positively charged
S
× × ×
(C) the entire rod is unevely charged
(D) the rod becomes hot due to joule heating.
(A) will be attracted towards P
10. Consider the situation shown in fig. The
(B) will be repelled away from P
resistanceless wire AB is slid on the fixed rails with
(C) will remain stationary
a constant velocity. If the wire AB is replaced by a
resistanceless semicircular wire, the magnitude of (D) may be repelled or attracted towards P
the induced current will
13. Two infinitely long conducting parallel rails are
× × ×A ×
connected through a capacitor C as shown in the
× ×v
figure. A conductor of length l is moved with
× × × ×
constant speed v0. Which of the following graph
× × × B×
truly depicts the variation of current through the
(A) increase (B) remain the same conductor with time ?
(C) decrease  B 
(D) increase or decrease depending on whether the  
l v0
semicircle bulges towards the resistance or away  
from it.  
Page 165
17. A rod of length l rotates with a uniform angular

Current Current
velocity  about its perpendicular bisector. A
I (t) I (t) uniform magnetic field B exists parallel to the axis
(A) (B)
t (time) t (time)
of rotation. The potential difference between the
two ends of the rod is
1
Current Current (A) zero (B) B2
I (t) I (t) 2
(C) (D)
(C) B 2 (D) 2 B 2
I = 0 t (time) t (time)
18. A rod of length 10 cm made up of conducting and

14. A long straight wire is parallel to one edge as in fig.
non-conducting material (shaded part is non-
If the current in the long wire is varies in time as I
conducting). The rod is rotated with constant
= I0e–t /, what will be the induced emf in the loop ? angular velocity 10 rad/sec about point O, in
i
d constant magnetic field of 2 tesla as shown in the
a figure. The induced emf between the point A and B
of rod will be
b × × × × ×
3cm A
× × × × ×
 0bI  d  a   0bI  d  a 
(A) ln   (B) ln  
  d  2  d  × × ×
B
× ×
× × × × ×
2cm
20 bI  d  a   0bI  d 
(C) ln   (D) ln   × × × × ×
  d    d  a 
× O × × × ×
(A) 0.029 V (B) 0.1 V
15. The magnetic field in a region is given by (C) 0.051 V (D) 0.064 V
  x
B  B 0  1   k . A square loop of edge-length d is 19. The north pole of a magnet is brought near a coil.
 a
placed with its edge along x & y axis. The loop is The induced current in the coil as seen by an
 observer on the side of magnet will be
moved with constant velocity V  V0 i . The emf
(A) in the clockwise direction
induced in the loop is
(B) in the anticlockwise direction
V0 B 0 d 2 V0 B 0 d 2
(A) (B) (C) initially in the clockwise and then anticlockwise
a 2a
direction
V0 B 0 a 2
(C) (D) None (D) initially in the anticlockwise and then
d
clockwise direction.
16. There is a uniform magnetic field B normal to the
20. A metal sheet is placed in a variable magnetic field
xy plane. A conductor ABC has length AB = l1,
which is increasing from zero to maximum.
parallel to the x-axis, and length BC = l2, parallel to
Induced current flows in the directions as shown in
the y-axis. ABC moves in the xy plane with
figure. The direction of magnetic field will be -
velocity v x i  v y j . The potential difference
between A and C is proportional to
C
j
A
B
i
(A) normal to the paper, inwards
(B) normal to the paper, outwards.
(A) vxl1 + vy l2 (B) vxl2 + vy l1
(C) from east to west
(C) vxl2 – vy l1 (D) Vxl1 – vy l2
(D) from north to south
Page 166
Section C - Self Induction, Mutual Induction 26. Two coil A and B have coefficient of mutual
inductance M = 2H. The magnetic flux passing
21. The coefficient of mutual induction between two through coil A changes by 4 Weber is 10 seconds
coils is 4H. If the current in the primary reduces due to the change in current in B. Then
from 5A to zero in 10–3 second then the induced (A) change in current in B in this time interval is 0.5 A
e.m.f. in the secondary coil will be- (B) the change in current in B in this time interval is 2A
(A) 104 V (B) 25 × 103 V (C) the change in current in B in this time interval is 8A
(C) 2 × 104 V (D) 15 × 103 V (D) a change in current of 1A in coil A will produce
a change in flux passing through B by 4 Weber.
22. The number of turns in a coil of wire of fixed radius
27. In the circuit shown in figure, a conducting wire
is 600 and its self inductance is 108 mH. The self
HE is moved with a constant speed V towards left.
inductance of a coil of 500 turns will be-
The complete circuit is placed in a uniform
(A) 74 mH (B) 75 mH 
magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the
(C) 76 mH (D) 77 mH
circuit directed in inward direction. The current in
HKDE is
23. A long solenoid contains 1000 turns/cm and an
alternating current of peak value 1A is flowing in it. A A H K
search coil of area of cross-section 1 × 10–4 m2 and × × × × ×
R × × ×
B
having 50 turns is placed inside the solenoid with its × ×
plane perpendicular to the axis of the solenoid. A peak
× × × × ×C
× ×V × × ×D
voltage of 22 × 10–2V is produced in the search coil. G E
The frequency of current in the solenoid will be –
(A) clockwise (B) anticlockwise
(A) 50 Hz (B) 100 Hz
(C) alternating (D) Zero
(C) 500 Hz (D) 1000 Hz
28. Induction furnaces work on the principle of :
24. The magnetic flux through a stationary loop with (A) self-induction (B) mutual induction
resistance R varies during interval of time T as  = (C) eddy currents (D) none of the above
at (T – t). The heat generated during this time
neglecting the inductance of loop will be Section D - L-R circuit, L-C Oscillations
2 3 2 2
a T a T
(A) (B) 3 R 29. In the adjoining circuit, initially the switch S is
3R
open. The switch ‘S’ is closed at t = 0. The
a 2T a 2T 3 difference between the maximum and minimum
(C) 3 R (D) R
current that can flow in the circuit is
25. A closed planar wire loop of area A and arbitrary
shape is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 10V s
()
magnitude B, with its plane perpendicular to 0.1 H 10
magnetic field. The resistance of the wire loop is 10
R. The loop is now turned upside down by 180° so
that its plane again becomes perpendicular to the
magnetic field. The total charge that must have (A) 2 Amp
flowen through the wire ring in the process is (B) 3 Amp
(A) < AB/R (B) = AB/R (C) 1 Amp
(C) = 2AB/R (D) None (D) nothing can be concluded
Page 167
30. Two identical inductance carry currents that vary 34. A long solenoid of N turns has a self inductance L
with time according to linear laws (as shown in and area of cross section A. When a current i
figure). In which of two inductance is the self flows through the solenoid, the magnetic field inside
induction emf greater ? it has magnitude B. The current i is equal to :
(A) BAN/L (B) BANL
I (C) BN/AL (D) B/ANL
2
1 35. The current in an L - R circuit in a time
t
t = 2L / R reduces to-
(A) 1 (B) 2 (A) 36.5% of maximum
(C) same (B) 13.5% of maximum
(D) data are insufficient to decide (C) 0.50% of maximum
(D) 63.2% of maximum
31. L, C and R represent physical quantities
inductance, capacitance and resistance. The 36. A rectangular loop of dimensions l & w and
combination which has the dimensions of resistance R moves with constant velocity V to the
frequency is right as shown in the figure. It continues to move
1 R 1 R with same speed through a region containing a
(A) and (B) and
RC L RC L uniform magnetic field B directed into the plane of
C the paper & extending a distance 3 W. Sketch the
(C) LC (D)
L flux, induced emf & external force acting on the
loop as a function of the distance.
32. In an L-R circuit connected to a battery of 3w
× × × × ×
constant e.m.f E switch S is closed at time t = 0. If v × × × × B×
e denotes the magnitude of induced e.m.f across × × × × ×
s× ×v × × ×
inductor and i the current in the circuit at any time l × × × × ×
× × × × ×
t. Then which of the following graphs shows the w × × × × ×
× × × × ×
variation of e with i ?
e e
E w s E w s
(A) (B) 3w 4w 3w 4w
i i
 
(A) s (B) s
e e F s F s
(C) (D)
i i
E w s E w s
33. A current of 2A is increasing at a rate of 3w 4w 3w 4w
4A/s through a coil of inductance 2H. The energy

 
stored in the inductor per unit time is (C) s (D) s
F s F s
(A) 2J/s (B) 1 J/s
(C) 16 J/s (D) 4 J/s
Page 168
37. An LR circuit with a battery is connected at t = 0. 40. Elecromagnetic waves travel in a medium with a
Which of the following quantities is not zero just speed of 2 × 108 m/s. The relative permeability of
after the circuit the medium is 1. What is the relative permittivity of
(A) current in the circuit the medium-
(B) magnetic field energy in the inductor (A) 2.25 (B) 3.25
(C) power delivered by the battery (C) 4.25 (D) 5.25
(D) emf induced in the inductor
41. A light beam travelling in the X-direction is
38. In figure, the switch S is closed so that a current described by the electric field Ey=(300V/m) sin
flows in the iron-core inductor which has (t – x/c). An electron is constrained to move along
inductance L and the resistance R. When the the Y-direction with a speed of 2.0 × 107 m/s. Find
switch is opened, a spark is obtained in it at the the maximum electric force and the maximum
contacts. The spark is due to magnetic force on the electron respectively.
L (A) 4.8×10–17 N, 3.2 × 10–18 N
(B) 9.6×10–17 N, 6.4 × 10–18 N
R
(C) 2.4×10–17 N, 1.6 × 10–18 N
S
(D) 3.6×10–17 N, 2.5 × 10–18 N
B
(A) a slow flux change in L
(B) a sudden increase in the emf of the battery B 42. An L – C circuit contain a 400 pF capacitor and a
100 F inductor. It is set into oscillation coupled to
(C) a rapid flux change in L
an antenna. The wavelength of the radiated
(D) a rapid flux change in R electromagnetic waves is :
(A) 377 mm (B) 377 cm
Section E - Induced, Properties of EM Waves (C) 3.77 cm (D) 377 m.
39. A cylindrical space of radius R is filled with a 43. The frequency of radiowaves corresponding to a
uniform magnetic induction B parallel to the axis of wavelength 10 m is :
(A) 3×107 s-1 (B) 3×109 s-1
the cylinder. If B changes at a constant rate, the -9 -1
(C) 3×10 s (D) 1/3×10-7 s-1
graph showing the variation of induced electric
field with distance r from the axis of cylinder is 44. In a plane e.m. wave, the electric field oscillates
× × × sinusoidally at a frequency of 2.0×1010 Hz and
× × × × × amplitude 48 V m-1. The wavelength of the wave is :
× × × × ×
R (A) 24×10-10 m (B) 1.5×10-2 m
× × × -8
(C) 4.16×10 m (D) 3×108 m
E E
(A) (B) 0
r r
E E
(C) (D)
r r
Page 169

1. B 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. C 7. B
8. C 9. B 10. B 11. B 12. A 13. C 14. B
15. A 16. C 17. A 18. C 19. B 20. B 21. C
22. B 23. A 24. A 25. C 26. B 27. D 28. C
29. C 30. A 31. A 32. A 33. C 34. A 35. B
36. A 37. D 38. C 39. A 40. A 41. A 42. D
43. A 44. B

1. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. C 6. A 7. D
8. A 9. A 10. C 11. A 12. B 13. D 14. A
15. C 16. D 17. A 18. A 19. C 20. B 21. D
22. A 23. C 24. B 25. D 26. C 27. B 28. D
29. C 30. B 31. A 32. B 33. A 34. A 35. B
36. C 37. A 38. B
1. B,D 2. A,C,D 3. B,C 4. A,B,C 5. A,B

6. A,B,C,D 7. B,D 8. B,D 9. A,D 10. A,C,D
1. 200 rad/sec 2 I– 1
r dB e E. er
3 E.F. =  a= a= k directed along tangent to the circle of radius r whose
2 dt m 2m
center lies on the axis of cylinder. 4. 5.0 V
1 4B2 vd
5. A 6. 3 V, clockwise 7. 10 V 8.
3 
mgR g mgR 0 hi m N b

9. Vterminal = ; 10. 11. 12. ln
B 2l 2 2 B 2l 2 2 a
0 ab e2 EL
13. = ILln 14. 2N 15. 16.
2 a e2 – 1 eR 2
0a  b 
17. kMT2/R 18. 42 + 20t volt 19. M ln 1   20. 6.00 mWb
2  c 
Page 170
Alternating Current 4.21

Sectio n A - Average and RMS value of Section B - AC circuit only R, Only L, Only C,
Alternating Current Combined
1. In an a.c. circuit voltage V and current i are given by  0.4 
In an L-R circuit, the value of L is 
  
V = 100 sin 100 t volts 7. henry
i = 100 sin (100t + /3) mA. and the value R is 30 ohm. If in the circuit, an
The power dissipated in the circuit is : alternating emf of 200 V rms value at 50 cycles per
(A) 104 W (B) 10 W second is connected, the impedance of the circuit
(C) 2.5 W (D) 5 W
and current will be
2. If I1, I2, I3 and I4 are the respective r.m.s. values of (A) 11.4 ohm, 17.5 ampere
the time varying currents as shown in the four cases (B) 30.7 ohm, 6.5 ampere
I, II, III and IV. Then identify the correct relations. (C) 40.4 ohm, 5 ampere
i i (D) 50 ohm, 4 ampere.
I0 I0
O t O t 8. A series LCR circuit is tuned to resonance. The
–I0
impedance of the circuit now is
1/ 2
i i  2  1  
2
I0 I0 (A)  R    L –  
O t O t   C  
–I0 –I0 1/ 2
 2  1  
2
(A) I1 = I2 = I3 = I4 (B) I3 > I1 = I2 > I4 (B)  R  (  L) 2

   
  C  
(C) I3 > I4 > I2 = I1 (D) I3 > I2 > I1 > I4
1/ 2
 2  1  
2
3. If instantaneous value of current is I = 10 sin (314 (C)  R   –  L   (D) R

  C  
t) A, then the average current for the half cycle will
be – 9. A capacitor C with a charge Q0 is connected across
(A) 10 A (B) 7.07 A an inductor through a switch S. If at t = 0, the switch
(C) 6.37 A (D) 3.53 A is closed, then find the instantaneous charge q on
the upper plate of capacitor.
4. In a circuit an a.c. current and a d, c. current are
supplied together. The expression of the ++
Q0 C
instantaneous current is given as i = 3 + 6 sin t L
Then the rms value of the current is –
(A) 3 (B) 6 S
(C) 3 2 (D) 3 3
 1 
(A) q = 2Q0sin  LC t  2 
5. The emf and the current in a circuit are – E = 12 sin  
(100t) ; = 4 sin (100t + / 3) then–
(A) The current leads the emf by 60º
Q0  1 
(B) The current lags the emf by 60º (B) q = sin  t  
2  LC 2 
(C) The emf leads the current by 60º
(D) The phase difference between the current and
the emf is zero  1 
(C) q = Q0sin  LC t  2 
 
6. The value of alternating e.m.f. is e = 500 sin 100t,
 1 
then the frequency of this potential in Hz is –
(D) q = Q0sin  LC t  2 
(A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 75 (D) 100  
Page 171
10. When 100 volt D.C. is applied across a coil, a current 15. The power factor of the circuit is 1/ 2 . The
of one ampere flows through it, when 100 V ac of capacitance of the circuit is equal to
50 Hz is applied to the same coil, only 0.5 amp flows. 2 sin (100 t)
Calculate the resistance and inductance of the coil.
(A) 100, 3 / H (B) 10, 3 / H
10 0.1 H
2 3 3 3
(C) 100, H (D) 100, H
  C
(A) 400 F (B) 300 F
11. A series circuit consists of a resistance, inductance (C) 500 F (D) 200 F
and capacitance. The applied voltage and the
current at any instant are given by 16. An LCR series circuit with 100  resistance is
E = 141.4 cos (5000 t – 10°) and I = 5 cos (5000 t connected to an ac source of 200 V and angular
– 370°) The inductance is 0.01 henry. Calculate frequency 300 rad/s. When only the capacitance is
the value of capacitance. removed, the current lags behind the voltage by 60°.
(A) 5  F (B) 1  F When only the inductance is removed, the current
(C) 4  F (D) 6  F leads the voltage by 60°. Calculate the current and
the power dissipated in the LCR circuit.
12. Power factor of an L-R series circuit is 0.6 and (A) 2A, 300 W (B) 1A, 400 W
that of a C–R series circuit is 0.5. If the element (C) 3A, 100 W (D) 2A, 400 W
(L, C, and R) of the two circuits are joined in series
the power factor of this circuit is found to be 1. The 17. A current of 4 A flows in a coil when connected to a
ratio of the resistance in the L-R circuit to the 12 V dc source. If the same coil is connected to a
resistance in the C-R circuit is 12V, 50 rad/s ac source a current of 2.4 A flows in
(A) 6/5 (B) 5/6 the circuit. Determine the inductance of the coil.
4 3 3 Also find the power developed in the circuit if a
(C) (D) 2500 F capacitor is connected in series with the
3 3 4
coil.
Section C - Power in an AC circuit, Resonance, (A) 0.08 H, 17.28 W (B) 1 H, 5.28 W
Quality Factor (C) 0.5 H, 17 W (D) 2 H, 5.9 W
13. The potential difference V and current i flowing 18. A capacitor C = 2  F and an inductor with
L = 10 H and coil resistance 5  are in series in a
through an a.c. circuit are given by V = 5 cos  t
circuit. When an alternating current of r.m.s. value
volt, i = 2 sin t amp. the power dissipated in the
2 A flows in the circuit, the average power in watts in
circuit. the circuit is
(A) 0 W (B) 10 W (A) 100 (B) 50
(C) 5 W (D) 2.5 W (C) 20 (D) 10
14. A voltage of peak value 283 V varying frequency Section D - Transformer, AC Generator
is applied to a series L-C-R combination in which
R = 3; L = 25 mH and C = 400 F. Then, the 19. Which of the following options are correct :
frequency (in Hz) of the source at which maximum (A) Step up transformer increases input voltage
(B) Step down transformer increases input voltage
power is dissipated in the above, is
(C) Step up transformer decreases input voltage
(A) 51.5 (B) 50.7
(D) Step down transformer decreases input voltage
(C) 51.1 (D) 50.3
Page 172
1. D 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. B 7. A
8. A 9. C 10. C 11. A 12. A 13. C 14. C
15. D 16. B 17. B 18. A 19. A 20. D

1. C 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. D
8. D 9. C 10. A 11. C 12. D 13. A 14. D
15. C 16. D 17. A 18. C 19. D

1. ABD 2. BCD 3. CD 4. ABC 5. A,D

5π 1 2 2 1/2
1. 2. I 20  0.5 I 12 3. (i + i ) 4. LI/2R 5. 9.2 mF
6 2 1 2
6. 20 V 7. 2H 8. (a) 5.5 A (b) 1.188 kw (c) 0.939 lag 9. 3:5
1 2 1/2
1. Ieff = [a2 + b] 2. E = 200 sin 314t
2
 max  max
 C1  1    
3. C2 =  1   L –  ; C1 = C2 1  C1  L – 1

 C2  (C1  C2 )  C1  C2  (C1  C2 ) 
4. 42 + 20t volt 5. 77W, 97.6W, 7.7V, 9.76V

1. B 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. C 7. B
8. D 9. D 10. D 11. B 12. A 13. A 14. C
15. B 16. C 17. B 18. C

1. B 2. D 3. C 4. B
5. (A) ® R,S,T ; (B) ® Q,R,S,T ; (C) ® P, Q ; (D) ® Q,R,S,T
6. B,C 7. 4 8. A,C
9. B 10. A 11. C,D 12. 8 13. C,D
14. A,D 15. 2.00
Page 173
Modern Physics-1 1.33
Section A -Photoelectric Effect 5. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons

emitted from a surface when photons of energy
6 eV fall on it is 4eV. The stopping potential is Volts
1. If the frequency of light in a photoelectric experiment
is :
is doubled, the stopping potential will
(A) 2 (B) 4
(A) be doubled
(C) 6 (D) 10
(B) halved
(C) become more than doubled 6. Let nr and nb be respectively the number of photons
(D) become less than double emitted by a red bulb and a blue bulb of equal power
in a given time.
2. The stopping potential for the photo electrons emitted (A) nr = nb (B) nr < nb
from a metal surface of work function 1.7eV is 10.4 (C) nr > nb (D) data insufficient
V. Identify the energy levels corresponding to the
7. 10–3 W of 5000 Å light is directed on a photoelectric
transitions in hydrogen atom which will result in
cell. If the current in the cell is 0.16 mA, the
emission of wavelength equal to that of incident
percentage of incident photons which produce
radiation for the above photoelectric effect photoelectrons, is
(A) n = 3 to 1 (B) n = 3 to 2 (A) 0.4% (B) .04%
(C) n = 2 to 1 (D) n = 4 to 1 (C) 20% (D) 10%
3. When a photon of light collides with a metal surface, 8. A point source of light is used in photoelectric effect.
number of electrons, (if any) coming out is If the source is removed farther from the emitting
(A) only one (B) only two metal, the stopping potential :
(A) will increase
(C) infinite (D) depends upon factors
(B) will decrease
(C) will remain constant
4. A point source causes photoelectric effect from a (D) will either increase or decrease
small metal plate. Which of the following curves
may represent the saturation photocurrent as a 9. Cut off potentials for a metal in photoelectric effect
function of the distance between the source and for light of wavelength 1, 2 and 3 is found to be
the metal? V1, V 2 and V 3 volts if V 1, V 2 and V 3 are in
Arithmetic Progression and 1, 2 and 3 will be :
i (A) Arithmetic Progression
i
(B) Geometric Progression
(C) Harmonic Progression
(A) (B) (D) None
t t 10. Photons with energy 5eV are incident on a cathode

C, on a photoelectric cell. The maximum energy of
the emitted photoelectrons is 2eV. When photons
i of energy 6eV are incident on C, no photoelectrons
i
will reach the anode A if the stopping potential of A
relative to C is
(C) (D) (A) 3V (B) –3V
t t (C) –1V (D) 4V
Page 174
Section B - Radiation Pressure, Matter Waves 18. The kinetic energy of an electron is E when the
+ Davisson Germer Experiment incident wavelength is . To increase the KE of the
electron to 2E, the incident wavelength must be
11. A proton and an electron are accelerated by same (A) 2 (B) /2
potential difference have de-Broglie wavelength p
(C) (hc)/(E+hc) (D) (hc)/(E+hc)
and e.
(A) e = p (B) e < p
(C) e > p (D) none of these 19. If 0 stands for mid-wavelength in the visible region,
the de Broglie wavelength for 100 V electrons is
12. An electron with initial kinetic energy of 100eV is nearest to
acceleration through a potential difference of 50V. (A) 0/5 (B) 0/50
Now the de-Broglie wavelength of electron (C) 0/500 (D) 0/5000
becomes.
(A) 1 Å (B) 1. 5 Å 20. Light of wavelength  strikes a photoelectric surface
and electrons are ejected with kinetic energy K. If
(C) 3Å (D) 12.27 Å
K is to be increased to exactly twice its original
value, the wavelength must be changed to  such
13. If h is Planck’s constant is SI system, the momentum
that
of a photon of wavelength 0.01 Å is:
(A) 10–2 h (B) h (A) ’ < /2 (B) ’>/2
(C) 102 h (D) 1012h (C) >’>/2 (D) ’=/2
14. When a centimeter thick surface is illuminated with Section C -Bohr Model, Bohr Model nuclear
light of wavelength , the stopping potential is V. motion
When the same surface is illuminated by light of
wavelength 2  , the stopping potential is V/3. 21. The angular momentum of an electron in the
Threshold wavelenth for the metallic surface is
3h
(A) 4/3 (B) 4 hydrogen atom is . Here h is Planck’s constant.
2
(C) 6 (D) 8/3
The kinetic energy of this electron is :
15. Out of a photon and an electron, the equation (A) 4.53 eV (B) 1.51 eV
E = pc, is valid for (C) 3.4 eV (D) 6.8 eV
(A) both (B) neither
(C) photon only (D) electron only 22. Consider the following electronic energy level
diagram of H-atom : Photons associated with
16. If a photocell is illuminated with a radiation of 1240
shortest and longest wavelengths would be emitted
Å, then stopping potential is found to be 8 V. The
work function of the emitter and the threshold from the atom by the transitions labelled.
wavelength are
n=
(A) 1 eV, 5200 Å (B) 2 eV, 6200 Å A
n=4
(C) 3 eV, 7200 Å (D) 4 eV, 4200 Å D
C n=3
17. Silver has a work function of 4.7 eV. When B

n=2
ultraviolet light of wavelength 100 mm is incident
upon it, a potential of 7.7 V is required to stop the n=1
photoelectrons from reaching the collector plate.

How much potential will be required to stop the (A) D and C respectively
photoelectrons when light of wavelength 200 mm (B) C and A respectively
is incident upon silver? (C) C and D respectively
(A) 1.5 V (B) 3.85 V (D) A and C respectively
(C) 2.35 V (D) 15.4 V
Page 175
23. If the electron in a hydrogen atom were in the 30. In a sample of hydrogen like atoms all of which are
energy level with n = 3, how much energy in joule in ground state, a photon beam containing photons
would be required to ionise the atom ? (Ionisation of various energies is passed. In absorption
energy of H-atom is 2.18 × 10–18 J): spectrum, five dark lines are observed. The number
(A) 6.54 × 10–19 (B) 1.43 × 10–19 of bright lines in the emission spectrum will be
–19
(C) 2.42 × 10 (D) 3.14 × 10–20 (Assume that all transitions take place)
(A) 5 (B) 10
24. In a hydrogen atom, the electron is in nth excited (C) 15 (D) none of these
state. It may come down to second excited state
by emitting ten different wavelengths. What is the Section D -Atomic Collisions
value of n:
(A) 6 (B) 7 31. A neutron collides head on with a stationary
(C) 8 (D) 5 hydrogen atom in ground state
(A) If kinetic energy of the neutron is less than
13.6 eV, collision must be elastic
25. Difference between nth and (n + 1)th Bohr’s (B) if kinetic energy of the neutron is less than 13.6
radius of ‘H’ atom is equal to it’s eV, collision may be inelastic.
(n – 1)th Bohr’s radius. The value of n is : (C) inelastic collision takes place when initial kinetic
energy of neutron is greater than 13.6 eV.
(A) 1 (B) 2 (D) perfectly inelastic collision cannot take place.
(C) 3 (D) 4
32. The electron in a hydrogen atom make a transition
26. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes transition from an excited state to the ground state. Which of
from M shell to L. The ratio of magnitudes of initial the following statement is true?
to final centripetal acceleration of the electron is (A) Its kinetic energy increases and its potential
(A) 9 : 4 (B) 81 : 16 and total energies decrease
(C) 4 : 9 (D) 16 : 81 (B) Its kinetic energy decreases, potential energy
increases and its total energy remains the same.
27. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition (C) Its kinetic and total energies decrease and its
n1  n2 whose n1 and n2 are the principal quantum potential energy increases.
numbers of the two states. Assume the Bohr model (D) Its kinetic potential and total energies decreases.
to be valid. The frequency of orbital motion of the
electron in the initial state is 1/27 of that in the final 33. An H atom in ground state is moving with initial
state. The possible values of n1 and n2 are kinetic energy K. It collides head on with a He+ ion
(A) n1 = 4, n2 = 2 (B) n1 = 3, n2 = 1 in ground state kept at rest but free to move. Find
(C) n1 = 8, n2 = 1 (D) n1 = 6, n2 = 3 minimum value of K so that both the particles can
excite to their first excited state.
28. The radius of Bohr’s first orbit is a0. The electron (A) 63.75 eV (B) 31.86 eV
in nth orbit has a radius : (C) 137.50 eV (D) 14.95 eV
(A) na0 (B) a0/n
2
(C) n a0 (D) a0/n 2 34. An electron collides with a hydrogen atom in its
ground state and excites it to n = 3. The energy
29. The ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6
given to hydrogen atom in this inelastic collision is
volt. The energy required to remove an electron
[Neglect the recoiling of hydrogen atom]
from the second orbit of hydrogen is :
(A) 10.2 eV (B) 12.1 eV
(A) 3.4 eV (B) 6.8 eV
(C) 12.5 eV (D) None of these
(C) 13.6 eV (D) 27.2 eV
Page 176
35. A neutron having kinetic energy 5 eV is incident on Section E – X–rays production, X–Rays
a hydrogen atom in its ground state. The collision Moseley’s law, X–Ray Properties
(A) must be elastic 41. In a characteristic X-ray spectra of some atom
(B) must be completely inelastic superimposed on continuous X-ray spectra
(C) may be partially elastic
Relativeintensity
Q
P
(D) information is insufficient
36. An electron of energy 11.2 eV undergoes an

inelastic collision with a hydrogeon atom in its ground (A) P represents K line
(B) Q represents K line
state. [Neglect recoiling of atom as mH >> me]. Then
(C) Q and P represents K and K lines respectively
in this case
(D) Relative positions of K and K depend on the
(A) The outgoing electron has energy 11.2 eV
particular atom
(B) The entire energy is absorbed by the H atom
and the electron stops
42. Which of the following wavelength falls in a X-rays
(C) 10.2 eV of the incident electron energy is region?
absorbed by the H atom and the electron would (A) 10,000 Å (B) 1000 Å
come out with 1.0 eV energy (C) 1 Å (D) 10–2 Å
(D) None of the above
43. The penetrating power of X-ray increases with the
37. The recoil speed of hydrogen atom after it (A) Increases of its velocity
emits a photon in going from n = 2 state to n =1 (B) Increase in its intensity
state is nearly [Take R  = 1.1 × 10 –1 and (C) Decrease in its velocity
h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js] (D) Increases in its frequency.
(A) 1.5 ms–1 (B) 3.3 ms–1
(C) 4.5 ms –1
(D) 6.6 ms–1 44. If the frequency of K, K and L X-rays for a
meterial K  ,  K ,  L respectively, then
38. The recoil speed of a hydrogen atom after it emits
(A)  K =  K +  L (B)  L =  K +  K
a photon in going from n = 5 state to n = 1 state is -
(A) 4.718 ms–1 (B) 7.418 ms–1 (C)  K =  K +  L (D) none of these
–1
(C) 4.178 ms (D) 7.148 ms–1
45. In X-ray tube, when the accelerating voltage V is
39. A neutron moving with a speed v makes a head-on doubled, the different between the wavelength of
collision with a hydrogen atom in ground state kept at K line and the minimum cut off of continuous
rset. The minimum kinetic energy of the neutron for X-ray spectum :
which inelastic collision will take place is (assume that (A) remains constant
mass of proton is neraly equal to the mass of neutron) (B) becomes more than half
(A) 10.2 eV (B) 20.4 eV (C) becomes half
(C) 12.1 eV (D) 16.8 eV (D) becomes less than 2 times.
40. A hydrogen atom is in 5th excited state. When the 46. The voltage applied to an X-ray tube is 18 kV. The
electron jumps to ground state, the velocity of maximum mass of photon emitted by the X-ray tube
recoiling hydrogen atom is- will be
(A) 1.1 m/s (B) 4.2 m/s (A) 2×10-13 kg (B) 3.2 ×10-36 kg
-32
(C) 3.2 ×10 kg (D) 9.1×10-31 kg
(C) 8.4 m/s (D) 11.2 m/s
Page 177
47. The wavelength of Ka X-rays of two metals ‘A’ 49. The energy of a tungsten atom with a vacancy in L
and ‘B’ are 4/1875 R and 1/675 R, respectively, shell is 11.3 keV. Wavelength of K photon for
where ‘R’ is Rydberg’s constant. The number of tungsten is 21.3 pm. If a potential difference of 62
elements lying between ‘A’ and ‘B’ according to kV is applied across the X-rays tube following
their atomic numbers is characteristic x-rays will be produced.
(A) 3 (B) 6 (A) K, L series (B) only K & L series
(C)5 (D)4 (C) only L series (D) none
48. The element which has a Ka X-rays line of wave- 50. When the voltage applied to an X-ray tube increases
length 1.8 Å is
from V1 =10kV to V2 = 20 kV, the wavelength
(R = 1.1 × 107 m-1, b = 1 and 5/ 33 = 0.39)
interval between K line and cut-off wavelength of
(A) Co, Z = 27 (B) Iron, Z = 26
continuous spectrum increase by a factor of 3.
(C) Mn, Z = 25 (D) Ni, Z = 28
Atomic number of the metalic target is
(A) 28 (B) 29
(C) 65 (D) 66
Page 178

1. C 2. A 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. C 7. B
8. C 9. C 10. B 11. C 12. A 13. D 14. B
15. C 16. B 17. A 18. C 19. D 20. C 21. B
22. C 23. C 24. A 25. D 26. D 27. B 28. C
29. A 30. C 31. A 32. A 33. A 34. B 35. A
36. C 37. B 38. C 39. B 40. B 41. C 42. C
43. D 44. C 45. B 46. C 47. D 48. A 49. C
50. B
1. D 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. B
8. C 9. A 10. C 11. D 12. D 13. D 14. C
15. A 16. D 17. C 18. B 19. B 20. B 21. A
22. B 23. C 24. C 25. D 26. A 27. D 28. B
29. A 30. C 31. B 32. C 33. B 34. B
1. A,C 2. B,C 3. A,B,C 4. A,C 5. A,B

6. A,C,D 7. A,D 8. A,C,D 9. A,C,D 10. A,C
11. A,B,D 12. A,D 13. A,B 14. A,B,C 15. B,C
1. 885 2. (a) 2.25 eV (b) 4.2 eV (c) 2.0 eV, 0.5 eV 3. 0.6 Volt, 2.0 mA
4. when the potential is steady, photo electric emission just stop when hv = (3 + 1) eV = 4.0 eV
5.  5.76 1011 A 6. 940.96 V 7. Photon
8. Power of electron microscope is 105 times as large as that of the optical microscrope.
9. –h/e Et2 10. 8.6 MeV 11. 487.06 nm 12. 4.26 m/s, 13.2 eV
13. 7 : 36 14. 18/5R 15. 1.257 × 10–23 Am2 16. By theory
17. Z=2&n=5
18. a. nb  2 ; b. 14.4 eV ; c. Emax = 13.5 eV & Emin = 0.7 eV
19. One electron having kinetic energy nearly 11.6 eV
20. 63.75 eV 21. fb = fa –2 f 22. 6210 eV
23. during combination = 3.365 eV; after combination = 3.88 eV (5  3) & 2.63 eV (4  3)
24. 62.5 × 10–12, 192.5 × 10–12 25. 69.5 Kev
Page 179
Section A - RUTHERFORD'S EXPERIMENT, 5. Order of magnitude of density of uranium nucleus

NUCLEAR PROPERTIES (RADIUS, DENSITY, is [mP=1.67×10-27kg]
ISOTOPES ETC.)
(A) 1020kg m-3 (B) 1017 kg m-3
(C) 1014 kg m-3 (D) 1011 kg m-3
1. Why is a 42 He nucleus more stable than a 4
3 Li
nucleus?
6. Let u be denote one atomic mass unit. One atom of
(A) The strong nuclear force is larger when the
neutron to proton ratio is higher. an element of mass number A has mass exactly
equal to Au.
(B) The laws of nuclear physics forbid a nucleus
from containing more protons than neutrons. (A) for any value of A
(C) Forces other than the strong nuclear force make (B) only for A = 1
the lithium nucleus less stable. (C) only for A = 12
(D) None of the above. (D) for any value of A provided the atom is stable
2. An element A decays into an element C by a two- Section B - MASS DEFECT, BINDING ENERGY,
step process : STABILITY
A B + He 42 and B  C + 2e01 7. The binding energies of nuclei X and Y are E1 and

Then E2 respectively. Two atoms of X fuse to give one
atom of Y and an energy Q is released. Then
(A) A and C are isotopes
(A) Q = 2E1 – E2 (B) Q = E2 – 2E1
(B) A and C are isobars
(C) Q = 2E1 + E2 (D) Q = 2E2 + E1
(C) B and C are isotopes
(D) A and B are isobars
8. The binding energies of the atom of elements A &
B are E a & E b respectively. Three atom of the
3. Which of the following statements is
element B fuse to give one atom of element A. This
incorrect for nuclear forces ?
fusion process is accompained by release of energy
(A) These are strongest in magnitude.
e. Then Ea, Eb are related to each other as
(B) They are charge dependent.
(A) Ea + e = 3Eb (B) Ea = 3Eb
(C) They are effective only for short ranges.
(C) Ea – e = 3Eb (D) Ea+3Eb+e=0
(D) They result from interaction of every nucleon
with the nearest limited number of nucleons.
9. Consider the nuclear reaction
4. Fast neutrons can easily be slowed down by X200  A110 + B90
(A) the use of lead shielding If the binding energy per nucleon for X, A and B is
7.4 MeV, 8.2 MeV and 8.2 MeV respectively, what
(B) passing them through heavy water
is the energy released?
(C) elastic collision with heavy nuclei
(A) 200 MeV (B) 160 MeV
(D) applying a strong electric field
(C) 110 MeV (D) 90 MeV
Page 180
10. A heavy nucleus having mass number 200 gets 16. In a RA element the fraction of initiated amount
disintegrated into two small fragments of mass remaining after its mean life time is :
number 80 and 120. If binding energy per nucleon
1 1
for parent atom is 6.5 M eV and far daughter nuclei (A) 1 – (B)
e e2
is 7 MeV and 8 MeV respectively, then the energy
released in the decay will be – 1 1
(A) 200 MeV (B) –220 MeV (C) (D) 1 –
e e2
(C) 220 MeV (D) 180 MeV
17. Two radioactive material A1 and A2 have decay

11. Consider the nuclear reaction X200  A 110 + B80. constants of 10 0 and 0. If initially they have same
If the binding energy per nucleon for X, A and B number of nuclei, the ratio of number of their
are 7.4 MeV, 8.2 MeV and 8.1 MeV respectively, undecayed nuclei will be (1/e) after a time
then the energy released in the reaction -
(A) 70 MeV (B) 200 MeV 1 1
(A)  (B) 9
0 0
(C) 190 MeV (D) 10 MeV
1
12. Binding energy per nucleon of 1H2 and 2He4 are (C) 10 (D) 1
0
1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV respectively. Energy
released in the process 1H2 + 1H2 = 2He4 is -
(A) 20.8 MeV (B) 16.6 MeV 18. The half-life of 131I is 8 days. Given a sample of
131
I at time t = 0, we can assert that :
(C) 25.2 MeV (D) 23.6 MeV
(A) no nucleus will decays before t = 4 days
(B) no nucleus will decays before t = 8 days
Section C -RADIOACTIVING LAW
(C) all nuclei will decays before t = 16 days
13. The radioactivity of a sample is R1 at time T1 and (D) a given nucleus may decay at any time after t = 0.
R2 at time T2. If the half life of the specimen is T.
Number of atoms that have disintegrated in time Section D - , , DECAY, FISSION & FUSSION
(T2 – T1) is proportional to
(A) (R1T1 – R2T2) (B) (R1 – R2) T
19. The following nuclear reaction is an example of
(C) (R1 – R2)/T (D) (R1–R2) (T1 – T2)
12
6 C + 42 H  16
8 O
+ energy
14. The decay constant of the end product of a (A) fission (B) fusion
radioactive series is (C) alpha decay (D) beta decay
(A) zero (B) infinite
(C) finite (non zero) 20. The rest mass of the deuteron, 12 H , is equivalent to
(D) depends on the end product. an energy of 1876 MeV, the rest mass of a proton
is equivalent to 939 MeV and that of a neutron to
15. The radioactive sources A and B of half lives of 940 MeV. A deuteron may disintegrate to a proton
2 hr and 8 hr respectively, initially contain the same and a neutron if it :
number of radioactive atoms. At the end of 2 hours, (A) emits a  - ray photon of energy 2 MeV
their rates of disintegration are in the ratio : (B) captures a -ray photon of energy 2 MeV
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) emits a  - ray photon of energy 3 Me V
(C) 2 :1 (D) 1 : 1 (D) captures a -ray photon of energy 3 MeV
Page 181
21. In an -decay the Kinetic energy of  particle is 23. If a nucleus such as 226
Ra that is initially at rest
48 MeV and Q-value of the reaction is 50 MeV. undergoes alpha decay, then which of the following
The mass number of the mother nucleus is : statements is true?
(Assume that daughter nucleus is in ground state) (A) The alpha particle has more kinetic
(A) 96 (B) 100 energy than the daughter nucleus.
(C) 104 (D) none of these (B) The alpha particle has less kinetic
energy than the daughter nucleus.
(C) The alpha particle and daughter nucleus both
22. The number of  and  – –emitted during the have same kinetic energy.
radioactive decay chain starting from 226
Ra and (D) We cannot say anything about kinetic energy
88
of alpha particle and daughter nucleus.
206
ending at 82 Pb us
24. In a large sample of 235U (which is alpha active)
(A) 3 & 6– (B) 4 & 5–
(A) the probability of a nucleus disintegrating during
(C) 5 & 4– (D) 6 & 6– one second is lower in first half life and greater in
2nd half life.
(B) the probability of a nucleus to decay during one
sec remains constant for all time.
(C) an appreciable quantity of 235 U remain
undecayed even after average life.
(D) None of these
Page 182

1. A 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. B
8. C 9. B 10. C 11. A 12. D 13. B 14. A
15. C 16. C 17. B 18. D 19. B 20. D 21. B
22. C 23. A 24. C

1. A 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. C 6. B 7. A
8. A 9. D 10. C 11. C 12. B 13. A

1. B,C,D 2. B,C 3. A,C 4. A,B,D 5. B,C
6. A,B,D 7. A,B,D 8. A,B,C 9. C,D 10. A,C,D
11. A,B,C 12. ABC
1. 2 2. 7.02 fermi 3. 2.48 × 10–12 m 4. 28 MeV

5. 4.0016 u 6. 492 MeV 7. (A) 4.816 MeV (B) 3.254 MeV
8. 23.6 MeV 9. 152 min. 10. 4.5 × 1010 y old
 l n5 
11. (i) 40
18
40
Ar  1 e0  v , (ii) 4.2 × 109 years 12. t   13. 1.86 MeV
19 K
 ln 2 
14. (A) K 20
40
19
40
Ca  e –   , 19
40
K 1840 Ar  e   , 40
19 K  e – 18
40
Ar  
(B) 1.3034 MeV, 0.4676 MeV, 1.490 MeV
15. 5.304 MeV 16. 5.58 MeV

2. v = ult 3. 4.87 Mev 4. 7.01366 amu 5. 3.3 × 10–6 g

0.2E 0 t – (1  e – t )
6.  7. 6.04 × 109 yrs 8. 1.7 × 1010 years
T 
mS
1. B 2. A 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. B
8. C 9. B 10. B 11. B 12. B 13. A 14. B
15. C 16. B 17. B 18. C 19. A 20. D 21. C
22. C 23. A 24. B

1. A 2. B 3. C 4. (A) P,Q ; (B) P,R ; (C) S,P ; (D) P,Q,R
5. A 6. B 7. B 8. (A) R, P ; (B) Q, S ; (C) P ; (D) Q
9. B,D 10. A 11. D 12. A 13. B 14. 8 15. 1
16. C 17. D 18. 4 19. C 20. A 21. C 22. C
23. C 24. 9 25. 5 26. AC
Page 183
3.26 - Theory and Exercise Book

1. In conductors - 7. Wires P and Q have the same resistance at ordinary
(A) conduction band is completely empty but (room) temperature. When heated, resistance of
forbidden energy gap is small P increases and that of Q decreases. We conclude
(B) conduction and valence bands are overlapped that -
(C) valence band is completely filled but the (A) P and Q are conductors of different materials
conduction band is completely empty (B) P is N-type semiconductor and Q is
(D) no energy band is present P-type semiconductor
(C) P is semiconductor and Q is conductor
2. The forbidden energy gap of a germanium
(D) P is conductor and Q is semiconductor
semiconductor is 0.75 eV. The minimum thermal
energy of electrons reaching the conduction band
8. In a good conductor the energy gap between the
from the valence band should be -
(A) 0.5 eV (B) 0.75 eV conduction band and the valence band is -
(C) 0.25 eV (D) 1.5eV (A) Infinite (B) Wide
(C) Narrow (D) Zero
3. The energy of a photon of sodium light
( = 5890Å) equals the band gap of a semiconductor. 9. In a semiconducting material the mobilities of
The minimum energy required to create an electron- electrons and holes are e and h respectively. Which
hole pair is - of the following is true ?
(A) 0.026 eV (B) 0.31 eV (A) e > h (B) e < h
(C) 2.1eV (D) 6.4 eV (C) e = h (D) e < 0; h > 0
4. The forbidden energy band gap in conductors, 10. Those materials in which number of holes in valence
semiconductors and insulators are EG1, EG2 and
band is equal to number of electrons in conduction
EG3 respectively. The relation among them is -
band are called
(A) EG1 = EG2 = EG3 (A) conductors
(B) EG1 < EG2 < EG3 (B) Intrinsic semiconductors
(C) p-type semiconductors
(C) EG1 > EG2 > EG3
(D) n-type semiconductors
(D) EG1 < EG2 > EG3
11. In p-type semiconductor holes move in
5. On increasing temperature the specific resistance of (A) forbidden region (B) conduction band
a semiconductor - (C) valence band (D) all the above regions
(A) decreases
(B) increases
12. Which of the following statement is wrong ?
(C) remains constant
(D) becomes zero (A) Resistance of extrinsic semiconductors can be
changed as required
6. Which of the following statements is not correct ? (B) In n-type semiconductor the number of electrons
(A) Resistance of semiconductor decreases with increases in valence band
increase in temperature (C) In p-type semiconductors the number of holes
(B) In an electric field, displacement of holes is increases in valence band
opposite to the displacement of electrons (D) In pure semiconductor fermi band is situated in
(C) Resistance of a conductor decreases with the
between the valence band and conduction band
increase in temperature
(D) n-type semiconductors are neutral
Page 184
SEMICONDUCTORS - 3.27
13. P-type semiconductor is formed when - 19. A potential difference of 2V is applied between the
A. As impurity is mixed in Si opposite faces of a Ge crystal plate of area 1 cm2 and
B. A impurity is mixed in Si thickness 0.5 mm. If the concentration of electrons in
C. B impurity is mixed in Ge Ge is 2×1019/m3 and mobilities of electrons and holes
D. P impurity is mixed in Ge m2 m2
(A) A and C (B) A and D are 0.36 and 0.14 respectively,,
volt  sec volt  sec
(C) B and C (D) B and D then the current flowing through the plate will be -
(A) 0.25 A (B) 0.45 A
14. In extrinsic semiconductors - (C) 0.56 A (D) 0.64 A
(A) The conduction band and valence band overlap
(B) The gap between conduction band and valence
20. A potential barrier of 0.50 V exists across a
band is more than 16 eV
P-N junction. If the depletion region is
(C) The gap between conduction band and valence
5.0 × 10–7 m wide, the intensity of the electric field
band is near about 1 eV
(D) The gap between conduction band and valence in this region is -
band will be 100 eV and more (A) 1.0 × 106 V/m (B) 1.0 × 105\ V/m
5
(C) 2.0 × 10 V/m (D) 2.0 × 106 V/m
15. Fermi level of energy of an intrinsic semiconductor
lies - 21. If no external voltage is applied across P-N junction,
(A) In the middle of forbidden gap there would be -
(B) Below the middle of forbidden gap (A) No electric field across the junction
(C) Above the middle of forbidden gap (B) An electric field pointing from N-type to
(D) Outside the forbidden gap
P-type side across the junction
(C) An electric field pointing from P-type to
16. If ne and vd be the number of electrons and drift
N-type side across the junction
velocity in a semiconductor. When the temperature is
increased - (D) A temporary electric field during formation of
(A) ne increases and vd decreases P-N junction that would subsequently disappear
(B) ne decreases and vd increases
(C) Both ne and vd increases 22. No bias is applied to a P-N junction, then the
(D) Both ne and vd decreases current -
(A) Is zero because the number of charge carriers
17. The electron mobility in N-type germanium flowing on both sides is same
is 3900 cm 2 /v.s and its conductivity is (B) Is zero because the charge carriers do not move
6.24 mho/cm, then impurity concentration will be if
(C) Is non-zero
the effect of cotters is negligible -
(D) None of these
(A) 1015 cm3 (B) 1013/cm3
(C) 1012/cm3 (D) 1016/cm3
23. Just before the reverse breakdown in a
semiconductor diode -
18. In semiconductor the concentrations of electrons
and holes are 8 × 10 18 /m3 and 5 × 10 18 /m3 (A) The forward current is much larger then the
respectively. If the mobilities of electrons and hole reverse current
are 2.3 m2 /volt-sec and 0.01 m 2 /volt-sec (B) The forward current is much less then
respectively, then semiconductor is - the reverse current
(A) N-type and its resistivity is 0.34 ohm-metre (C) The forward current is equal to the reverse
(B) P-type and its resistivity is 0.034 ohm-metre current
(C) N-type and its resistivity is 0.034 ohm-metre (D) The reverse current is much large than
(D) P-type and its resistivity is 3.40 ohm-metre the forward current
Page 185
24. The main cause of avalanche breakdown is - 31. A semiconductor X is made by doping a germanium
(A) collision ionisation crystal with arsenic (Z = 33). A second
(B) high dopring semiconductor Y is made by doping germanium with
(C) recombination of electron and holes indium (Z = 49). The two are joined end to end and
(D) none of these connected to a battery as shown. Which of the
following statements is correct ?
25. The main cause of Zener breakdown is -
X Y
(A) the base semiconductor being germanium
(B) production of electron-hole pair due to electric
field
(C) low doping
(D) high doping
(A) X is P-type, Y is N-type and the junction is
26. Which of the following statements is correct ? forward biased
(A) The deplection region of P-N junction (B) X is N-type, Y is P-type and the junction is
diode increases with forward biasing forward biased
(B) The depletion region of P-N junction diode (C) X is P-type, Y is N-type and the junction is
decreases with reverse biasing reverse biased
(C) The depletion region of P-N junction diode does (D) X is N-type, Y is P-type and the junction is
not change with biasing revese biased
(D) The deplection region of P-N junction
diode decreases with forward biasing 32. In the given figure, which of the diodes are forward
biased ?
27. When reverse bias in a junction diode is increased,
+5
the width of depletion layer - V +10V
(A) increase (B) decreases R
(C) does not change (D) fluctuate 1. 2. +5V
28. A semiconductor device is connected in a series circuit

with a battery and resistance. A current is found to pass
through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is 3. 4.
reversed, the current drops almost to zero. The device –10V –12V
may be - R
(A) A P-type semiconductor 5.
–5V
(B) An N-type semiconductor R
(C) A PN-junction
–10V
(D) An intrinsic semiconductor
(A) 1, 2, 3 (B) 2, 4, 5
29. The approximate ratio of resistances in the forward (C) 1, 3, 4 (D) 2, 3, 4
and reverse bias of the PN-junction diode is -
(A) 102 : 1 (B) 10–2 : 1 33. For the given circuit of PN-junction diode, which of
(C) 1 : 10 –4 (D) 1 : 104 the following statements is correct -
30. The dominant mechanisms for motion of charge

carriers in forward and reverse biased silicon P-N
junctions are -
V
(A) Drift in forward bias, diffusion in reverse bias
(B) Diffusion in forward bias, drift in reverse bias (A) In forward biasing the voltage across R is V
(C) Diffusion in both forward and reverse bias (B) In forward biasing the voltage across R is 2V
(C) In reverse biasing the voltage across R is V
(D) Drift in both forward and reverse bias
(D) In reverse biasing the voltage across R is 2V
Page 186
34. Current in the circuit will be - 38. What is the value of output voltage V0 in the circuit
20 shown in the figure ?
30
i
20 5V +
V0
20V
5 5 6V
(A) A (B) A –
40 50
5 5
(C) A (D) A
10 20
(A) 6 V (B) 14 V
35. The diode used in the circuit shown in the figure (C) 20 V (D) 26 V
has a constant voltage drop of 0.5 V at all currents
and a maximum power rating of 100 milli watts.
Passage based questions : (39-40)
What should be the value of the resistor R, connected
The circuit shown in diagram contains two diodes
in series with the diode for obtaining maximum
each with a forward resistance of 50 ohm and with
current -
infinite reverse resistance. If the battery voltage is
R
6V then –
0.5V
D1 150
1.5V
(A) 1.5 (B) 5 D2 50

(C) 6.67 (D) 200
36. In the following circuits PN-junction diodes

6V 100
D1, D2 and D3 are ideal for the following potential of
A and B, the correct increasing order of resistance
between A and B will be -
D1 39. Current through 100 resistance is -
R
(A) 0 (B) 0.02 amp
D2 R (C) 0.03 amp (D) none of these
R D3 R R 40. Current through 50 resistance is -

4 4
(A) 0
A B
(B) 0.02 amp
(i) – 10 V, – 5 V (ii) – 5V, – 10 V (C) 0.03 amp
(iii) – 4V, – 12 V (D) none of these is moderate
(A) (i) < (ii) < (iii) (B) (iii) < (ii) < (i)
(C) (ii) = (iii) < (i) (D) (i) = (iii) < (ii) 41. Which is the correct diagram of a half-wave
rectifier?
37. Mobility of electrons in Germanium of N types &
+ +
their conductivity are 3900 cm 2 /volt-sec &
5 mho/cm respectively. If effect of holes are (A) (B)
negligible then concentration of impurity will be- – –
(A) 8 × 1015 per cm3

(B) 9.25 × 1014 per cm3 + +
(C) 6 × 1013 per cm3 (C) (D)

(D) 9 × 1013 per cm3 – –
Page 187
42. In the diagram, the input is across the terminals A

and C and the output is across the terminals B and
D, then the output is - (A) (B)
B
A C
(C) (D)
D
(A) zero (B) same as input 47. A full wave rectifier circuit along with the input and
(C) full wave rectifier (D) half wave rectifier output voltage is shown in the figure.
43. If a full wave rectifier circuit is operating from 50 1 Output

Hz mains, the fundamental frequency in the ripple 2 voltage
will be -
(A) 50 Hz (B) 70.7 Hz Input
voltage
(C) 100 Hz (D) 25 Hz
44. In a full wave rectifiers input ac current has a Output

frequency . The output frequency of current is voltage A B C D
(A) /2 (B) 

(C) 2 (D) None of these The contribution to output voltage from
diode – 2 to -
45. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 200 volt is (A) A, C (B) B, D
connected to a diode and resistor R in the circuit (C) B, C (D) A, D
shown so that half wave rectification occurs. If the
forward resistance of the diode is negligible
48. The output current versus time curve of a rectifier
compared to R then rms voltage (in volt) across R
is shown in the figure. The average value of the
is approximately -
output current in this case is -
C u r r e n
E0 = 200 volt ~ R
t
is
(A) 200 (B) 100
Time 
200
(C) (D) 280
2 (A) 0 (B) i0/
(C) 2i0/ (D) i0
46. In the half-wave rectifier circuit shown. Which one
of the following wave forms is true for VCD, the
output across C and D? 49. n-p-n transistors are preferred to p-n-p transistors
because -
(A) they have low cost
A C
(B) they have low dissipation energy
P Q V CD RL (C) they are capable of handling large power
(D) electrons have high mobility than holes and hence
B D high mobility of energy
Page 188
50. For a common base transistor if the values of If and 55. What is the voltage gain in a common-emitter
Ic are 103 A and 0.96 mA respectively then the amplifier, where input resistance is 3 and load
resistance 24 ? Take = 0.6 -
value of IE will be -
(A) 8.4 (B) 4.8
(A) 0.04 mA (B) 4 mA
(C) 2.4 (D) 1.2
(C) 0.4 mA (D) 0.004 mA
56. Compared to CB amplifier, the CE amplifier
51. The dc current gain of a transistor in CB has -
configuration is 0.99 . Find its dc current gain in (A) lower input resistance
CE configuration. (B) higher output resistance
(A) 99 (B) 400 (C) lower current amplification
(C) 300 (D) 50 (D) higher current amplification
52. In a common emitter transistor circuit, the base 57. In the given transistor circuit, the base current is 35
current is 40 A, then VBE is - A. The value of Rb is -
VCC=100V E C
B
Rb RL
C 7V
(A) 100 k (B) 200 k

B
(C) 300 k (D) 400 k
E
58. I. In a P-N-P type common base amplifier the input
and output are in same phase.
(A) 2 V (B) 0.2 V II. In a P-N-P common base amplifier input and
(C) 0.8 V (D) Zero output are out of phase.
III. In a N-P-N- common base amplifier the input
53. A transsitor is operated in CE configuration at and output are in same phase.
VCC = 2 V such that a change in base current from IV. In a N-P-N common base amplifier input and
100 A to 200 A produces a change in the collector output are out of phase.
current from 9mA to 16.5 mA. The value of current State if -
gain,  is - (A) I and III are correct (B) II and III are correct
(C) I and IV are correct (D) II and IV are correct
(A) 45 (B) 50
(C) 60 (D) 75
59. In a transistor the base is made very thin and is lightly
54. An n-p-n transistor circuit is arranged as shown in doped with an impurity because-
fig. It is - (A) to enable the collector to collect 95% of
the holes or electrons coming from the emitter side
(B) to enable the emitter to emit small number of
n RL holes or electrons
p Vout (C) to save the transistor from higher current effects
n
V in (D) none of the above
60. In an NPN transistor 1010 electrons enter the emitter

(A) a common-base amplifier circuit in 10–6s. 2% of the electrons are lost in the base.
(B) a common-emitter amplifier circuit The current transfer ratio will be-
(A) 0.95 (B) 0.96
(C) a common-collector amplifier circuit
(C) 0.97 (D) 0.98
Page 189
61. In an NPN transistor the values of base current and 66. For the given combination of gates, if the logic states
collector current are 100A and 9 mA respectively, of inputs A, B, C are as follows A = B = C = 0 and A
the emitter current will be- = B = 1, C = 0 then the logic states of output D are -
(A) 9.1 mA (B) 18.2 mA
(C) 9.1A (D) 18.2 A A
B G1 G2
C D
62. For a common base amplifier, the values of resistance
gain and voltage gain are 3000 and 2800 respectively. (A) 0, 0 (B) 0, 1
The current gain will be - (C) 1, 0 (D) 1, 1
(A) 0.93 (B) 0.83
67. Which of the following gates will have an output of 1 ?
(C) 0.73 (D) 0.63
1
(A) 0 (B) 01
63. Given below are four logic gate symbol (figure).
Those for OR, NOR and NAND are respectively - (C) 01 (D) 01
y y 68. This symbol represents -

A A
B B A
(2) y
(1) B
y y (A) NOT gate (B) OR gate
A A
B B (C) AND gate (D) NOR gate
(3) (4)
69. The output of a NAND gate is 0 -
(A) 1, 4, 3 (B) 4, 1, 2 (A) If both inputs are 0
(C) 1, 3, 4 (D) 4, 2, 1 (B) If one input is 0 and the other input is 1
(C) If both inputs are 1
64. The following truth table corresponds to the logic (D) Either if both inputs are 1 or if one of the inputs
gate - is 1 and the other 0
A 0 0 1 1 70. Which logic gate is represented by the following
B 0 1 0 1 combination of logic gates -
X 0 1 1 1
A
(A) NAND (B) OR
Y
(C) AND (D) XOR
B
65. The combination of ‘NAND’ gates shown here under (A) OR (B) NAND
(figure) are equivalent to – (C) AND (D) NOR
71. The output of OR gate is 1 -
A (A) If both inputs are zero
C (B) If either or both inputs are 1
B (C) Only if both input are 1
(D) If either input is zero
A 72. An oscillator is nothing but an amplifier with
B C
(A) Positive feedback (B) Negative feedback
(A) An OR gate and an AND gate respectively (C) Voltage gain (D) No feedback
(B) An AND gate and a NOT gate respectively 73. In which of the configurations of a transistor, the
(C) An AND gate and an OR gate respectively power gain is highest ?
(D) An OR gate and a NOT gate respectively (A) Common base (B) Common emitter
(C) Common collector (D) Same in all the three
Page 190
1. B 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. C 7. D
8. D 9. A 10. B 11. C 12. B 13. C 14. C
15. A 16. A 17. D 18. A 19. D 20. A 21. B
22. A 23. A 24. A 25. B 26. D 27. A 28. C
29. D 30. B 31. D 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. B
36. C 37. A 38. A 39. B 40. A 41. B 42. C
43. C 44. C 45. B 46. B 47. B 48. C 49. D
50. A 51. A 52. B 53. D 54. B 55. B 56. D
57. B 58. A 59. A 60. D 61. A 62. A 63. C
64. B 65. A 66. D 67. C 68. A 69. C 70. C
71. B 72. A 73. B
1. A 2. B,C 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. A 7. A
8. C 9. A 10. B 11. D 12. A 13. B 14. B
15. C 16. C 17. C 18. D 19. B 20. B 21. A
22. A 23. A 24. B 25. B 26. C 27. A 28. A,D
29. B 30. D 31. B 32. A 33. C
Exercise - 3 Previous Year | JEE Mains

1. A 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. A 7. B
8. C 9. D 10. B 11. A 12. C 13. C 14. C
15. A 16. D 17. C 18. D 19. B,C 20. D 21. D
22. D 23. D 24. C 25. C 26. A 27. B 28. D
29. C 30. C 31. B 32. D 33. B 34. A,D
Page 191

DOC-20241207-WA0026. - converted (1) - converted (3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOC-20241207-WA0026. - converted (1) - converted (3)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOC-20241207-WA0026. - converted (1) - converted (3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3.

44 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

(A) 1 : 2 : 4 (B) 1 : 2 : 5 (C) (D) a2 : b2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

(A) 1, 0, -0.5 (B) 1, 0, 0.5  m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

O 4s 8s 12s 16s B (a) average velocity and

32. Displacement-time graph of a particle moving in a (C) 3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

75° 74. A police jeep is chasing a culprit going on a motor

4 2 76. A cart is moving horizontally along a straight line

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Section H - Rain Problems, Aircraft wind

(A) (A) 10 m (B) 5 m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

(C) T (D) 2T (C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Exercise - 2 (Leve-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

3. The unit of percentage error is Section B - Mathematical operation with

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

15. According to Joule’s law of heating, heat produced

(A) (B) 17. The length of a cylinder is measured with a metre

18. In an experiment, the following observations were

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

22. A thin copper wire of length l metre increases in

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Exercise - 2 (Leve-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

2. Find velocity of block 'B' at the instant shown in

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

(D) None of these

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

23. An aeroplane, which together with its load has a

26. A trolley is accelerating down an incline of angle 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

29. Two wooden blocks are moving on a smooth

 in the figure. The magnitude of force P is :

Section E - Pulley Block system

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4

37. Three equal weights A, B, C of mass 2 kg each are

39. A system consists of two cubes of masses m1 and

(B) more than that in case II (C) (m1 + m2) g m2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 4 4